If you don't have a password yet, stop by the circulation desk the next time you're in the library. We'll happily set one up for you.
+
Don't have a library card?
+
If you don't have a library card, stop by your local library to sign up.
+
+ Any HTML in this box will replace the above text below the log in
+ box.No login instructions
+
+`OpacAddMastheadLibraryPulldown <#OpacAddMastheadLibraryPulldown>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Default: Don't add
+
+Asks: \_\_\_ a library select pulldown menu on the OPAC masthead.
+
+Values:
+
+- Add
+
+ Library select box on Koha OPAC
+ |image65|
+
+- Don't Add
+
+ No library select box on Koha OPAC
+ |image66|
+
+`OPACBaseURL <#OPACBaseURL>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Asks: The OPAC is located at \_\_\_
+
+Description:
+
+- This preference is looking for the URL of your public catalog (OPAC)
+ with the http:// in front of it (enter http://www.mycatalog.com
+ instead of www.mycatalog.com). Once it is filled in Koha will use it
+ to generate permanent links in your RSS feeds, for your social
+ network share buttons and in your staff client when generating links
+ to bib records in the OPAC.
+
+ **Important**
+
+ Do not include a trailing slash in the URL this will break links
+ created using this URL. (example: http://www.google.com not
+ http://www.google.com/)
+
+ **Important**
+
+ This must be filled in with the URL of your public catalog for RSS,
+ unAPI, and search plugins to work.
+
+ **Important**
+
+ This must be filled in with the URL of your public catalog to show
+ 'OPAC View' links from bib records in the staff client:
+
+With OPACBaseURL set, links to the OPAC will appear on each individual
+bib record in the staff client
+|image67|
+
+`OpacAdditionalStylesheet <#OpacAdditionalStylesheet>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Asks: Include the additional CSS stylesheet \_\_\_ to override specified
+settings from the default stylesheet.
+
+Description:
+
+- The preference can look for stylesheets in the template directory for
+ your OPAC language, for instance: /koha-tmpl/opac-tmpl/prog/en/css.
+ If you upload a custom file, opac-mystyles.css to this directory, you
+ can specify it by entering opac-mystyles.css in your
+ opaccolorstylesheet system preference. This adds your custom
+ stylesheet as a linked stylesheet alongside the OPAC's default CSS
+ files. This method is preferable because linked stylesheets are
+ cached by the user's browser, meaning upon repeat visits to your site
+ the user's browser will not have to re-download the stylesheet,
+ instead using the copy in the browser's cache.
+
+- If you would rather, you can upload your CSS to another server and
+ enter the full URL pointing to it's location remember to begin the
+ URL with http://
+
+ **Note**
+
+ Leave this field blank to disable it
+
+ **Note**
+
+ This file will add a linked CSS, not replace the existing default
+ CSS.
+
+`opaccredits <#opaccredits>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Asks: Include the following HTML in the footer of all pages in the OPAC:
+
+ **Note**
+
+ Click the 'Click to edit; link to enter HTML to appear at the bottom
+ of every page in the OPAC
+
+HTML version of a footer for your OPAC
+|image68|
+
+A sample of what can appear in your OPAC credits/footer
+|image69|
+
+Description:
+
+- This setting is for credits that will appear at the bottom of your
+ OPAC pages. Credits traditionally encompass copyright information,
+ last date updated, hyperlinks or other information represented in an
+ HTML format. This is static information and any updates must be
+ entered manually.
+
+Learn more in the `OPAC Editable Regions <#editableopac>`__ section.
+
+`OpacCustomSearch <#OpacCustomSearch>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Asks: Replace the search box at the top of OPAC pages with the following
+HTML
+
+Description:
+
+- This preference allows you to replace the default search box at the
+ top of the OPAC : Default search box
+
+ with any HTML you would like :Edited search box area
+
+`OPACDisplay856uAsImage <#OPACDisplay856uAsImage>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Default: Neither details or results page
+
+Asks: Display the URI in the 856u field as an image on: \_\_\_
+
+Values:
+
+- Both results and details pages
+
+ - **Important**
+
+ Not implemented yet
+
+- Detail page only
+
+ - **Important**
+
+ `OPACXSLTDetailsDisplay <#OPACXSLTDetailsDisplay>`__ needs to
+ have a value in it for this preference to work.
+
+ Showing the 856u as an image
+ |image70|
+
+- Neither details or results page
+
+- Results page only
+
+ - **Important**
+
+ Not yet implemented
+
+Description:
+
+- In addition to this option being set, the corresponding XSLT option
+ must be turned on. Also, the corresponding 856q field must have a
+ valid MIME image extension (e.g., "jpg") or MIME image type (i.e.
+ starting with "image/"), or the generic indicator "img" entered in
+ the field. When all of the requirements are met, an image file will
+ be displayed instead of the standard link text. Clicking on the image
+ will open it in the same way as clicking on the link text. When you
+ click on the image it should open to full size, in the current window
+ or in a new window depending on the value in the system pref
+ `OPACURLOpenInNewWindow <#OPACURLOpenInNewWindow>`__.
+
+ Sample 856 in MARC Record
+ |image71|
+
+`OpacExportOptions <#OpacExportOptions>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Default: Default OpacExportOptions options
+
+Asks: List export options that should be available from OPAC detail page
+: \_\_\_
+
+Description:
+
+- In the OPAC on the right of each bib record there is a menu that
+ allows for saving the record in various formats. This patch will
+ allow you to define which options are in the pull down menu.
+ Available options are: BIBTEX (bibtex), Dublin Core (dc), MARCXML
+ (marcxml), MARC-8 encoded MARC (marc8), Unicode/UTF-8 encoded MARC
+ (utf8), Unicode/UTF-8 encoded MARC without local use -9xx, x9x, xx9-
+ fields and subfields (marcstd), MODS (mods), and RIS (ris).
+
+`OPACFallback <#OPACFallback>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Default: bootstrap
+
+Asks: Use the \_\_\_ theme as the fallback theme on the OPAC.
+
+Description:
+
+- This preference has no use right now, as Koha has only one theme, but
+ if your library has a custom theme it will show here as an option.
+ The purpose of this preference is to provide a way to choose to what
+ theme to fallback on when you have a partial theme in place.
+
+`OpacFavicon <#OpacFavicon>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Asks: Use the image at \_\_\_ for the OPAC's favicon.
+
+ **Important**
+
+ This should be a complete URL, starting with http://
+
+ **Note**
+
+ Turn your logo into a favicon with the `Favicon
+ Generator `__.
+
+Description:
+
+- The favicon is the little icon that appears next to the URL in the
+ address bar in most browsers. The default value for this field (if
+ left blank) is the small 'K' in the Koha logo.
+
+ Default Koha Favicon
+ |image72|
+
+`opacheader <#opacheader>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Asks: Include the following HTML in the header of all pages in the OPAC
+
+Sample HTML to be displayed at the top of my OPAC
+|image73|
+
+ **Note**
+
+ This value will appear above the main content of your page
+
+OPAC display of the value from 'opacheader'
+|image74|
+
+ **Note**
+
+ Edit '`LibraryName <#LibraryName>`__' if you'd like to edit the
+ contents of the tag
+
+Learn more in the `OPAC Editable Regions <#editableopac>`__ section.
+
+`OpacHighlightedWords & NotHighlightedWords <#OpacHighlightedWords>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+OpacHighlightedWords Default: Don't highlight
+
+NotHighlightedWords Default: and\|or\|not
+
+Asks: \_\_\_ words the patron searched for in their search results and
+detail pages; To prevent certain words from ever being highlighted,
+enter a list of stopwords here \_\_\_ (separate columns with \|)
+
+OpacHighlightedWords Values:
+
+- Don't highlight
+
+- Highlight
+
+`OpacKohaUrl <#OpacKohaUrl>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Default: Don't show
+
+Values:
+
+- Don't show
+
+- Show
+
+Description:
+
+- When this preference is set to 'Show' text will appear in the bottom
+ right of the OPAC footer stating 'Powered by Koha' and linking to the
+ official Koha website.
+
+ Powered by Koha
+ |image75|
+
+`OpacLangSelectorMode <#OpacLangSelectorMode>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Default: only footer
+
+Asks: Display language selector on \_\_\_.
+
+Values:
+
+- both top and footer
+
+- only footer
+
+- top
+
+Description:
+
+- If you have the `opaclanguagesdisplay <#opaclanguagesdisplay>`__
+ preference set to display language options in the public catlaog,
+ then this preference will allow you to control where the language
+ selector shows. You can choose to show it only on the top or bottom
+ or in both places.
+
+`opaclayoutstylesheet <#opaclayoutstylesheet>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Default: opac.css
+
+Asks: Use the CSS stylesheet /css/ \_\_\_ on all pages in the OPAC,
+instead of the default
+
+Description:
+
+- This setting's function is to point to the \*.css file used to define
+ the OPAC layout. A \*.css file is a cascading stylesheet which is
+ used in conjunction with HTML to set how the HTML page is formatted
+ and will look on the OPAC. There are two stylesheets that come with
+ the system; opac.css and opac2.css. A custom stylesheet may also be
+ used. The stylesheets listed in the opaclayoutstylesheet preference
+ are held on the Koha server.
+
+ **Note**
+
+ Leave this field blank to disable it and let Koha use the default
+ file instead
+
+ **Important**
+
+ Using a custom value in this preference causes Koha to completely
+ ignore the default layout stylesheet.
+
+`OpacLocationBranchToDisplay <#OpacLocationBranchToDisplay>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Default: holding library
+
+Asks: Display the \_\_\_ for items on the OPAC record details page.
+
+Values:
+
+- holding library
+
+- home and holding library
+
+- home library
+
+Description:
+
+- Defines whether to display the holding library, the home library, or
+ both for the opac details page.
+
+`OpacLocationBranchToDisplayShelving <#OpacLocationBranchToDisplayShelving>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Default: holding library
+
+Asks: Display the shelving location under the \_\_\_ for items on the
+OPAC record details page.
+
+Values:
+
+- holding library
+
+- home and holding library
+
+- home library
+
+Description:
+
+- Defines where the shelving location should be displayed, under the
+ home library, the holding library, or both.
+
+`OpacMaintenance <#OpacMaintenance>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Default: Don't show
+
+Asks: \_\_\_ a warning that the OPAC is under maintenance, instead of
+the OPAC itself.
+
+ **Note**
+
+ this shows the same warning as when the database needs to be
+ upgraded, but unconditionally.
+
+Description:
+
+- This preference allows the system administrator to turn off the OPAC
+ during maintenance and display a message to users. When this
+ preference is switched to "Show" the OPAC is not usable. The text of
+ this message is not editable at this time.
+
+Values:
+
+- Don't show
+
+- Show
+
+ - When this preference is set to show the maintenance message the
+ ability to search the OPAC is disabled and a message appears. The
+ default message can be altered by using the
+ `OpacMaintenanceNotice <#OpacMaintenanceNotice>`__ preference.
+
+ OPAC Maintenance Message
+ |image76|
+
+`OpacMaintenanceNotice <#OpacMaintenanceNotice>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Asks: Show the following HTML when OpacMaintenance is enabled
+
+Descritpion:
+
+- This preference will allow you to set the text the OPAC displays when
+ the `OpacMaintenance <#OpacMaintenance>`__ preference is set to
+ 'Show.'
+
+`OpacMainUserBlock <#OpacMainUserBlock>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Default: Welcome to Koha...
+
+Asks: Show the following HTML in its own column on the main page of the
+OPAC
+
+Description:
+
+- HTML entered in this field will appear in the center of the main page
+ of your OPAC
+
+Sample OpacMainUserBlock appears below the search bar
+|image77|
+
+Learn more in the `OPAC Editable Regions <#editableopac>`__ section.
+
+`OpacMaxItemsToDisplay <#OpacMaxItemsToDisplay>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Default: 50
+
+Asks: Display up to \_\_\_ items on the biblio detail page
+
+Description:
+
+- This preference will help with slow load times on the bibliographic
+ detail pages by limiting the number of items to display by default.
+ If the biblio has more items than this, a link is displayed instead
+ that allows the user to choose to display all items.
+
+`OPACMySummaryHTML <#OPACMySummaryHTML>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Asks: Include a "Links" column on the "my summary" tab when a user is
+logged in to the OPAC, with the following HTML (leave blank to disable).
+
+Description:
+
+- In this preference you can enter HTML that will appear on the
+ 'Checked Out' tab on the 'My Summary' section when logged in to the
+ OPAC. The placeholders {BIBLIONUMBER}, {TITLE}, {ISBN} and {AUTHOR}
+ will be replaced with information from the displayed record. This can
+ be used to enter in 'share' links for social networks or generate
+ searches against other library catalogs.
+
+ Example of 'Links' column with a value in the OPACMySummaryHTML
+ preference
+ |image78|
+
+Sample Data:
+
+::
+
+
+
+`OPACMySummaryNote <#OPACMySummaryNote>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Asks: Note to display on the patron summary page.
+
+Description:
+
+- This preference will display text above the patron's summary and
+ below the welcome message when the patron logs in to the OPAC and
+ view their 'my summary' tab.OPACMySummaryNote in the OPAC
+
+`OpacNav <#OpacNav>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Default: Important links here.
+
+Asks: Show the following HTML on the left hand column of the main page
+and patron account on the OPAC (generally navigation links)
+
+Sample navigation links
+|image79|
+
+Learn more in the `OPAC Editable Regions <#editableopac>`__ section.
+
+`OpacNavBottom <#OpacNavBottom>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Asks: Show the following HTML on the left hand column of the main page
+and patron account on the OPAC, after `OpacNav <#OpacNav>`__, and before
+patron account links if available:
+
+Description: When a patron is logged in to their account they see a
+series of tabs to access their account information.
+`OpacNav <#OpacNav>`__ appears above this list of tabs and OpacNavBottom
+will appear below them. When not on the patron account pages the HTML in
+OpacNavBottom will just appear right below `OpacNav <#OpacNav>`__.
+
+OpacNav and OpacNavBottom on Patron Account
+|image80|
+
+`OpacNavRight <#OpacNavRight>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Asks: Show the following HTML in the right hand column of the main page
+under the main login form.
+
+Description: HTML entered in this preference will appear on the right
+hand side of the OPAC under the log in form. If the log in form is not
+visible this content will move up on the right column.
+
+OpacNavRight
+|image81|
+
+`OPACNoResultsFound <#OPACNoResultsFound>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+No Default
+
+Asks: Display this HTML when no results are found for a search in the
+OPAC
+
+This HTML will display below the existing notice that no results were
+found for your search.
+
+HTML in OPACNoResultsFound will appear below lines that look like this
+|image82|
+
+ **Note**
+
+ You can insert placeholders {QUERY\_KW} that will be replaced with
+ the keywords of the query.
+
+`OpacPublic <#OpacPublic>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Default: Enable
+
+Asks: \_\_\_ Koha OPAC as public. Private OPAC requires authentication
+before accessing the OPAC.
+
+Values:
+
+- Don't enable
+
+- Enable
+
+Description:
+
+- This preference determines if your OPAC is accessible and searchable
+ by anyone or only by members of the library. If set to 'Don't enable'
+ only members who are logged into the OPAC can search. Most libraries
+ will leave this setting at its default of 'Enable' to allow their
+ OPAC to be searched by anyone and only require login for access to
+ personalized content.
+
+`OPACResultsSidebar <#OPACResultsSidebar>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Asks: Include the following HTML under the facets in OPAC search results
+
+Description:
+
+- The HTML entered in this preference will appear on the search results
+ pages below the list of facets on the left side of the screen.
+
+`OPACSearchForTitleIn <#OPACSearchForTitleIn>`__
+''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
+
+Default:
If you don't have a password yet, stop by the circulation desk the next time you're in the library. We'll happily set one up for you.
-
Don't have a library card?
-
If you don't have a library card, stop by your local library to sign up.
-
- Any HTML in this box will replace the above text below the log in
- box.No login instructions
-
-`OpacAddMastheadLibraryPulldown <#OpacAddMastheadLibraryPulldown>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't add
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ a library select pulldown menu on the OPAC masthead.
-
-Values:
-
-- Add
-
- Library select box on Koha OPAC
- |image65|
-
-- Don't Add
-
- No library select box on Koha OPAC
- |image66|
-
-`OPACBaseURL <#OPACBaseURL>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: The OPAC is located at \_\_\_
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference is looking for the URL of your public catalog (OPAC)
- with the http:// in front of it (enter http://www.mycatalog.com
- instead of www.mycatalog.com). Once it is filled in Koha will use it
- to generate permanent links in your RSS feeds, for your social
- network share buttons and in your staff client when generating links
- to bib records in the OPAC.
-
- **Important**
-
- Do not include a trailing slash in the URL this will break links
- created using this URL. (example: http://www.google.com not
- http://www.google.com/)
-
- **Important**
-
- This must be filled in with the URL of your public catalog for RSS,
- unAPI, and search plugins to work.
-
- **Important**
-
- This must be filled in with the URL of your public catalog to show
- 'OPAC View' links from bib records in the staff client:
-
-With OPACBaseURL set, links to the OPAC will appear on each individual
-bib record in the staff client
-|image67|
-
-`OpacAdditionalStylesheet <#OpacAdditionalStylesheet>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Include the additional CSS stylesheet \_\_\_ to override specified
-settings from the default stylesheet.
-
-Description:
-
-- The preference can look for stylesheets in the template directory for
- your OPAC language, for instance: /koha-tmpl/opac-tmpl/prog/en/css.
- If you upload a custom file, opac-mystyles.css to this directory, you
- can specify it by entering opac-mystyles.css in your
- opaccolorstylesheet system preference. This adds your custom
- stylesheet as a linked stylesheet alongside the OPAC's default CSS
- files. This method is preferable because linked stylesheets are
- cached by the user's browser, meaning upon repeat visits to your site
- the user's browser will not have to re-download the stylesheet,
- instead using the copy in the browser's cache.
-
-- If you would rather, you can upload your CSS to another server and
- enter the full URL pointing to it's location remember to begin the
- URL with http://
-
- **Note**
-
- Leave this field blank to disable it
-
- **Note**
-
- This file will add a linked CSS, not replace the existing default
- CSS.
-
-`opaccredits <#opaccredits>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Include the following HTML in the footer of all pages in the OPAC:
-
- **Note**
-
- Click the 'Click to edit; link to enter HTML to appear at the bottom
- of every page in the OPAC
-
-HTML version of a footer for your OPAC
-|image68|
-
-A sample of what can appear in your OPAC credits/footer
-|image69|
-
-Description:
-
-- This setting is for credits that will appear at the bottom of your
- OPAC pages. Credits traditionally encompass copyright information,
- last date updated, hyperlinks or other information represented in an
- HTML format. This is static information and any updates must be
- entered manually.
-
-Learn more in the `OPAC Editable Regions <#editableopac>`__ section.
-
-`OpacCustomSearch <#OpacCustomSearch>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Replace the search box at the top of OPAC pages with the following
-HTML
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference allows you to replace the default search box at the
- top of the OPAC : Default search box
-
- with any HTML you would like :Edited search box area
-
-`OPACDisplay856uAsImage <#OPACDisplay856uAsImage>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Neither details or results page
-
-Asks: Display the URI in the 856u field as an image on: \_\_\_
-
-Values:
-
-- Both results and details pages
-
- - **Important**
-
- Not implemented yet
-
-- Detail page only
-
- - **Important**
-
- `OPACXSLTDetailsDisplay <#OPACXSLTDetailsDisplay>`__ needs to
- have a value in it for this preference to work.
-
- Showing the 856u as an image
- |image70|
-
-- Neither details or results page
-
-- Results page only
-
- - **Important**
-
- Not yet implemented
-
-Description:
-
-- In addition to this option being set, the corresponding XSLT option
- must be turned on. Also, the corresponding 856q field must have a
- valid MIME image extension (e.g., "jpg") or MIME image type (i.e.
- starting with "image/"), or the generic indicator "img" entered in
- the field. When all of the requirements are met, an image file will
- be displayed instead of the standard link text. Clicking on the image
- will open it in the same way as clicking on the link text. When you
- click on the image it should open to full size, in the current window
- or in a new window depending on the value in the system pref
- `OPACURLOpenInNewWindow <#OPACURLOpenInNewWindow>`__.
-
- Sample 856 in MARC Record
- |image71|
-
-`OpacExportOptions <#OpacExportOptions>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Default OpacExportOptions options
-
-Asks: List export options that should be available from OPAC detail page
-: \_\_\_
-
-Description:
-
-- In the OPAC on the right of each bib record there is a menu that
- allows for saving the record in various formats. This patch will
- allow you to define which options are in the pull down menu.
- Available options are: BIBTEX (bibtex), Dublin Core (dc), MARCXML
- (marcxml), MARC-8 encoded MARC (marc8), Unicode/UTF-8 encoded MARC
- (utf8), Unicode/UTF-8 encoded MARC without local use -9xx, x9x, xx9-
- fields and subfields (marcstd), MODS (mods), and RIS (ris).
-
-`OPACFallback <#OPACFallback>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: bootstrap
-
-Asks: Use the \_\_\_ theme as the fallback theme on the OPAC.
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference has no use right now, as Koha has only one theme, but
- if your library has a custom theme it will show here as an option.
- The purpose of this preference is to provide a way to choose to what
- theme to fallback on when you have a partial theme in place.
-
-`OpacFavicon <#OpacFavicon>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Use the image at \_\_\_ for the OPAC's favicon.
-
- **Important**
-
- This should be a complete URL, starting with http://
-
- **Note**
-
- Turn your logo into a favicon with the `Favicon
- Generator `__.
-
-Description:
-
-- The favicon is the little icon that appears next to the URL in the
- address bar in most browsers. The default value for this field (if
- left blank) is the small 'K' in the Koha logo.
-
- Default Koha Favicon
- |image72|
-
-`opacheader <#opacheader>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Include the following HTML in the header of all pages in the OPAC
-
-Sample HTML to be displayed at the top of my OPAC
-|image73|
-
- **Note**
-
- This value will appear above the main content of your page
-
-OPAC display of the value from 'opacheader'
-|image74|
-
- **Note**
-
- Edit '`LibraryName <#LibraryName>`__' if you'd like to edit the
- contents of the tag
-
-Learn more in the `OPAC Editable Regions <#editableopac>`__ section.
-
-`OpacHighlightedWords & NotHighlightedWords <#OpacHighlightedWords>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-OpacHighlightedWords Default: Don't highlight
-
-NotHighlightedWords Default: and\|or\|not
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ words the patron searched for in their search results and
-detail pages; To prevent certain words from ever being highlighted,
-enter a list of stopwords here \_\_\_ (separate columns with \|)
-
-OpacHighlightedWords Values:
-
-- Don't highlight
-
-- Highlight
-
-`OpacKohaUrl <#OpacKohaUrl>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't show
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't show
-
-- Show
-
-Description:
-
-- When this preference is set to 'Show' text will appear in the bottom
- right of the OPAC footer stating 'Powered by Koha' and linking to the
- official Koha website.
-
- Powered by Koha
- |image75|
-
-`OpacLangSelectorMode <#OpacLangSelectorMode>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: only footer
-
-Asks: Display language selector on \_\_\_.
-
-Values:
-
-- both top and footer
-
-- only footer
-
-- top
-
-Description:
-
-- If you have the `opaclanguagesdisplay <#opaclanguagesdisplay>`__
- preference set to display language options in the public catlaog,
- then this preference will allow you to control where the language
- selector shows. You can choose to show it only on the top or bottom
- or in both places.
-
-`opaclayoutstylesheet <#opaclayoutstylesheet>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: opac.css
-
-Asks: Use the CSS stylesheet /css/ \_\_\_ on all pages in the OPAC,
-instead of the default
-
-Description:
-
-- This setting's function is to point to the \*.css file used to define
- the OPAC layout. A \*.css file is a cascading stylesheet which is
- used in conjunction with HTML to set how the HTML page is formatted
- and will look on the OPAC. There are two stylesheets that come with
- the system; opac.css and opac2.css. A custom stylesheet may also be
- used. The stylesheets listed in the opaclayoutstylesheet preference
- are held on the Koha server.
-
- **Note**
-
- Leave this field blank to disable it and let Koha use the default
- file instead
-
- **Important**
-
- Using a custom value in this preference causes Koha to completely
- ignore the default layout stylesheet.
-
-`OpacLocationBranchToDisplay <#OpacLocationBranchToDisplay>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: holding library
-
-Asks: Display the \_\_\_ for items on the OPAC record details page.
-
-Values:
-
-- holding library
-
-- home and holding library
-
-- home library
-
-Description:
-
-- Defines whether to display the holding library, the home library, or
- both for the opac details page.
-
-`OpacLocationBranchToDisplayShelving <#OpacLocationBranchToDisplayShelving>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: holding library
-
-Asks: Display the shelving location under the \_\_\_ for items on the
-OPAC record details page.
-
-Values:
-
-- holding library
-
-- home and holding library
-
-- home library
-
-Description:
-
-- Defines where the shelving location should be displayed, under the
- home library, the holding library, or both.
-
-`OpacMaintenance <#OpacMaintenance>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't show
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ a warning that the OPAC is under maintenance, instead of
-the OPAC itself.
-
- **Note**
-
- this shows the same warning as when the database needs to be
- upgraded, but unconditionally.
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference allows the system administrator to turn off the OPAC
- during maintenance and display a message to users. When this
- preference is switched to "Show" the OPAC is not usable. The text of
- this message is not editable at this time.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't show
-
-- Show
-
- - When this preference is set to show the maintenance message the
- ability to search the OPAC is disabled and a message appears. The
- default message can be altered by using the
- `OpacMaintenanceNotice <#OpacMaintenanceNotice>`__ preference.
-
- OPAC Maintenance Message
- |image76|
-
-`OpacMaintenanceNotice <#OpacMaintenanceNotice>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Show the following HTML when OpacMaintenance is enabled
-
-Descritpion:
-
-- This preference will allow you to set the text the OPAC displays when
- the `OpacMaintenance <#OpacMaintenance>`__ preference is set to
- 'Show.'
-
-`OpacMainUserBlock <#OpacMainUserBlock>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Welcome to Koha...
-
-Asks: Show the following HTML in its own column on the main page of the
-OPAC
-
-Description:
-
-- HTML entered in this field will appear in the center of the main page
- of your OPAC
-
-Sample OpacMainUserBlock appears below the search bar
-|image77|
-
-Learn more in the `OPAC Editable Regions <#editableopac>`__ section.
-
-`OpacMaxItemsToDisplay <#OpacMaxItemsToDisplay>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: 50
-
-Asks: Display up to \_\_\_ items on the biblio detail page
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference will help with slow load times on the bibliographic
- detail pages by limiting the number of items to display by default.
- If the biblio has more items than this, a link is displayed instead
- that allows the user to choose to display all items.
-
-`OPACMySummaryHTML <#OPACMySummaryHTML>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Include a "Links" column on the "my summary" tab when a user is
-logged in to the OPAC, with the following HTML (leave blank to disable).
-
-Description:
-
-- In this preference you can enter HTML that will appear on the
- 'Checked Out' tab on the 'My Summary' section when logged in to the
- OPAC. The placeholders {BIBLIONUMBER}, {TITLE}, {ISBN} and {AUTHOR}
- will be replaced with information from the displayed record. This can
- be used to enter in 'share' links for social networks or generate
- searches against other library catalogs.
-
- Example of 'Links' column with a value in the OPACMySummaryHTML
- preference
- |image78|
-
-Sample Data:
-
-::
-
-
-
-`OPACMySummaryNote <#OPACMySummaryNote>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Note to display on the patron summary page.
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference will display text above the patron's summary and
- below the welcome message when the patron logs in to the OPAC and
- view their 'my summary' tab.OPACMySummaryNote in the OPAC
-
-`OpacNav <#OpacNav>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Important links here.
-
-Asks: Show the following HTML on the left hand column of the main page
-and patron account on the OPAC (generally navigation links)
-
-Sample navigation links
-|image79|
-
-Learn more in the `OPAC Editable Regions <#editableopac>`__ section.
-
-`OpacNavBottom <#OpacNavBottom>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Show the following HTML on the left hand column of the main page
-and patron account on the OPAC, after `OpacNav <#OpacNav>`__, and before
-patron account links if available:
-
-Description: When a patron is logged in to their account they see a
-series of tabs to access their account information.
-`OpacNav <#OpacNav>`__ appears above this list of tabs and OpacNavBottom
-will appear below them. When not on the patron account pages the HTML in
-OpacNavBottom will just appear right below `OpacNav <#OpacNav>`__.
-
-OpacNav and OpacNavBottom on Patron Account
-|image80|
-
-`OpacNavRight <#OpacNavRight>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Show the following HTML in the right hand column of the main page
-under the main login form.
-
-Description: HTML entered in this preference will appear on the right
-hand side of the OPAC under the log in form. If the log in form is not
-visible this content will move up on the right column.
-
-OpacNavRight
-|image81|
-
-`OPACNoResultsFound <#OPACNoResultsFound>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-No Default
-
-Asks: Display this HTML when no results are found for a search in the
-OPAC
-
-This HTML will display below the existing notice that no results were
-found for your search.
-
-HTML in OPACNoResultsFound will appear below lines that look like this
-|image82|
-
- **Note**
-
- You can insert placeholders {QUERY\_KW} that will be replaced with
- the keywords of the query.
-
-`OpacPublic <#OpacPublic>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Enable
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ Koha OPAC as public. Private OPAC requires authentication
-before accessing the OPAC.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't enable
-
-- Enable
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference determines if your OPAC is accessible and searchable
- by anyone or only by members of the library. If set to 'Don't enable'
- only members who are logged into the OPAC can search. Most libraries
- will leave this setting at its default of 'Enable' to allow their
- OPAC to be searched by anyone and only require login for access to
- personalized content.
-
-`OPACResultsSidebar <#OPACResultsSidebar>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Include the following HTML under the facets in OPAC search results
-
-Description:
-
-- The HTML entered in this preference will appear on the search results
- pages below the list of facets on the left side of the screen.
-
-`OPACSearchForTitleIn <#OPACSearchForTitleIn>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default:
-
-Asks: Include a "More Searches" box on the detail pages of items on the
-OPAC, with the following HTML (leave blank to disable)
-
- **Note**
-
- The placeholders {BIBLIONUMBER}, {CONTROLNUMBER}, {TITLE}, {ISBN},
- {ISSN} and {AUTHOR} will be replaced with information from the
- displayed record.
-
-`OpacSeparateHoldings & OpacSeparateHoldingsBranch <#OpacSeparateHoldings>`__
-'''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-OpacSeparateHoldings default: Don't separate
-
-OpacSeparateHoldingsBranch default: home library
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ items display into two tabs, where the first tab contains
-items whose \_\_\_ is the logged in user's library. The second tab will
-contain all other items.
-
-OpacSeparateHoldings values:
-
-- Don't separate
-
-- Separate
-
-OpacSeparateHoldingsBranch values:
-
-- holding library
-
-- home library
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference lets you decide if you would like to have the holding
- information on the bibliographic detail page in the OPAC split in to
- multiple tabs. The default is to show all holdings on one tab.
-
- Separate holdings tabs
- |image83|
-
-`OPACShowBarcode <#OPACShowBarcode>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't show
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ the item's barcode on the holdings tab.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't show
-
- Barcode not shown in the OPAC
- |image84|
-
-- Show
-
- Barcode shown in the OPAC
- |image85|
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference allows you to control whether patrons can see items'
- barcodes in the OPAC.
-
-`OPACShowCheckoutName <#OPACShowCheckoutName>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't show
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ the name of the patron that has an item checked out on item
-detail pages on the OPAC.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't show
-
-- Show
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference allows all patrons to see who has the item checked
- out if it is checked out. In small corporate libraries (where the
- OPAC is behind a firewall and not publicly available) this can be
- helpful so coworkers can just contact the patron with the book
- themselves. In larger public and academic libraries setting this to
- 'Show' would pose serious privacy issues.
-
-`OPACShowHoldQueueDetails <#OPACShowHoldQueueDetails>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't show any hold details
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ to patrons in the OPAC.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't show any hold details
-
-- Show holds
-
- The holdings table on the bibliographic record will show the number
- of holds
- |image86|
-
-- Show holds and priority level
-
-- Show priority level
-
- Patron record in the OPAC shows where in line the patron waits for
- their hold.
- |image87|
-
- - `opacuserlogin <#opacuserlogin>`__ needs to be set to 'allow'
-
-`OpacShowRecentComments <#OpacShowRecentComments>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't show
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ a link to recent comments in the OPAC masthead.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't show
-
-- Show
-
-Description:
-
-- If you have chosen to allow comments in your OPAC by setting
- `reviewson <#reviewson>`__ to 'Allow' you can include a link to the
- recent comments under the search box at the top of your OPAC with
- this preference.
-
- Recent Comments link on OPAC
- |image88|
-
-`OPACShowUnusedAuthorities <#OPACShowUnusedAuthorities>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Show
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ unused authorities in the OPAC authority browser.
-
-Values:
-
-- Do not show
-
-- Show
-
- - **Important**
-
- Requires that the `OpacAuthorities <#OpacAuthorities>`__
- preference is set to 'Allow'
-
-Description:
-
-- When patrons search your authority file via the OPAC they will see
- all authorities in your system even if you don't have them linked to
- any bibliographic records. This preference lets you determine what
- the default behavior is when searching authorities via the OPAC. If
- you choose 'Do not show' it will only show patrons authority records
- that are linked to bib records in the search results. Otherwise the
- system will show all authority records even if they aren't linked to
- records.
-
-`OpacStarRatings <#OpacStarRatings>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: no
-
-Asks: Show star-ratings on \_\_\_ pages.
-
-Values:
-
-- no
-
-- only details
-
- Star Ratings on the Details Page
- |image89|
-
-- results and details
-
- OPAC Star Ratings on the Search Results
- |image90|
-
-Description:
-
-- Star ratings are a way for your patrons to leave ratings without
- having to leave a full review. Patrons who are not logged in will
- only be able to see the stars, once logged in patrons can click on
- the stars on the details page to leave their own rating. Clicking on
- the stars on the search results will not submit a rating.
-
-`OpacSuggestionManagedBy <#OpacSuggestionManagedBy>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Show
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ the name of the staff member who managed a suggestion in
-OPAC.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't show
-
-- Show
-
-Description:
-
-- If you're `allowing patrons to make purchase
- suggestions <#suggestionspref>`__ then they will see the 'my
- suggestions' tab when logged in. This tab shows the patron the
- librarian who approved or rejected the purchase suggestion. This
- preference controls if the patron sees the librarian's name or not.
-
-`opacthemes <#opacthemes>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: bootstrap
-
-Asks: Use the \_\_\_ theme on the OPAC.
-
-Values:
-
-- bootstrap
-
- Bootstrap Theme
-
- This theme is completely responsive
-
-`OPACURLOpenInNewWindow <#OPACURLOpenInNewWindow>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: don't
-
-Asks: When patrons click on a link to another website from your OPAC
-(like Amazon or OCLC), \_\_\_ open the website in a new window.
-
-Values:
-
-- do
-
-- don't
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference determines if URLs in the OPAC will open in a new
- window or not. When clicking on a link in the OPAC, a patron does not
- need to worry about navigating away from their search results.
-
-`OPACUserCSS <#OPACUserCSS>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Include the following CSS on all pages in the OPAC
-
-Description:
-
-- OPACUserCSS allows the administrator to enter styles that will
- overwrite the OPAC's default CSS as defined in 'opaclayoutstylesheet'
- or 'opacstylesheet'. Styles may be entered for any of the selectors
- found in the default style sheet. The default stylesheet will likely
- be found at
- http://your\_koha\_address/opac-tmpl/bootstrap/css/opac.css. Unlike
- `OpacAdditionalStylesheet <#OpacAdditionalStylesheet>`__ and
- `opaclayoutstylesheet <#opaclayoutstylesheet>`__ this preference will
- embed the CSS directly on your OPAC pages.
-
-`OPACUserJS <#opacuserjs>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Include the following JavaScript on all pages in the OPAC
-
-OPAC login box before OPACUserJS edit
-|image91|
-
-JavaScript in OPACUserJS to change the OPAC login box
-|image92|
-
-New OPAC login box after editing OPACUserJS
-|image93|
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference allows the administrator to enter JavaScript or
- JQuery that will be embedded across all pages of the OPAC.
- Administrators may use this preference to customize some of the
- interactive sections of Koha, customizing the text for the login
- prompts, for example. Sample JQuery scripts used by Koha libraries
- can be found on the wiki:
- http://wiki.koha-community.org/wiki/JQuery_Library.
-
-`OPACXSLTDetailsDisplay <#OPACXSLTDetailsDisplay>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: default
-
-Asks: Display OPAC details using XSLT stylesheet at \_\_\_
-
-Values:
-
-- leave empty to not use the XSLT stylesheet
-
- - In previous versions of Koha this was the setting that read
- 'normally'
-
-- enter "default" for the default one
-
-- put a path to define a XSLT file
-
- - ex: /path/to/koha/and/your/stylesheet.xsl
-
- - If in a multi-language system you can enter {langcode} in the path
- to tell Koha to look in the right language folder
-
- - ex:
- /home/koha/src/koha-tmpl/opac-tmpl/bootstrap/{langcode}/xslt/MARC21slim2OPACDetail.xsl
-
- - ex. http://mykohaopac.org/{langcode}/stylesheet.xsl
-
-- put an URL for an external specific stylesheet
-
- - ex: http://mykohaopac.org/stylesheet.xsl
-
-Description:
-
-- XSLT stylesheets allow for the customization of the details shows on
- the screen when viewing a bib record. This preference will allow you
- either use the default look that comes with Koha or design your own
- stylesheet.
-
-`OPACXSLTResultsDisplay <#OPACXSLTResultsDisplay>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: default
-
-Asks: Display OPAC results using XSLT stylesheet at \_\_\_
-
-Values:
-
-- leave empty to not use the XSLT stylesheet
-
- - In previous versions of Koha this was the setting that read
- 'normally'
-
-- enter "default" for the default one
-
-- put a path to define a XSLT file
-
- - ex: /path/to/koha/and/your/stylesheet.xsl
-
- - If in a multi-language system you can enter {langcode} in the path
- to tell Koha to look in the right language folder
-
- - ex:
- /home/koha/src/koha-tmpl/opac-tmpl/bootstrap/{langcode}/xslt/MARC21slim2OPACResults.xsl
-
- - ex. http://mykohaopac.org/{langcode}/stylesheet.xsl
-
-- put an URL for an external specific stylesheet
-
- - ex: http://mykohaopac.org/stylesheet.xsl
-
-Description:
-
-- XSLT stylesheets allow for the customization of the details shows on
- the screen when viewing the search results. This preference will
- allow you either use the default look that comes with Koha or design
- your own stylesheet.
-
-`Features <#opacfeaturesprefs>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-`numSearchRSSResults <#numSearchRSSResults>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: 50
-
-Asks: Display \_\_\_ search results in the RSS feed.
-
-Description:
-
-- By default the RSS feed that is automatically generated for every
- search results page will list 50 items. This can sometimes be too
- much for some RSS feed readers and for some people this isn't enough.
- This preference allows you to adjust this number to show the best
- number of results for your patrons.
-
-`OPACAcquisitionDetails <#OPACAcquisitionDetails>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't display
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ the acquisition details on OPAC detail pages.
-
-Values:
-
-- DisplayAcquisitions details in the OPAC
-
-- Don't display
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference shows the patrons how many items are on order in the
- Holdings tab if you have the `AcqCreateItem <#AcqCreateItem>`__ set
- to 'cataloging the record'
-
-`OpacAuthorities <#OpacAuthorities>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ patrons to search your authority records.
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference displays the link on the OPAC for the authority
- search. By setting the preference to "Allow" patrons can use this
- search link of the OPAC.
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
- - A link labeled 'Authority search' will appear at the top of your
- OPAC under the search box
-
- 'Browse by Subject' link under search box on OPAC
- |image94|
-
-- Don't allow
-
-`opacbookbag <#opacbookbag>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ patrons to store items in a temporary "Cart" on the OPAC.
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
-- Don't allow
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference allows the user to temporarily save a list of items
- found on the catalog. By using the Book Bag, or Cart, the user can
- print out or email a list of items found. The user does not need to
- be logged in. This list is temporary and will be emptied, or cleared,
- at the end of the session.
-
-`OpacBrowser <#OpacBrowser>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
- **Important**
-
- This preference only applies to French systems at this time.
-
-Default: Don't allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ patrons to browse subject authorities on OPAC
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
-- Don't allow
-
- **Important**
-
- run the `Authorities Browser Cron Job <#authbrowsercron>`__ to
- create the browser list
-
-`OpacBrowseResults <#OpacBrowseResults>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: enable
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ browsing and paging search results from the OPAC detail
-page.
-
-Values:
-
-- disable
-
-- enable
-
- Browsing and Paging Search Results
- |image95|
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference will control the option to return to your results
- and/or browse them from the detail page in the OPAC.
-
-`OpacCloud <#OpacCloud>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
- **Important**
-
- This preference only applies to French systems at this time.
-
-Default: Don't show
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ a subject cloud on OPAC
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't show
-
-- Show
-
- **Important**
-
- run the `Authorities Browser Cron Job <#authbrowsercron>`__ to
- create the browser list
-
-`OPACFinesTab <#OPACFinesTab>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ patrons to access the Fines tab on the My Account page on
-the OPAC.
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
- - `opacuserlogin <#opacuserlogin>`__ needs to be set to 'allow'
-
-- Don't allow
-
-`OpacHoldNotes <#OpacHoldNotes>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Do not allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ users to add a note when placing a hold.
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
- Holds notes in the OPAC
- |image96|
-
-- Do not allow
-
-`OPACISBD <#OPACISBD>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: `MARC21 Default Appendix <#opacisbdmarcdefault>`__
-
-Asks: Use the following as the OPAC ISBD template:
-
-Description:
-
-- This determines how the ISBD information will display in the OPAC.
- Elements in the list can be reordered to produce a different ISBD
- view. ISBD, the International Standard Bibliographic Description, was
- first introduced by IFLA (International Federation of Library
- Associations) in 1969 in order to provide guidelines for descriptive
- cataloging. The purpose of ISBD is to aid the international exchange
- of bibliographic records for a variety of materials.
-
-`OpacItemLocation <#OpacItemLocation>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: call number only
-
-Asks: Show \_\_\_\_ for items on the OPAC search results.
-
-Values:
-
-- call number only
-
-- collection code
-
-- location
-
-Description:
-
-- This setting allows users of the OPAC results XSLT stylesheet to
- choose to display collection code or location in addition to call
- number.
-
-`OpacPasswordChange <#OpacPasswordChange>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ patrons to change their own password on the OPAC.
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
- - `opacuserlogin <#opacuserlogin>`__ needs to be set to 'allow'
-
-- Don't allow
-
- **Important**
-
- Enabling this will break LDAP authentication.
-
-`OPACPatronDetails <#OPACPatronDetails>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ patrons to notify the library of changes to their contact
-information from the OPAC.
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
- - `opacuserlogin <#opacuserlogin>`__ needs to be set to 'allow'
-
-- Don't allow
-
-Description:
-
-- If patrons are allowed to notify the library of changes to their
- account then staff will need to approve the changes via the staff
- client. Notification of patron account requests will appear on the
- dashaboard below the list of modules with other pending actions.
-
- Patrons requesting modifications
- |image97|
-
- Once you click the notification you will be presented with the
- changes the patron would like to make to their account and from there
- you can choose how to proceed.
-
- Patrons modifications
- |image98|
-
- **Note**
-
- You can control what fields patrons see and can modify via the
- OPAC by setting the
- `PatronSelfRegistrationBorrowerMandatoryField <#PatronSelfRegistrationBorrowerMandatoryField>`__
- `PatronSelfRegistrationBorrowerUnwantedField <#PatronSelfRegistrationBorrowerUnwantedField>`__
- preferences.
-
-`OPACpatronimage <#OPACpatronimage>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't show
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ patron images on the patron information page in the OPAC.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't show
-
-- Show
-
-Description:
-
-- If `patronimages <#patronimages>`__ is set to allow the upload of
- patron images via the staff client, then setting this preference to
- 'show' will show the patron what image you have on file for them when
- they view their personal information on their account in the OPAC.
-
-`OPACPopupAuthorsSearch <#OPACPopupAuthorsSearch>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't display
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ the list of authors/subjects in a popup for a combined
-search on OPAC detail pages.
-
-Values:
-
-- Display
-
- Subject search pop up
-
- - **Important**
-
- This will only display the pop up if you are not using an XSLT
- stylesheet. Review your
- `OPACXSLTDetailsDisplay <#OPACXSLTDetailsDisplay>`__ to find
- out what stylesheet you're using.
-
-- Don't display
-
- - Authors and subjects will display as search links instead of pop
- up menus.
-
-Description:
-
-- If this preference is set to 'Display' then clicking a subject or
- author from the details page in the OPAC will present the searcher
- with a pop up box. From this box you can check off any of the
- subjects or authors listed and search them all at once by clicking
- 'Search' at the bottom of the pop up. The default behavior is for
- Koha to search just the clicked author or subject.
-
-`OpacResetPassword <#OpacResetPassword>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: not allowed
-
-Asks: Library users are \_\_\_ to recover their password via e-mail in
-the OPAC.
-
-Values:
-
-- allowedForgot your password link
-
-- not allowed
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference controls whether you present users of the public
- catalog with a 'Forgot your password' link or not. Learn more in the
- `OPAC section <#resetpwopac>`__ of this manual.
-
-`OpacTopissue <#OpacTopissue>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ patrons to access a list of the most checked out items on
-the OPAC.
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
- - A link to 'Most Popular' will appear at the top of your OPAC
-
- 'Most Popular' link under the search box
- |image99|
-
-- Don't allow
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference allows the administrator to choose to show the "Most
- Popular" link at the top of the OPAC under the search box. The "Most
- Popular" page shows the top circulated items in the library, as
- determined by the number of times a title has been circulated. This
- allows users to see what titles are popular in their community. It is
- recommended that you leave this preference set to 'Don't allow' until
- you have been live on Koha for a couple of months, otherwise the data
- that it shows will not be an accurate portrayal of what's popular in
- your library.
-
- Sample top issues page
- |image100|
-
-`opacuserlogin <#opacuserlogin>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ patrons to log in to their accounts on the OPAC.
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
-- Don't allow
-
- - The OPAC will still be searchable if patrons can't log in, this
- just disables the patron account access via the OPAC
-
-`QuoteOfTheDay <#QuoteOfTheDay>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Disable
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ Quote of the Day display on OPAC home page
-
-Values:
-
-- Disable
-
-- Enable
-
-Description:
-
-- This feature will allow you to enter a series of quotes that will
- then show on the OPAC homepage in random order. To add/edit quotes,
- visit the `Quote of the Day Editor <#QOTDEditor>`__ under Tools.
-
-`RequestOnOpac <#RequestOnOpac>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ patrons to place holds on items from the OPAC.
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
- - `opacuserlogin <#opacuserlogin>`__ needs to be set to 'allow'
-
-- Don't allow
-
-`reviewson <#reviewson>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ patrons to make comments on items on the OPAC.
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
- - Patrons comments/reviews all require moderation before they appear
- in the OPAC
-
- - `opacuserlogin <#opacuserlogin>`__ needs to be set to 'Allow'
-
-- Don't allow
-
-Description:
-
-- This button allows the patrons to submit comments on books they have
- read via the OPAC. If this preference is set to "Allow" reviews are
- first sent to the staff client for staff approval before the review
- is displayed in the OPAC. The staff member who reviews and approves
- comments may find the pending comments on the
- `Comments <#comments>`__ tool. The staff member can then choose to
- approve or delete the comments.
-
-`ShowReviewer <#ShowReviewer>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: full name
-
-Asks: Show \_\_\_ of commenter with comments in OPAC.
-
-Values:
-
-- first name
-
-- first name and last initial
-
-- full name
-
-- last name
-
-- no name
-
-- username
-
-Description:
-
-- If you would like to protect your patron's privacy in the OPAC you
- can choose to hide their names or parts of their names from any of
- the comments they leave on bib records in your system.
- `reviewson <#reviewson>`__ needs to be set to 'Allow' for this to
- preference to come in to play
-
-`ShowReviewerPhoto <#ShowReviewerPhoto>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Show
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ reviewer's photo beside comments in OPAC.
-
-Values:
-
-- Hide
-
-- Show
-
- - `reviewson <#reviewson>`__ needs to be set to 'Allow' and
- `ShowReviewer <#ShowReviewer>`__ needs to be set to 'Show' for
- this to preference to come in to play
-
- ShowReviewerPhoto set to 'Show'
- |image101|
-
-Description:
-
-- This system preference allows libraries to show avatars next to
- patron's comments in the OPAC. These avatars are pulled from the
- `Libravatar `__ library, an open source
- powered product that allows Internet users to choose a small icon to
- display next to their name on various different websites. The library
- has no control over the images the patron chooses to display.
-
-`SocialNetworks <#SocialNetworks>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Disable
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ social network links in opac detail pages
-
-Values:
-
-- Disable
-
-- Enable
-
- Social Networks
- |image102|
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference will enable a line of social network share buttons
- below the right hand column on the detail pages of records in the
- OPAC.
-
- **Important**
-
- In order for these share buttons to work when clicked you must have
- filled in your `OPACBaseURL <#OPACBaseURL>`__ preference.
-
-`suggestion <#suggestionspref>`__
-'''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ patrons to make purchase suggestions on the OPAC.
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
- - `opacuserlogin <#opacuserlogin>`__ needs to be set to 'allow'
- unless `AnonSuggestions <#AnonSuggestions>`__ is set to 'allow'
-
-- Don't allow
-
-`Payments <#opacpayments>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-These preferences will allow you control the tools you use to accept
-online payments from your patrons via the OPAC.
-
-`EnablePayPalOpacPayments & PayPalSandboxMode <#EnablePayPalOpacPayments>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-EnablePayPalOpacPayments Default: Don't all
-
-PayPalSandboxMode Default: Sandbox
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ patrons to make payments from the OPAC via PayPal in \_\_\_
-mode.
-
-EnablePayPalOpacPayments values:
-
-- Allow
-
-- Don't allow
-
-PayPalSandboxMode values:
-
-- Production
-
- - Visit https://developer.paypal.com/ to get information for
- accepting payments in production
-
-- Sandbox
-
- - Visit https://developer.paypal.com/developer/accounts/ to get
- information for your sandbox account
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference will allow you to accept credit card payments via the
- OPAC for fines via PayPal. You will need to set up your PayPal
- account and it is recommended that you run tests before using this in
- production.
-
- **Important**
-
- PayPayl's terms of service state that you cannot charge your patrons
- for the processing fees and so this plugin will not add additional
- fees to the charges.
-
-`PayPalChargeDescription <#PayPalChargeDescription>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Koha fee payment
-
-Asks: The patron should see the charge description as \_\_\_
-
-Description
-
-- This preference controls what the patron will see on their PayPal
- account/Bank account for this charge.
-
-`PayPalPwd <#PayPalPwd>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: The password for the PayPal account to receive payments is \_\_\_
-
-`PayPalSignature <#PayPalSignature>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: The signature for the PayPal account to receive payments is \_\_\_
-
-`PayPalUser <#PayPalUser>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: The email address to receive PayPal payments is \_\_\_
-
-`Policy <#opacpolicyprefs>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-`AllowPurchaseSuggestionBranchChoice <#AllowPurchaseSuggestionBranchChoice>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ patrons to select branch when making a purchase suggestion
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
-- Don't allow
-
-Description:
-
-- If your library system lets patrons make purchase suggestions for a
- specific branch you can set this preference to 'Allow' to add a
- branch selection option to the purchase suggestion form.
-
-`BlockExpiredPatronOpacActions <#BlockExpiredPatronOpacActions>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't block
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ expired patrons from OPAC actions such as placing a hold or
-renewing.
-
-Values:
-
-- Block
-
-- Don't block
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference lets you set a default value for how Koha handles
- permissions for patrons who are expired. This preference can be
- overwritten by the setting on `individual patron
- categories <#patcats>`__.
-
-`OpacAllowPublicListCreation <#OpacAllowPublicListCreation>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ opac users to create public lists
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
-- Don't allow
-
-Description:
-
-- Public lists are visible to anyone who visits your OPAC. With this
- preference you can control whether or now patrons are allowed to
- create these public lists. If this is set to "Don't allow" then only
- staff will be able to create public lists.
-
- **Important**
-
- This preference will only be taken in to account if you have
- `virtualshelves <#virtualshelves>`__ set to 'Allow'
-
-`OpacAllowSharingPrivateLists <#OpacAllowSharingPrivateLists>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ opac users to share private lists with other patrons.
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
-- Don't allow
-
-Description:
-
-- This feature will add the option for patrons to share their lists
- with other patrons. When this is set to 'Allow' patrons will see a
- share link at the top of their list. When they click that link it
- will ask for the email of the patron they would like to share with.
- Koha will then email the patron an invitation to see the list.
-
-`OPACFineNoRenewals <#OPACFineNoRenewals>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: 99999
-
-Asks: Only allow patrons to renew their own books on the OPAC if they
-have less than \_\_\_ USD in fines
-
- **Note**
-
- Leave this field blank to disable
-
- **Important**
-
- To allow renewals in the OPAC, `opacuserlogin <#opacuserlogin>`__
- needs to be set to 'allow'
-
-`OpacHiddenItems <#OpacHiddenItems>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Allows to define custom rules for hiding specific items at opac.
-
- **Note**
-
- See docs/opac/OpacHiddenItems.txt in your Koha install directory for
- more information
-
-Description:
-
-- In this field you can enter criteria for items you would like to hide
- from display in the OPAC. This field takes any combination of item
- fields (from the items table in the Koha database) for blocking. For
- example a value of:
-
- ::
-
- itype: [07, 10]
- location: [STAFF, ISO]
-
- Will block items with an itype code of 07 or 10 as well as items that
- have a shelving location of STAFF or ISO.
-
- In items my items.itype 07 is defined in Item Types Administration as
- Staff Assigned My items.itype 10 in Item Types is Archival Copy The
- locations STAFF and ISO are in Authorized Values for category=LOC
- STAFF means it's assigned to the staff reading room and ISO means it
- is in the isolation room.
-
-`OpacRenewalAllowed <#OpacRenewalAllowed>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ patrons to renew their own books on the OPAC.
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
- - `opacuserlogin <#opacuserlogin>`__ needs to be set to 'allow'
-
-- Don't allow
-
- - Staff will still be able to renew items for patrons via the staff
- client
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference allows the administration to choose if patrons can
- renew their checked out materials via their checked out history in
- the OPAC. It allows patrons to renew their materials without having
- to contact the library or having to return to the library.
-
-`OpacRenewalBranch <#OpacRenewalBranch>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: the branch the item was checked out from
-
-Asks: Use \_\_\_ as branchcode to store in the statistics table
-
-Values:
-
-- NULL
-
-- 'OPACRenew'
-
-- the item's home branch
-
-- the patron's home branch
-
-- the branch the item was checked out from
-
-Description:
-
-- This value is used in the statistics table to help with reporting.
- The statistics table in Koha keeps track of all checkouts and
- renewals, this preference defines which branch is entered in to the
- table when a patron renews an item for themselves via the OPAC.
-
-`OPACViewOthersSuggestions <#OPACViewOthersSuggestions>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't show
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ purchase suggestions from other patrons on the OPAC.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't show
-
-- Show
-
- - `opacuserlogin <#opacuserlogin>`__ needs to be set to 'allow'
-
-`SearchMyLibraryFirst <#SearchMyLibraryFirst>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't limit
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ patrons' searches to the library they are registered at.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't limit
-
- - Searching the OPAC will show results from all libraries
-
- - If you're a one branch system, choose 'Don't limit'
-
-- Limit
-
- - Patrons will still be able to search other libraries via the
- Advanced search page - but will be limited to searches for their
- library only from the basic search box
-
- - `opacuserlogin <#opacuserlogin>`__ needs to be set to 'allow'
-
-`Privacy <#opacprivacyprefs>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-`AllowPatronToSetCheckoutsVisibilityForGuarantor <#AllowPatronToSetCheckoutsVisibilityForGuarantor>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ patrons to choose their own privacy settings for showing
-the patron's checkouts to the patron's guarantor".
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
-- Don't allow
-
-Description:
-
-- By default staff can see checkouts to family members via the staff
- client. This preference will allow guarantees (children) to grant
- permission to guarantors (guardians) to view their current checkouts
- via the public catalog. This preference requires that you allow
- patrons to se their own privacy with the
- `OPACPrivacy <#OPACPrivacy>`__ preference.
-
-`AnonSuggestions <#AnonSuggestions>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ patrons that aren't logged in to make purchase suggestions.
-
- **Important**
-
- If set to 'Allow', suggestions are connected to the
- `AnonymousPatron <#AnonymousPatron>`__
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
-- Don't allow
-
-`AnonymousPatron <#AnonymousPatron>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: 0
-
-Asks: Use borrowernumber \_\_\_ as the Anonymous Patron (for anonymous
-suggestions and reading history)
-
- **Note**
-
- Before setting this preference `create a patron <#addnewpatron>`__
- to be used for all anonymous suggestions and/or reading history
- items. This patron can be any type and should be named something to
- make it clear to you that they're anonymous (ex. Anonymous Patron).
-
- **Important**
-
- Remember to use the borrowernumber note the patron's cardnumber for
- this value. The borrowernumber can be found on the patron record
- under 'Library use' on the right.Borrowernumber
-
-`EnableOpacSearchHistory <#EnableOpacSearchHistory>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Keep
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ patron search history in the OPAC.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't keep
-
-- Keep
-
-`OPACPrivacy <#OPACPrivacy>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ patrons to choose their own privacy settings for their
-reading history.
-
- **Important**
-
- This requires `opacreadinghistory <#opacreadinghistory>`__ set to
- 'Allow' and `AnonymousPatron <#AnonymousPatron>`__ to be set to your
- anonymous patron's borrowernumber.
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
-- Don't allow
-
-Description:
-
-- The default privacy setting for each patron category can be set in
- the `Patrons Categories <#patcats>`__ area. If you set this
- preference to 'allow' then patrons can change that for themselves via
- the OPAC.
-
- **Important**
-
- If patron has chosen to have their reading history anonymized and
- you have `StoreLastBorrower <#StoreLastBorrower>`__ set to "Don't
- store" then as soon as the item is checked in the last borrower will
- be anonymized.
-
-`opacreadinghistory <#opacreadinghistory>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ patrons to see what books they have checked out in the
-past.
-
- **Important**
-
- Enabling this will make it so that patrons can view their
- circulation history in the OPAC unless you have
- `OPACPrivacy <#OPACPrivacy>`__ set to 'Allow.'
-
- **Important**
-
- This data is stored in the system regardless of your choice, unless
- your patrons have chosen to never have their reading history kept.
-
-`StoreLastBorrower <#StoreLastBorrower>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't store
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ the last patron to return an item.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't store
-
-- Store
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference allows you to store the last patron to borrow an item
- even if the patron has chosen to have their reading history
- anonymized.
-
- **Note**
-
- This setting is independent of
- `opacreadinghistory <#opacreadinghistory>`__ and/or
- `AnonymousPatron <#AnonymousPatron>`__.
-
-`TrackClicks <#TrackClicks>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't track
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ links that patrons click on.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't track
-
-- Track
-
-- Track anonymously
-
-Description:
-
-- By setting this preference to one of the track options you will allow
- Koha to track every link clicked in Koha. This data will be stored in
- a database table so that you can run reports against that data. If
- you choose to 'Track' clicks then Koha will record both the link
- clicked and the logged in user who clicked the link. If you choose to
- 'Track anonymously' then the borrowernumber will not be recorded, but
- the rest of the data will.
-
- **Note**
-
- Remember to update your local privacy policies and link to them
- from the OPAC to notify your users that you are tracking their
- information.
-
-`Restricted Page <#opacrestrictedpg>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Using the following preference you can create a page within your Koha
-system that is accessible by only specific IP addresses. This can be
-used to house links to databases that can only be accessed from with the
-library or other licensed content.
-
-`RestrictedPageContent <#RestrictedPageContent>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: HTML content of your restricted page.
-
-`RestrictedPageLocalIPs <#RestrictedPageLocalIPs>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Access from IP addresses beginning with \_\_\_ do not need to be
-authenticated
-
-Description:
-
-- You can enter individual IPS as a comma separated list (ex:
- '127.0.0,127.0.1') or just the beginning of the IP range allowed (ex:
- '127.0.')
-
-`RestrictedPageTitle <#RestrictedPageTitle>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Use \_\_\_ as title of your restricted page
-
-Description:
-
-- This title will appear in the breadcrumb and on the top of the
- restricted page.
-
-`Self Registration <#opacselfregistrationprefs>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-`PatronSelfModificationBorrowerUnwantedField <#PatronSelfModificationBorrowerUnwantedField>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: password
-
-Asks: The following `database
-columns `__ will
-not appear on the patron self-modification screen: \_\_\_
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference allows you to define what fields patrons can edit if
- you're allowing them to update their personal information via the
- public catalog with the `OPACPatronDetails <#OPACPatronDetails>`__
- preference.
-
- **Important**
-
- Separate columns with \|
-
-`PatronSelfRegistration <#PatronSelfRegistration>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ library patrons to register an account via the OPAC.
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
-- Don't allow
-
-Description:
-
-- Setting this preference to 'Allow' will provide a link on the OPAC to
- register for a new account. Using the other `Self
- Registration <#opacselfregistrationprefs>`__ system preferences you
- can control how this preference will function.
-
- Register link in the OPAC
- |image103|
-
- **Important**
-
- Patrons registering via the OPAC will not need to be approved by a
- librarian. For this reason it is recommended that you set up a
- provisional `patron category <#patcats>`__ with no `circulation
- rights <#circfinerules>`__. That way patrons will have to come in to
- the library to verify their identity before given circulation rights
- at the library. Once the patron confirms their identiy the library
- staff can change the category to one with permissions to check items
- out and place holds.
-
-`PatronSelfRegistrationAdditionalInstructions <#PatronSelfRegistrationAdditionalInstructions>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Display the following additional instructions for patrons who self
-register via the OPAC ( HTML is allowed ):
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference takes any HTML you'd like to display on the page the
- patron sees after successfully registering for their library card.
-
-`PatronSelfRegistrationBorrowerMandatoryField <#PatronSelfRegistrationBorrowerMandatoryField>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: surname\|firstname
-
-Asks: The following database columns must be filled in on the patron
-entry screen: \_\_\_
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference allows you to define what fields patrons must fill in
- on their self regisration form. If any of the required fields are
- blank Koha will not let the patron register.
-
- **Important**
-
- Separate columns with \|
-
- **Note**
-
- For help with field names, ask your system administrator or `view
- the database
- structure `__
- associated with the borrowers table.
-
- **Note**
-
- If you're going to require that patrons verify their accounts via
- email with the
- `PatronSelfRegistrationVerifyByEmail <#PatronSelfRegistrationVerifyByEmail>`__
- preference the email field will automatically be marked as required.
-
-`PatronSelfRegistrationBorrowerUnwantedField <#PatronSelfRegistrationBorrowerUnwantedField>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: password
-
-Asks: The following database columns will not appear on the patron entry
-screen: \_\_\_
-
-Description:
-
-- Using this preference you can hide fields from the patron registraion
- and update form in the OPAC.
-
- **Important**
-
- Separate columns with \|
-
- **Note**
-
- For help with field names, ask your system administrator or `view
- the database
- structure `__
- associated with the borrowers table.
-
-`PatronSelfRegistrationDefaultCategory <#PatronSelfRegistrationDefaultCategory>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Use the patron category code \_\_\_ as the default patron category
-for patrons registered via the OPAC.
-
-Description:
-
-- Enter in the patron category code for the category that all new
- patrons registered via the OPAC will be put in to.
-
- **Important**
-
- Patrons registering via the OPAC will not need to be approved by a
- librarian. For this reason it is recommended that you set up a
- provisional `patron category <#patcats>`__ with no `circulation
- rights <#circfinerules>`__. That way patrons will have to come in to
- the library to verify their identity before given circulation rights
- at the library. Once the patron confirms their identiy the library
- staff can change the category to one with permissions to check items
- out and place holds.
-
- **Important**
-
- If you leave this blank or enter in an invalid code your patrons
- will still be able to register but will not be given a username.
- There will be no errors on the page to explain this, so be sure to
- enter a valid patron category code.
-
-`PatronSelfRegistrationExpireTemporaryAccountsDelay <#PatronSelfRegistrationExpireTemporaryAccountsDelay>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: 0
-
-Asks: Delete patrons registered via the OPAC, but not yet verified after
-\_\_\_ days.
-
-Description:
-
-- This prefence links to the `delete\_expired\_opac\_registrations.pl
- cron job <#deleteexpiredregistrationcron>`__. If that cron is set to
- run nightly it will clean up any registrations that have not been
- verified via email in the number of days entered on this preference.
- This is dependent on
- `PatronSelfRegistrationVerifyByEmail <#PatronSelfRegistrationVerifyByEmail>`__
- preference.
-
-`PatronSelfRegistrationVerifyByEmail <#PatronSelfRegistrationVerifyByEmail>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't require
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ that a self-registering patron verify his or herself via
-email.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't require
-
-- Require
-
-Description:
-
-- If you require patrons to verify their accounts via email they will
- not be able to log in to the OPAC until they acknowledge the email
- sent by Koha. If you don't require this then patrons will be able to
- log in as soon as they fill in the registration form. You can set the
- `PatronSelfRegistrationExpireTemporaryAccountsDelay <#PatronSelfRegistrationExpireTemporaryAccountsDelay>`__
- preference to delete the un-verified self registrations after a
- certain number of days.
-
- **Note**
-
- If you're going to require that patrons verify their accounts via
- email then the email field will automatically be marked as required.
-
-`Shelf Browser <#shelfbrowseprefs>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-`OPACShelfBrowser <#OPACShelfBrowser>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Show
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ a shelf browser on item details pages, allowing patrons to
-see what's near that item on the shelf.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't show
-
-- Show
-
- OPACShelfBrowser
- |image104|
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference allows patrons to view what is located on the shelf
- near the item they looked up. The shelf browser option appears on the
- details page to the right of each items' call number. Clicking the
- 'Browse Shelf' link allows for a virtual shelf browsing experience
- via the OPAC and lets patrons see other books that may relate to
- their search and items that sit on the shelf near the item they are
- looking at.
-
- **Important**
-
- This uses up a fairly large amount of resources on your server, and
- should be avoided if your collection has a large number of items.
-
-`ShelfBrowserUsesCcode <#ShelfBrowserUsesCcode>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't use
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ the item collection code when finding items for the shelf
-browser.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't use
-
-- Use
-
-Description:
-
-- If your library uses collection codes then you might want the shelf
- browser to take into consideration what collection the books belong
- to when populating the virtual shelf browser.
-
-`ShelfBrowserUsesHomeBranch <#ShelfBrowserUsesHomeBranch>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Use
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ the item home branch when finding items for the shelf
-browser.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't use
-
-- Use
-
-Description:
-
-- If you have a multiple branch system you may want to make sure that
- Koha takes into consideration what branch owns the books when
- populating the virtual shelf browser for accuracy.
-
-`ShelfBrowserUsesLocation <#ShelfBrowserUsesLocation>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Use
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ the item location when finding items for the shelf browser.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't use
-
-- Use
-
-Description:
-
-- If your library uses shelving locations then you might want the shelf
- browser to take into consideration what shelving location the books
- belong to when populating the virtual shelf browser.
-
-`Patrons <#patronprefs>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-*Get there:* More > Administration > Global System Preferences > Patrons
-
-`General <#generalpatronpref>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-`AutoEmailOpacUser <#AutoEmailOPACUser>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't send
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ an email to newly created patrons with their account
-details.
-
-Description:
-
-- AutoEmailOpacUser allows library users to be notified by email of
- their account details when a new account is opened at the email
- address specified in the
- `AutoEmailPrimaryAddress <#AutoEmailPrimaryAddress>`__ preference.
- The email contains the username and password given to or chosen by
- the patron when signing up for their account and can be customized by
- editing the `ACCTDETAILS <#ACCTDETAILS>`__ notice.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't send
-
-- Send
-
-`AutoEmailPrimaryAddress <#AutoEmailPrimaryAddress>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: alternate
-
-Asks: Use \_\_\_ patron email address for sending out emails.
-
-Values:
-
-- alternate
-
-- first valid
-
-- home
-
-- work
-
-Description:
-
-- If you choose 'first valid' as the value for AutoEmailPrimaryAddress
- the system will check the email fields in this order: home, work,
- then alternate. Otherwise the system will use the email address you
- specify.
-
-`autoMemberNum <#autoMemberNum>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Do
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ default the card number field on the patron addition screen
-to the next available card number
-
-Values:
-
-- Do
-
- - If the largest currently used card number is 26345000012941, then
- this field will default to 26345000012942 for the next patron
-
-- Don't
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference determines if the patron's barcode is automatically
- calculated. This prevents the person setting up the library card
- account from having to assign a number to the new card. If set to
- 'Do' the system will calculate a new patron barcode by adding 1 to
- the maximum barcode already present in the database.
-
-`BorrowerMandatoryField <#BorrowerMandatoryField>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: surname\|cardnumber\|barcode
-
-Asks: The following database columns must be filled in on the patron
-entry screen: \_\_\_
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference enables the system administrator to choose which
- fields your library would like required for patron accounts. Enter
- field names separated by \| (bar). This ensures that basic
- information is included in each patron record. If a patron leaves one
- of the required fields blank an error message will issue and the
- account will not be created.
-
- **Important**
-
- Separate columns with \|
-
- **Note**
-
- For help with field names, ask your system administrator or `view
- the database
- structure `__
- associated with the borrowers table.
-
-`borrowerRelationship <#borrowerRelationship>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: father\|mother
-
-Asks: Guarantors can be the following of those they guarantee \_\_\_
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference enables the system administrator to define valid
- relationships between a guarantor (usually a parent) & a guarantee
- (usually a child). Defining values for this field does not make the
- guarantor field required when adding a guarantee type patron. This
- preference creates a drop down list identifying the relationship of
- the guarantor to the guarantee. To disable the ability to add
- children types in Koha you can leave this field blank.
-
- **Important**
-
- Input multiple choices separated by \|
-
-`BorrowerRenewalPeriodBase <#BorrowerRenewalPeriodBase>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: current date
-
-Asks: When renewing borrowers, base the new expiry date on \_\_\_
-
-Values:
-
-- current date.
-
-- current membership expiry date.
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference controls what the patron's new expiration date will
- be when you renew their card. Using the 'current date' will add the
- subscription period to today's date when calculating the new
- expiration date. Using 'current membership expiry date' will add the
- subscription period to the old expiration date for the patron when
- renewing their account.
-
-`BorrowersTitles <#BorrowersTitles>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Mr\|Mrs\|Miss\|Ms
-
-Asks: Borrowers can have the following titles \_\_\_
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference allows the staff to choose the titles that can be
- assigned to patrons. The choices present as a drop down list when
- creating a patron record.
-
- **Important**
-
- Input multiple choices separated by \|
-
-`BorrowerUnwantedField <#BorrowerUnwantedField>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: The following database columns will not appear on the patron entry
-screen: \_\_\_
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference enables the system administrator to choose which
- fields your library doesn't need to see on the patron entry form.
- Enter field names separated by \| (bar).
-
- **Important**
-
- Separate columns with \|
-
- **Note**
-
- For help with field names, ask your system administrator or `view
- the database
- structure `__
- associated with the borrowers table.
-
-`CardnumberLength <#CardnumberLength>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Card numbers for patrons must be \_\_\_ characters long.
-
-Description:
-
-- The length can be a single number to specify an exact length, a range
- separated by a comma (i.e., 'Min,Max'), or a maximum with no minimum
- (i.e., ',Max'). If 'cardnumber' is included in the
- `BorrowerMandatoryField <#BorrowerMandatoryField>`__ list, the
- minimum length, if not specified here, defaults to one.
-
-`checkdigit <#checkdigit>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ check and construct borrower card numbers in the Katipo
-style.
-
-Values:
-
-- Do
-
-- Don't
-
- **Important**
-
- This overrides `autoMemberNum <#autoMemberNum>`__ if on.
-
-`EnableBorrowerFiles <#EnableBorrowerFiles>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ enable the ability to upload and attach arbitrary files to
-a borrower record.
-
-Values:
-
-- Do
-
-- Don't
-
-Description:
-
-- When enabled this will add a 'Files' tab to the left of the patron
- detail page where you can view and upload files to the patron record.
-
-`EnhancedMessagingPreferences <#EnhancedMessagingPreferences>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ staff to manage which notices patrons will receive and when
-they will receive them.
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
-- Don't allow
-
- **Important**
-
- This only applies to certain kinds of notices, overdue notices will
- be sent based on the library's rules, not the patron's choice.
-
- **Note**
-
- To manage if patrons have also access to these settings, use
- `EnhancedMessagingPreferencesOPAC <#EnhancedMessagingPreferencesOPAC>`__.
-
-Description:
-
-- These messages are in addition to the overdue notices that the
- library sends. The difference between these notices and overdues is
- that the patron can opt-in and out of these. Setting this preference
- to 'Allow' will allow staff to choose for patrons to receive any one
- of the following messages:
-
- - Item Checkout : A notice that lists all the of the items the
- patron has just checked out and/or renewed, this is an electronic
- form of the checkout receipt
-
- - Item Due : A notice on the day and item is due back at the library
-
- - Hold Filled : A notice when you have confirmed the hold is waiting
- for the patron
-
- - Item Checkin : A notice that lists all the of the items the patron
- has just checked in
-
- - Advanced Notice : A notice in advance of the patron's items being
- due (Staff can choose the number of days in advance)
-
-`EnhancedMessagingPreferencesOPAC <#EnhancedMessagingPreferencesOPAC>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Show
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ patron messaging setting on the OPAC
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't show
-
-- Show
-
- **Important**
-
- `EnhancedMessagingPreferences <#EnhancedMessagingPreferences>`__
- must be enabled for messaging options to show in the OPAC
-
-Description:
-
-- These messages are in addition to the overdue notices that the
- library sends. The difference between these notices and overdues is
- that the patron can opt-in and out of these. Setting this preference
- to 'Allow' will allow patrons to choose to receive any one of the
- following messages:
-
- - Item Checkout : A notice that lists all the of the items the
- patron has just checked out and/or renewed, this is an electronic
- form of the checkout receipt
-
- - Item Due : A notice on the day and item is due back at the library
-
- - Hold Filled : A notice when you have confirmed the hold is waiting
- for the patron
-
- - Item Checkin : A notice that lists all the of the items the patron
- has just checked in
-
- - Advanced Notice : A notice in advance of the patron's items being
- due (The patron can choose the number of days in advance)
-
-`ExtendedPatronAttributes <#ExtendedPatronAttributes>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Enable
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ searching, editing and display of custom attributes on
-patrons.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't enable
-
-- Enable
-
- - Define attributes in Koha administration
-
- - Get there: More > Administration > `Patron Attribute
- Types <#patronattributetypes>`__
-
-Description:
-
-- Patron attributes are library-defined custom fields that can be
- applied to patron records.
-
- **Note**
-
- Use custom attributes for fields that the default patron record does
- not support such as driver's license number or student ID number.
-
-`FeeOnChangePatronCategory <#FeeOnChangePatronCategory>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Do
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ charge a fee when a patron changes to a category with an
-enrollment fee.
-
-Values:
-
-- Do
-
-- Don't
-
-`intranetreadinghistory <#intranetreadinghistory>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ staff to access a patron's checkout history.
-
- **Important**
-
- If you have the `OPACPrivacy <#OPACPrivacy>`__ preference set to
- 'Allow' and the patron has decided to not have their history kept
- staff will only see currently checked out items.
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
-- Don't allow
-
- **Important**
-
- Reading history is still stored, regardless of staff being allowed
- access or not unless the patron has chosen to have their history
- anonymized via their `privacy page <#opacmyprivacy>`__.
-
-`MaxFine <#MaxFine>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: 9999
-
-Asks: The late fine for all checkouts will only go up to \_\_\_ USD.
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference controls the default cap on fines accrued by the
- patron. Leaving this preference blank means that there is no cap on
- the amount of fines a patron can accrue. If you'd like, single item
- caps can be specified in the `circulation rules
- matrix <#circfinerules>`__.
-
-`MembershipExpiryDaysNotice <#MembershipExpiryDaysNotice>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Send an account expiration notice when a patron's card will expire
-in \_\_\_ days.
-
-Description:
-
-- If you would like to notify patrons that their accounts are about to
- expire then you can enter a number of days before expiration in this
- preference. The notice text can be customized in the `Notices &
- Slips <#notices>`__ tool.
-
- **Important**
-
- You will need to enable the `membership expiry cron
- job <#patronexpirycron>`__ for this notice to send.
-
-`minPasswordLength <#minPasswordLength>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: 3
-
-Asks: Login passwords for staff and patrons must be at least \_\_\_
-characters long.
-
- **Important**
-
- This applies to both the staff login and the patron OPAC login.
-
-`NotifyBorrowerDeparture <#NotifyBorrowerDeparture>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: 30
-
-Asks: Show a notice that a patron is about to expire \_\_\_ days
-beforehand.
-
-Description:
-
-- When the patron attempts to check out materials, a warning will
- appear in the check out window of the Staff Client telling the
- librarian that the patrons account is about to expire.
-
- **Important**
-
- This notice will appear on the patron's record in the staff client.
-
-`patronimages <#patronimages>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ images to be uploaded and shown for patrons on the staff
-client.
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
-- Don't allow
-
-Description:
-
-- If this preference is set to 'Allow' the staff will be able to upload
- images of patrons either `one by one <#addpatronimages>`__ or `in
- bulk <#uploadpatronimages>`__. Patrons images will show on the detail
- page to the left of the patron information. They can also show in the
- OPAC if you set the `OPACpatronimage <#OPACpatronimage>`__ preference
- or in the self check out module if you set the
- `ShowPatronImageInWebBasedSelfCheck <#ShowPatronImageInWebBasedSelfCheck>`__
- preference.
-
-`PatronsPerPage <#PatronsPerPage>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: 20
-
-Asks: By default, show \_\_\_ results per page in the staff client.
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference will let you define how many patrons to show on
- patron search results pages.
-
-`SMSSendDriver, SMSSendUsername, and SMSSendPassword <#SMSSendDriver>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Use the SMS::Send:: \_\_\_ driver to send SMS messages. Define a
-username/login \_\_\_ and a password \_\_\_.
-
- **Important**
-
- Please refer to your national laws concerning the sending of bulk
- SMS messages before enabling this feature.
-
-Descritpion:
-
-- There are two options for using SMS in Koha. You can use the Email
- protocol for free by entering 'Email' as the SMSSendDriver or you can
- pay for a SMS driver. Some examples of values for the driver are:
-
- - SMS::Send::Us::Ipipi
-
- - SMS::Send::US::TMobile
-
- - SMS::Send::US::Verizon
-
- - SMS::Send::IN::Unicel
-
- Additional values can be found here:
- http://search.cpan.org/search?query=sms%3A%3Asend&mode=all
-
- **Important**
-
- Only drivers available as Perl modules will work in this
- preference, so make sure a Perl module is available before
- choosing an SMS service.
-
- Once a driver is entered in the preference an option will appear in
- the staff client and the OPAC on the patron messaging form to choose
- to receive messages as SMS
-
- SMSSendDriver Options
- |image105|
-
- **Important**
-
- You must allow
- `EnhancedMessagingPreferences <#EnhancedMessagingPreferences>`__ for
- this to work.
-
-`StatisticsFields <#StatisticsFields>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: location\|itype\|ccode
-
-Asks: Show the following fields from the items database table as columns
-on the statistics tab on the patron record: \_\_\_
-
-Statistics on Patron Record
-|image106|
-
- **Important**
-
- Enter the values separated by bars (\|)
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference lets you set which fields will show on the patron
- record on the Statistics tab.
-
-`TalkingTechItivaPhoneNotification <#TalkingTechItivaPhoneNotification>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Disable
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ patron phone notifications using Talking Tech i-tiva
-(overdues, predues and holds notices currently supported).
-
-Values:
-
-- Disable
-
-- Enable
-
-Description:
-
-- To learn more about setting up this third party product view the
- `Talking Tech Appendix <#talkingtechappendix>`__.
-
- **Important**
-
- Requires that you have
- `EnhancedMessagingPreferences <#EnhancedMessagingPreferences>`__ set
- to Allow to use.
-
-`uppercasesurnames <#uppercasesurnames>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ store and display surnames (last names) in upper case.
-
-Values:
-
-- Do
-
-- Don't
-
-`useDischarge <#useDischarge>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ librarians to discharge borrowers and borrowers to request
-a discharge.
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
-- Don't allow
-
-Description:
-
-- A discharge is a certificate that says the patron has no current
- checkouts, no holds and owe no money.
-
- **Note**
-
- In France a "quitus" ("discharge") is needed if you want to
- register for an account in a library or a university).
-
- **Note**
-
- Academic libraries often require that you have a clear record at
- the library before you can graduate.
-
-`Norwegian patron database <#norwegianpref>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-`NorwegianPatronDBEnable & NorwegianPatronDBEndpoint <#NorwegianPatronDBEnable>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-NorwegianPatronDBEnable Default: Disable
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ the ability to communicate with the Norwegian national
-patron database via the \_\_\_ endpoint.
-
-Values:
-
-- Disable
-
-- Enable
-
-`NorwegianPatronDBSearchNLAfterLocalHit <#NorwegianPatronDBSearchNLAfterLocalHit>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ search the Norwegian national patron database after a local
-search result was found.
-
-Values:
-
-- Do
-
-- Don't
-
-`NorwegianPatronDBUsername & NorwegianPatronDBPassword <#NorwegianPatronDBUsername>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Communicate with the Norwegian national patron database using the
-username \_\_\_ and the password \_\_\_.
-
-Description:
-
-- You can get these from "Base Bibliotek", which is maintained by the
- Norwegian National Library.
-
-`Searching <#searchingprefs>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-*Get there:* More > Administration > Global System Preferences >
-Searching
-
-`Features <#searchfeatureprefs>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-`EnableSearchHistory <#EnableSearchHistory>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't keep
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ patron search history in the staff client.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't keep
-
-- KeepEnableSearchHistory
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference controls whether the staff client keeps search
- history for logged in users. Search history will be accessible under
- the link to your account in the top right of the staff client.
-
-`IncludeSeeFromInSearches <#IncludeSeeFromInSearches>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't include
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ *see from* (non-preferred form) headings in bibliographic
-searches.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't include
-
-- Include
-
-Description:
-
-- When this preference is set to include the search engine indexer will
- insert *see from* headings from authority records into bibliographic
- records when indexing, so that a search on an obsolete term will turn
- up relevant records. For example when you search for cookery (the old
- term) you get titles with the heading of cooking (the new term).
-
- **Important**
-
- You will need to reindex your bibliographic database when changing
- this preference.
-
-`OpacGroupResults <#OpacGroupResults>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't use
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ PazPar2 to group similar results on the OPAC.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't use
-
-- Use
-
- **Important**
-
- This requires that `PazPar2 `__ is
- set up and running.
-
-`QueryAutoTruncate <#QueryAutoTruncate>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: automatically
-
-Asks: Perform wildcard searching (where, for example, Har would match
-Harry and harp) \_\_\_ (The \* character would be used like so: Har\* or
-\*logging.)
-
-Values:
-
-- automatically
-
-- only if \* is added
-
-Description:
-
-- This setting allows for searches to be automatically truncated or for
- additional characters to be added to the end of a search string. When
- set to "automatically" the search string automatically ends with a
- wildcard function. For example, a search for the word "invent" with
- auto truncation enabled will also retrieve results for inventor,
- invention, inventory, etc. If you don't want this to happen
- automatically you can still be perform wildcard searches manually by
- adding an asterisk (\*). Typing "invent\*" even with auto truncation
- disabled will retrieve the same inventor, invention, inventory
- results. Auto truncation bypasses the necessity to type long search
- strings in their entirety.
-
-`QueryFuzzy <#QueryFuzzy>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Try
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ to match similarly spelled words in a search (for example,
-a search for flang would also match flange and fang)
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't try
-
-- Try
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference enables "fuzzy" searching, in which the search engine
- returns results that are similar to, but not exactly matching, the
- word or words entered by the user. This preference enables the search
- function to compensate for slightly misspelled names or phrases.
-
- **Important**
-
- Requires that `UseICU <#UseICU>`__ set to 'Not using'
-
-`QueryStemming <#QueryStemming>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Try
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ to match words of the same base in a search
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't try
-
-- Try
-
- - A search for enabling would also match enable and enabled
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference enables word stemming. Stemming allows the search
- function to return multiple versions of the same word, as well as
- related terms (i.e., both fish and fishing would be returned).
-
-`QueryWeightFields <#QueryWeightFields>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Enable
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ ranking of search results by relevance
-
-Values:
-
-- Disable
-
-- Enable
-
-`TraceCompleteSubfields <#TraceCompleteSubfields>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Force
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ subject tracings in the OPAC and Staff Client to search
-only for complete-subfield matches.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't force
-
- - Searches for subject keywords (example:
- opac-search.pl?q=su:World%20Wide%20Web)
-
-- Force
-
- - Searches for complete subject fields (example:
- opac-search.pl?q=su,complete-subfield:World%20Wide%20Web)
-
-Description:
-
-- When TraceCompleteSubfields is set to "force," clicking on links in
- non-authority controlled subject tracings will only find other
- records where the entire subfields match. Leaving it at "don't force"
- does a keyword search of the subject indexes.
-
- **Important**
-
- This preference assumes that you're using XSLT stylesheets as set in
- the `OPACXSLTDetailsDisplay <#OPACXSLTDetailsDisplay>`__ preference.
-
-`TraceSubjectSubdivisions <#TraceSubjectSubdivisions>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Include
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ subdivisions for searches generated by clicking on subject
-tracings.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't include
-
- - Searches for subject keywords (example:
- opac-search.pl?q=su,complete-subfield:%22Web%20sites%22)
-
-- Include
-
- - Searches for complete subject fields (example:
- opac-search.pl?q=(su,complete-subfield:%22Web%20sites%22)%20and%20(su,complete-subfield:%22Design.%22))
-
-Description:
-
-- When TraceSubjectSubdivisions is set to "Include," if you click on a
- subject with subdivisions (subfields other than 'a') they will be
- searched along with the subject heading (subfield 'a'). To have only
- the subject heading (subfield 'a') searched, set this preference to
- "Don't include."
-
- **Important**
-
- This preference assumes that you're using XSLT stylesheets as set in
- the `OPACXSLTDetailsDisplay <#OPACXSLTDetailsDisplay>`__ preference.
-
-`UseICU <#UseICU>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Not using
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ ICU Zebra indexing.
-
-Values:
-
-- Not using
-
-- Using
-
-Description:
-
-- ICU is a set of code libraries providing Unicode and Globalization
- support for software applications. What this means is ICU Zebra
- indexing is only necessary if you use non-roman characters in your
- cataloging. If using ICU Zebra indexing you will want to not use
- `QueryFuzzy <#QueryFuzzy>`__.
-
- **Important**
-
- This setting will not affect Zebra indexing, it should only be used
- to tell Koha that you have activated ICU indexing if you have
- actually done so, since there is no way for Koha to figure this out
- on its own.
-
- **Important**
-
- Talk to your system administrator when changing this preference to
- make sure that your system is set up properly for this to work.
-
-`UseQueryParser <#UseQueryParser>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Do not try
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ to use the QueryParser module for parsing queries.
-
- **Note**
-
- Enabling this will have no impact if you do not have QueryParser
- installed, and everything will continue to work as usual.
-
-Values:
-
-- Do not try
-
-- Try
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference enables an experimental new query parser which opens
- the door for a more expressive and more-effective search syntax.
-
-`Results Display <#searchresultsprefs>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-`defaultSortField & defaultSortOrder <#defaultSortField>`__
-'''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-defaultSortField Default: author
-
-defaultSortOrder Default: ascending
-
-Asks: By default, sort search results in the staff client by \_\_\_,
-\_\_\_\_
-
-Description:
-
-- These preferences set the default sort field and sort order for
- searches on the staff side. Regardless of your choice, the other sort
- options are still available in the drop down list on the advanced
- search page.
-
-defaultSortField Values:
-
-- author
-
-- call number
-
-- date added
-
-- date of publication
-
-- relevance
-
-- title
-
-- total number of checkouts
-
-defaultSortOrder Values:
-
-- ascending
-
-- descending
-
-- from A to Z
-
-- from Z to A
-
-`displayFacetCount <#displayFacetCount>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't show
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ facet counts.
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference lets you decide if you show how many times a facet is
- used in your search results in the OPAC and the staff client. The
- relevance of these numbers highly depends on the value of the
- `maxRecordsForFacets <#maxRecordsForFacets>`__ preference. Showing
- these numbers can potentially effect the performance of your
- searching, so test your system with different values for this
- preference to see what works best.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't show
-
-- Show
-
- Number of times each Facet is found in results
- |image107|
-
-`DisplayLibraryFacets <#DisplayLibraryFacets>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: holding library
-
-Asks: Show facets for \_\_\_
-
-Values:
-
-- both home and holding library
-
-- holding library
-
-- home library
-
-Description:
-
-- This preferenc controls the libraries facet that displays on search
- results in the staff and opac. The value selected here will determin
- which library(s) show in the facets when a search is run.
-
-`FacetLabelTruncationLength <#FacetLabelTruncationLength>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: 20
-
-Asks: Truncate facets length to \_\_\_ characters, in OPAC/staff
-interface.
-
-Description:
-
-- In the OPAC and the staff client your facets are cut off at 20
- characters by default. Depending on your layout this may be too many
- or two few letters, this preference lets you decide what number is
- best for your library's design.
-
-`FacetMaxCount <#FacetMaxCount>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: 20
-
-Asks: Show up \_\_\_ to facets for each category.
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference allows you to control how many possible limits show
- under each heading (Author, Series, Topics, etc) on the facets in the
- OPAC.
-
-`maxItemsInSearchResults <#maxItemsInSearchResults>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: 20
-
-Asks: Show up to \_\_\_ items per biblio in the search results
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference will let you set how many results display by default
- when a search is run on the Staff Client.
-
-`maxRecordsForFacets <#maxRecordsForFacets>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: 20
-
-Asks: Build facets based on \_\_\_ records from the search results.
-
-Description:
-
-- By default Koha only bases facets on the first page of results
- (usually 20 results). This preference lets you tell Koha to based the
- facet descriptions and numbers on any number of search results
- returned. The higher this number the longer it will take for your
- search results to return, so test with various different values to
- find the best balance for your library.
-
-`MaxSearchResultsItemsPerRecordStatusCheck <#MaxSearchResultsItemsPerRecordStatusCheck>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: 20
-
-Asks: For records with many items, only check the availability status
-for the first \_\_\_ items.
-
-Description:
-
-- Availability statuses may show incorrectly in search results if a
- record has more items than the limit set. Statuses will display
- correctly in the record details. Leave empty for no limit.
-
-`numSearchResults <#numSearchResults>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: 20
-
-Asks: By default, show \_\_\_ results per page in the staff client.
-
-`OPACdefaultSortField & OPACdefaultSortOrder <#opacdefaultsort>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-OPACdefaultSortField Default: relevance
-
-OPACdefaultSortOrder Default: ascending
-
-Asks: By default, sort search results in the OPAC by \_\_\_, \_\_\_
-
-Description:
-
-- These preferences set the default sort field and sort order for
- searches on the OPAC. Regardless of your choice, the other sort
- options are still available in the drop down list on the advanced
- search page.
-
-OPACdefaultSortField Values:
-
-- author
-
-- call number
-
-- date added
-
-- date of publication
-
-- relevance
-
-- title
-
-- total number of checkouts
-
-OPACdefaultSortOrder Values:
-
-- ascending
-
-- descending
-
-- from A to Z
-
-- from Z to A
-
-`OPACItemsResultsDisplay <#OPACItemsResultsDisplay>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't show
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ an item's branch, location and call number in OPAC search
-results.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't show
-
-- Show
-
-Description:
-
-- This setting selects the information about an item that will display
- in the search results page of the OPAC. The results can display the
- status of an item and/or full details including branch, location, and
- call number. While the 'Show' option allows for more information to
- be displayed on the search results page, the information can be
- overwhelming for large collections with multiple branches.
-
-`OPACnumSearchResults <#OPACnumSearchResults>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: 20
-
-Asks: By default, show \_\_\_ results per page in the OPAC.
-
-`SearchWithISBNVariations <#SearchWithISBNVariations>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: don't search
-
-Asks: When searching on the ISBN index, \_\_\_ on all variations of the
-ISBN.
-
-Values:
-
-- don't search
-
-- search
-
-Descriptions:
-
-- With this preference set to search you'll be able to search for ISBNs
- even if there are dashes or spaces in the field. So if you search for
- 9781843345855 but the ISBN was cataloged as 978-1843345855 you'll
- still be able to find it if this preference is set to 'search'.
-
- **Important**
-
- This preference has no effect if
- `UseQueryParser <#UseQueryParser>`__ is on
-
-`Search Form <#searchformprefs>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-`AdvancedSearchLanguages <#AdvancedSearchLanguages>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Limit the languages listed in the advanced search drop-down to the
-\_\_\_ ISO 639-2 language codes (separate values with \| or ,).
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference will allow you to decide what languages show in the
- pull down menu on the advanced search page in the OPAC and the staff
- client. If this preference is left blank, all languages will show. To
- limit the languages that are shown enter their `ISO 639-2 language
- codes `__
- separated by comma ( , ) or bar ( \| ). For example to limit listing
- to French and Italian, enter ita\|fre.
-
-`AdvancedSearchTypes <#AdvancedSearchTypes>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: itemtype
-
-Asks: Show tabs in OPAC and staff-side advanced search for limiting
-searches on the \_\_\_ fields (separate values with \|).
-
-Description:
-
-- On the advanced search page you can choose to allow filters on one or
- all of the following: Item types (itemtypes), Collection Codes
- (ccode) and Shelving Location (loc). If you would like to be able to
- limit searches on item type and shelving location for example you
- would enter itemtypes\|loc in the preference input box. The order of
- these fields will determine the order of the tabs in the OPAC and
- staff client advanced search screens. Values within the search type
- are OR'ed together, while each different search type is AND'ed
- together in the query limits. The current stored values are supported
- without any required modification.Each set of advanced search fields
- are displayed in tabs in both the OPAC and staff client. The first
- value in the AdvancedSearchTypes syspref is the selected tab; if no
- values are present, "itemtypes" is used. For non-itemtype values, the
- value in AdvancedSearchTypes must match the Authorised Value name,
- and must be indexed with 'mc-' prefixing that name.
-
- Searching by Item Type and Shelving Location
- |image108|
-
-`expandedSearchOption <#expandedSearchOption>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: don't show
-
-Asks: By default, \_\_\_ "More options" on the OPAC and staff advanced
-search pages.
-
-Values:
-
-- don't show
-
-- show
-
-`IntranetNumbersPreferPhrase <#IntranetNumbersPreferPhrase>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: don't use
-
-Asks: By default, \_\_\_ the operator "phr" in the callnumber and
-standard number staff client searches
-
-Values:
-
-- don't use
-
-- use
-
-Description:
-
-- When searching by call number and standard number (biblionumber) in
- Koha Staff Client you can choose to force the search to be a phrase
- search by setting this preference to 'use.' This will allow for more
- accurate results over doing a general keyword field search.
-
-`OPACNumbersPreferPhrase <#OPACNumbersPreferPhrase>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: don't use
-
-Asks: By default, \_\_\_ the operator "phr" in the callnumber and
-standard number OPAC searches
-
-Values:
-
-- don't use
-
-- use
-
-Description:
-
-- When searching by call number and standard number (biblionumber) in
- the Koha OPAC you can choose to force the search to be a phrase
- search by setting this preference to 'use.' This will allow for more
- accurate results over doing a general keyword field search.
-
-`Serials <#serialsprefs>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-*Get there:* More > Administration > Global System Preferences > Serials
-
-`opacSerialDefaultTab <#opacSerialDefaultTab>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Default: Subscriptions tab
-
-Asks: Show \_\_\_ as default tab for serials in OPAC.
-
-Values:
-
-- Holdings tab
-
-- Serial Collection tab
-
- **Important**
-
- Please note that the Serial Collection tab is currently available
- only for systems using the UNIMARC standard.
-
- Serial Collection tab
- |image109|
-
-- Subscriptions tab
-
- Subscriptions tab
- |image110|
-
-`OPACSerialIssueDisplayCount <#OPACSerialIssueDisplayCount>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Default: 3
-
-Asks: Show the \_\_\_ previous issues of a serial on the OPAC.
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference allows the administrator to select the number of
- recent issues for each serial which appear in the OPAC when the
- serial is accessed. This is just the default value, patrons can
- always click to see a full list of serials.
-
-`RenewSerialAddsSuggestion <#RenewSerialAddsSuggestion>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Default: Don't add
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ a suggestion for a biblio when its attached serial is
-renewed.
-
-Values:
-
-- Add
-
-- Don't add
-
-Description:
-
-- If set to "Add", this preference will automatically add a serial to
- the Acquisitions Purchase Suggestions menu when clicking the 'renew'
- option. If you don't use the Acquisitions module to manage serials
- purchases it's best to leave this set as 'Don't add.'
-
-`RoutingListAddReserves <#RoutingListAddReserves>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Default: Place
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ received serials on hold if they are on a routing list.
-
-Values:
-
-- Place
-
-- Don't place
-
-`RoutingListNote <#RoutingListNote>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Asks: Include following note on all routing lists
-
-Description:
-
-- Text entered in this box will appear below the routing list
- information.
-
-`RoutingSerials <#RoutingSerials>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Default: Don't add
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ received serials to the routing list.
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference determines if serials routing lists are enabled or
- disabled for the library. When set to "Add", serials routing is
- enabled and a serial can be directed through a list of people by
- identifying who should receive it next. The list of people can be
- established for each serial to be passed using the Serials module.
- This preference can be used to ensure each person who needs to see a
- serial when it arrives at the library will get it. Learn more in the
- `routing list <#routinglist>`__ section of this manual.
-
-Values:
-
-- Add
-
-- Don't add
-
-`StaffSerialIssueDisplayCount <#StaffSerialIssueDisplayCount>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Default: 3
-
-Asks: Show the \_\_\_ previous issues of a serial on the staff client.
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference allows the administrator to select the number of
- recent issues for each serial which appear in the Staff Client when
- the serial is accessed. This is just the default value, staff members
- can always click to see a full list of serials.
-
-`SubscriptionDuplicateDroppedInput <#SubscriptionDuplicateDroppedInput>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Asks: List of fields which must not be rewritten when a subscription is
-duplicated (Separated by pipe \|) \_\_\_
-
-Description:
-
-- When duplicating a subscription sometimes you don't want all of the
- fields duplicated, using this preference you can list the fields that
- you don't want to be duplicated. These field names come from the
- subscription table in the Koha database. Learn what fields are in
- that table on the `Koha DB
- Schema `__
- site.
-
-`SubscriptionHistory <#SubscriptionHistory>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Default: full history
-
-Asks: When showing the subscription information for a bibliographic
-record, preselect \_\_\_ view of serial issues.
-
-Values:
-
-- brief history
-
- Brief History
- |image111|
-
-- full history
-
- Full History
- |image112|
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference determines what information appears in the OPAC when
- the user clicks the More Details option. The 'brief' option displays
- a one-line summary of the volume and issue numbers of all issues of
- that serial held by the library. The 'full' option displays a more
- detailed breakdown of issues per year, including information such as
- the issue date and the status of each issue.
-
-`Staff Client <#staffprefs>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-*Get there:* More > Administration > Global System Preferences > Staff
-Client
-
-`Appearance <#staffappearprefs>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-`Display856uAsImage <#Display856uAsImage>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Neither details or results page
-
-Asks: Display the URI in the 856u field as an image on: \_\_\_
-
-Values:
-
-- Both results and details pages
-
- - **Important**
-
- Not implemented yet
-
-- Detail page only
-
- - **Important**
-
- `XSLTDetailsDisplay <#XSLTDetailsDisplay>`__ needs to be on
- for this preference to work.
-
- Showing the 856u as an image
- |image113|
-
-- Neither details or results page
-
-- Results page only
-
- - **Important**
-
- Not yet implemented
-
-Description:
-
-- In addition to this option being set, the corresponding XSLT option
- must be turned on. Also, the corresponding 856q field must have a
- valid MIME image extension (e.g., "jpg") or MIME image type (i.e.
- starting with "image/"), or the generic indicator "img" entered in
- the field. When all of the requirements are met, an image file will
- be displayed instead of the standard link text. Clicking on the image
- will open it in the same way as clicking on the link text. When you
- click on the image it should open to full size, in the current window
- or in a new window depending on the value in the system pref
- `OPACURLOpenInNewWindow <#OPACURLOpenInNewWindow>`__.
-
- Sample 856 Field
- |image114|
-
-`DisplayIconsXSLT <#DisplayIconsXSLT>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Show
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ the format, audience, and material type icons in XSLT
-MARC21 results and detail pages in the staff client.
-
- **Important**
-
- `XSLTResultsDisplay <#XSLTResultsDisplay>`__ and/or
- `XSLTDetailsDisplay <#XSLTDetailsDisplay>`__ must be set to use an
- XSLT stylesheet (default or custom) for these icons to show.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't show
-
-- Show
-
- DisplayIconsXSLT
- |image115|
-
- **Note**
-
- See the `XSLT Icon Guide <#XSLTiTypes>`__ for more information on
- these icons.
-
-`intranet\_includes <#intranet_includes>`__
-'''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: includes
-
-Asks: Use include files from the \_\_\_ directory in the template
-directory, instead of includes/. (Leave blank to disable)
-
-`IntranetCirculationHomeHTML <#IntranetCirculationHomeHTML>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Show the following HTML in its own div on the bottom of the home
-page of the circulation module: IntranetCirculationHomeHTML
-
-`intranetcolorstylesheet <#intranetcolorstylesheet>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Include the additional CSS stylesheet \_\_\_ to override specified
-settings from the default stylesheet
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference is used to set the background color and style of the
- Staff Client. The value is a .css file. The system administrator
- should determine which file is appropriate. Enter just a filename, a
- full local path or a complete URL starting with http:// (if the file
- lives on a remote server). Please note that if you just enter a
- filename, the file should be in the css subdirectory for each active
- theme and language within the Koha templates directory. A full local
- path is expected to start from your HTTP document root.
-
- **Important**
-
- Leave this field blank to disable.
-
-`IntranetFavicon <#IntranetFavicon>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Use the image at \_\_\_ for the Staff Client's favicon.
-
- **Important**
-
- This should be a complete URL, starting with http://
-
- **Note**
-
- Turn your logo into a favicon with the `Favicon
- Generator `__.
-
-Description:
-
-- The favicon is the little icon that appears next to the URL in the
- address bar in most browsers. The default value for this field (if
- left blank) is the small 'K' in the Koha logo.
-
- Default Koha Favicon
- |image116|
-
-`IntranetmainUserblock <#IntranetmainUserblock>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Show the following HTML in its own column on the main page of the
-staff client
-
-Sample HTML for IntranetmainUserblock
-|image117|
-
-Message from IntranetmainUserblock as it appears on the Staff Client
-main page
-|image118|
-
-`IntranetNav <#IntranetNav>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Show the following HTML in the More menu at the top of each page
-on the staff client (should be a list of links or blank)
-
-`IntranetReportsHomeHTML <#IntranetReportsHomeHTML>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Show the following HTML in its own div on the bottom of the home
-page of the reports module: HTML on Reports page
-
-`IntranetSlipPrinterJS <#IntranetSlipPrinterJS>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Use the following JavaScript for printing slips.
-
-Description:
-
-- The most logical use of this preference is in conjunction with the
- `jsPrintSetup `__ Firefox add-on.
- Learn more about this preference and the add-on setup on the Koha
- wiki at
- http://wiki.koha-community.org/wiki/Setting_up_slip_printer_to_print_silently.
-
-`intranetstylesheet <#intranetstylesheet>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Use the CSS stylesheet \_\_\_ on all pages in the staff interface,
-instead of the default css (used when leaving this field blank).
-
-Description:
-
-- The Intranetstylesheet preference is a layout and design feature for
- the intranet or staff client. This preference allows a library to
- customize the appearance of the Staff Client. Enter just a filename,
- a full local path or a complete URL starting with http:// (if the
- file lives on a remote server). Please note that if you just enter a
- filename, the file should be in the css subdirectory for each active
- theme and language within the Koha templates directory. A full local
- path is expected to start from your HTTP document root.
-
-`IntranetUserCSS <#IntranetUserCSS>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Include the following CSS on all pages in the staff client
-
-`IntranetUserJS <#intranetuserjs>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Include the following JavaScript on all pages in the staff
-interface
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference allows the administrator to enter JavaScript or
- JQuery that will be embedded across all pages of the Staff Client.
- Administrators may use this preference to customize some of the
- interactive sections of Koha, customizing the text for the login
- prompts, for example. Sample JQuery scripts used by Koha libraries
- can be found on the wiki:
- http://wiki.koha-community.org/wiki/JQuery_Library.
-
-`SlipCSS <#SlipCSS>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Include the stylesheet at \_\_\_ on Issue and Reserve Slips.
-
- **Important**
-
- This should be a complete URL, starting with http://
-
-Description:
-
-- If you would like to style your receipts or slips with a consistent
- set of fonts and colors you can use this preference to point Koha to
- a stylesheet specifically for your slips.
-
-`StaffAuthorisedValueImages <#StaffAuthorisedValueImages>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Show
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ images for authorized values (such as lost statuses and
-locations) in search results.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't show
-
-- Show
-
-`staffClientBaseURL <#staffClientBaseURL>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: The staff client is located at http:// \_\_\_
-
-`template <#template>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: prog
-
-Asks: Use the \_\_\_ theme on the staff interface.
-
-Values:
-
-- prog
-
- **Important**
-
- Do not include a trailing slash in the URL this will break links
- created using this URL. (example: www.google.com not
- www.google.com/)
-
-`XSLTDetailsDisplay <#XSLTDetailsDisplay>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: default
-
-Asks: Display details in the staff client using XSLT stylesheet at
-\_\_\_
-
-Values:
-
-- leave empty to not use the XSLT stylesheet
-
- - In previous versions of Koha this was the setting that read
- 'normally'
-
- Detail display without XSLT stylesheets
- |image119|
-
-- enter "default" for the default one
-
- Detail display using XSLT stylesheets
- |image120|
-
-- put a path to define a XSLT file
-
- - ex: /path/to/koha/and/your/stylesheet.xsl
-
- - If in a multi-language system you can enter {langcode} in the path
- to tell Koha to look in the right language folder
-
- - ex:
- /home/koha/src/koha-tmpl/intranet-tmpl/prog/{langcode}/xslt/intranetDetail.xsl
-
- - ex. http://mykoha.org/{langcode}/stylesheet.xsl
-
-- put an URL for an external specific stylesheet
-
- - ex: http://mykoha.org/stylesheet.xsl
-
-Description:
-
-- XSLT stylesheets allow for the customization of the details shows on
- the screen when viewing a bib record. This preference will allow you
- either use the default look that comes with Koha or design your own
- stylesheet.
-
-`XSLTResultsDisplay <#XSLTResultsDisplay>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: default
-
-Asks: Display results in the staff client using XSLT stylesheet at
-\_\_\_
-
-Values:
-
-- leave empty to not use the XSLT stylesheet
-
- - In previous versions of Koha this was the setting that read
- 'normally'
-
-- enter "default" for the default one
-
-- put a path to define a XSLT file
-
- - ex: /path/to/koha/and/your/stylesheet.xsl
-
- - If in a multi-language system you can enter {langcode} in the path
- to tell Koha to look in the right language folder
-
- - ex:
- /home/koha/src/koha-tmpl/intranet-tmpl/prog/{langcode}/xslt/intranetDetail.xsl
-
- - ex. http://mykoha.org/{langcode}/stylesheet.xsl
-
-- put an URL for an external specific stylesheet
-
- - ex: http://mykoha.org/stylesheet.xsl
-
-Description:
-
-- XSLT stylesheets allow for the customization of the details shows on
- the screen when viewing the search results. This preference will
- allow you either use the default look that comes with Koha or design
- your own stylesheet.
-
-`Options <#staffoptsprefs>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-`HidePatronName <#HidePatronName>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Show
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ the names of patrons that have items checked out or on hold
-on detail pages or the "Place Hold" screen.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't show
-
-- Show
-
-`intranetbookbag <#intranetbookbag>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Show
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ the cart option in the staff client.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't show
-
-- Show
-
-`StaffDetailItemSelection <#StaffDetailItemSelection>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Enable
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ item selection in record detail page.
-
-Values:
-
-- Disable
-
-- Enable
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference lets you choose to show (or not show) checkboxes to
- the left of every item in the holdings tab on the detail display of a
- record in the staff client. Showing these checkboxes allows the staff
- members to select multiple items to edit or delete at once.
-
- Items with the checkboxes enabled
- |image121|
-
-`UseWYSIWYGinSystemPreferences <#UseWYSIWYGinSystemPreferences>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Don't show
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ WYSIWYG editor when editing certain HTML system
-preferences.
-
-Values:
-
-- Don't show
-
-- ShowWYSIWYG Editor in Sys Prefs
-
-Description:
-
-- This preference allows you to chang system preferences with HTML in
- them to WYSIWYG editors instead of plain text boxes.
-
-`viewISBD <#viewISBD>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ staff to view records in ISBD form on the staff client.
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
-- Don't allow
-
-`viewLabeledMARC <#viewLabeledMARC>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ staff to view records in labeled MARC form on the staff
-client.
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
-- Don't allow
-
-`viewMARC <#viewMARC>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Allow
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ staff to view records in plain MARC form on the staff
-client.
-
-Values:
-
-- Allow
-
-- Don't allow
-
-`Tools <#toolsprefs>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-*Get there:* More > Administration > Global System Preferences > Tools
-
-`Batch Item Modification <#batchitemodprefs>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-These preferences are in reference to the `Batch Item
-Modification <#batchmodifyitems>`__ tool.
-
-`MaxItemsForBatch <#MaxItemsForBatch>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: 1000
-
-Asks: Process up to \_\_\_ items in a single modification or deletion
-batch.
-
-Description:
-
-- In the `batch item delete tool <#batchdeleteitems>`__ this will
- prevent the display of more than the items you entered in this
- preference, but you will be able to delete more than the number you
- enter here. In the `batch item modification
- tool <#batchmodifyitems>`__ this preference will prevent the editing
- of more than the number entered here.
-
-`News <#newstoolprefs>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-`NewsAuthorDisplay <#NewsAuthorDisplay>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: not at all
-
-Asks: Show the author for news items: \_\_\_
-
-Values:
-
-- Both OPAC and staff client
-
-- Not at all
-
-- OPAC only
-
-- Staff client only
-
-`Patron Cards <#patcardprefs>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-These preferences are in reference to the `Patron Card
-Creator <#patroncardcreator>`__ tool.
-
-`ImageLimit <#ImageLimit>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: Limit the number of creator images stored in the database to
-\_\_\_ images.
-
-`Web Services <#webserviceprefs>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-*Get there:* More > Administration > Global System Preferences > Web
-Services
-
-`IdRef <#idref>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Default: Disable
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ the IdRef webservice from the opac detail page. IdRef
-allows to request authorities from the Sudoc database.
-
-Values:
-
-- Disable
-
-- Enable
-
-Description:
-
-- IdRef is a French service for Sudoc autorities. Using the `Sudoc
- database `__, it allows to request /
- modify / add authorities. If a record comes from the Sudoc (so 009 is
- filled with an integer), at the OPAC you will see "Author: Idref" if
- a 7..$3 (unimarc author) if filled with a ppn. On clicking on the
- Idref link, a popup will display. IdRef link
-
- The Idref webservice is requested and all records (by roles) for this
- author will be displayedSudoc
-
- There is 1 line / record and 2 links at the end. 1 will request Koha
- (cgi-bin/koha/opac-search.pl?q=ident:003381862), the other one will
- redirect to the sudoc page (http://www.sudoc.fr/003381862).
-
-- **Important**
-
- Please note that this feature is available only for libraries
- using UNIMARC.
-
-- **Note**
-
- The French Sudoc database should not be confused with the US
- Superintendent of Documents (SuDocs) Classification Scheme.
-
-`ILS-DI <#ilsdiprefs>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-`ILS-DI <#ILS-DI>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Disable
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ ILS-DI services for OPAC users
-
-Values:
-
-- Disable
-
-- Enable
-
-`ILS-DI:AuthorizedIPs <#ILS-DIAuthorized_IPs>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ allowed IPs to use the ILS-DI services
-
-`OAI-PMH <#oaiprefs>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-`OAI-PMH <#OAI-PMH>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Disable
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ Koha's OAI-PMH server.
-
-Values:
-
-- Disable
-
-- Enable
-
-Description:
-
-- Once enabled you can visit http://YOURKOHACATALOG/cgi-bin/koha/oai.pl
- to see your file. For the Open Archives Initiative-Protocol for
- Metadata Harvesting (OAI-PMH) there are two groups of 'participants':
- Data Providers and Service Providers. Data Providers (open archives,
- repositories) provide free access to metadata, and may, but do not
- necessarily, offer free access to full texts or other resources.
- OAI-PMH provides an easy to implement, low barrier solution for Data
- Providers. Service Providers use the OAI interfaces of the Data
- Providers to harvest and store metadata. Note that this means that
- there are no live search requests to the Data Providers; rather,
- services are based on the harvested data via OAI-PMH. Koha at present
- can only act as a Data Provider. It can not harvest from other
- repositories. The biggest stumbling block to having Koha harvest from
- other repositories is that MARC is the only metadata format that Koha
- indexes natively. Visit
- http://www.oaforum.org/tutorial/english/page3.htm for diagrams of how
- OAI-PMH works.
-
-Learn more about OAI-PMH at: http://www.openarchives.org/pmh/
-
-`OAI-PMH:archiveID <#OAI-PMHarchiveID>`__
-'''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: KOHA-OAI-TEST
-
-Asks: Identify records at this site with the prefix \_\_\_ :
-
-`OAI-PMH:AutoUpdateSets <#OAI-PMHAutoUpdateSets>`__
-'''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: Disable
-
-Asks: \_\_\_ automatic update of OAI-PMH sets when a bibliographic
-record is created or updated.
-
-Values:
-
-- Disable
-
-- Enable
-
-`OAI-PMH:ConfFile <#OAI-PMHConfFile>`__
-'''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-If this preference is left empty, Koha's OAI Server operates in normal
-mode, otherwise it operates in extended mode. In extended mode, it's
-possible to parameter other formats than marcxml or Dublin Core.
-OAI-PMH:ConfFile specify a YAML configuration file which list available
-metadata formats and XSL file used to create them from marcxml records.
-
-For more information, see the `sample conf file <#oaiconfsample>`__ in
-the appendix.
-
-`OAI-PMH:DeletedRecord <#OAI-PMHDeletedRecord>`__
-'''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: will never be emptied or truncated (persistent)
-
-Asks: Koha's deletedbiblio table \_\_\_
-
-Values:
-
-- will never have any data in it (no)
-
-- will never be emptied or truncated (persistent)
-
-- might be emptied or truncated at some point (transient)
-
-`OAI-PMH:MaxCount <#OAI-PMHMaxCount>`__
-'''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: 50
-
-Asks: Only return \_\_\_ records at a time in response to a ListRecords
-or ListIdentifiers query.
-
-Description:
-
-- This is the maximum number of records that would be returned based on
- ListRecord or ListIdentifier queries from harvesters. ListRecords
- harvest the entire records while the ListIdentifier is an abbreviated
- form of ListRecords, retrieving only headers rather than records.
-
-`Reporting <#reportingservice>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-`SvcMaxReportRows <#SvcMaxReportRows>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Default: 10
-
-Asks: Only return \_\_\_ rows of a report requested via the reports web
-service.
-
-Description:
-
-- This value will be used to limit the number of results returned by
- `public reports <#publicreport>`__.
-
-`Basic Parameters <#basicparams>`__
------------------------------------
-
-*Get there:* More > Administration
-
- **Important**
-
- Configure all 'parameters' in the order they appear.
-
-`Libraries & Groups <#libsgroups>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-When setting up your Koha system you will want to add information for
-every library that will be sharing your system. This data is used in
-several areas of Koha.
-
-- *Get there:* More > Administration > Basic Parameters > Libraries and
- Groups
-
-When visiting this page you are presented with a list of the libraries
-and groups that have already been added to the system.
-
-Library List
-|image122|
-
-Group Lists
-|image123|
-
-`Adding a Library <#addingalibrary>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-To add a new library:
-
-- Click 'New Library'
-
-- The top of the form asks for some basics about the library
-
- Basic Library Info
- |image124|
-
- - The library code should not contain any spaces and be 10 or fewer
- characters. This code will be used as a unique identifier in the
- database.
-
- - The name will be displayed on the OPAC wherever the library name
- displays to the public and should be a name that makes sense to
- your patrons.
-
- - If you have `groups <#addinglibgroup>`__ set up you can choose
- what group this library belongs to after entering in the code and
- name
-
-- Next you can enter basic contact info about the branch
-
- Library Contact Info
- |image125|
-
- - The address and contact fields can be used to make notices custom
- for each library
-
- - The email address field is not required, but it should be filled
- for every library in your system
-
- - **Important**
-
- Be sure to enter a library email address to make sure that
- notices are sent to and from the right address
-
- - If you'd like you can enter a different 'Reply-To' email address.
- This is the email address that all replies will go to.
-
- - **Note**
-
- If you do not fill in this value Koha will use the address
- in the `ReplytoDefault <#ReplytoDefault>`__ preference
-
- - If you'd like you can also enter a different 'Return-Path' email
- address. This is the email address that all bounced messages will
- go to.
-
- - **Note**
-
- If you do not fill in this value Koha will use the address
- in the `ReturnpathDefault <#ReturnpathDefault>`__
- preference
-
- - If the URL field is populated then the library name will be linked
- in the holdings table on the OPAC
-
- Linked Library Name
- |image126|
-
- - The OPAC Info box is for you to put information about the library
- that will appear in the OPAC when the branch name is moused over
- in the holdings table
-
- OPAC Info
- |image127|
-
- - IP Address does not have be filled in unless you plan on limiting
- access to your staff client to a specific IP Address
-
- - **Important**
-
- An IP address is required if you have enabled
- `AutoLocation <#AutoLocation>`__
-
- - Finally, if you have any notes you can put them here. These will
- not show in the OPAC
-
- **Note**
-
- Of the fields listed, only 'Library code' and 'Name' are required
-
-`Editing/Deleting a Library <#editingalibrary>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-You will be unable to delete any library that has patrons or items
-attached to it.
-
-Staff will be presented with a warning when trying to delete a library
-that is being used
-|image128|
-
-Each library will have an 'Edit' link to the right of it. Click this
-link to edit/alter details associated with the library in question.
-
- **Important**
-
- You will be unable to edit the 'Library code'
-
-`Adding a group <#addinglibgroup>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-To add a Search Domain or Library Property Group click the 'New Group'
-button at the top of the screen
-
-Add group form
-|image129|
-
-Give the group a 'Category type; of 'searchdomain' and if you would like
-the group to show up in the library pull down at the top of the OPAC
-(with
-`OpacAddMastheadLibraryPulldown <#OpacAddMastheadLibraryPulldown>`__ set
-to 'Add') and on the advanced search page you can check the 'Show in
-search pulldown' box.
-
-Of the fields on the group form, 'Category code', 'Name', and 'Category
-type' are the only required fields
-
-`Search Domain Groups <#searchdomaingroups>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Search Domain Groups allow you to search a group of libraries at the
-same time instead of searching just one library or all libraries.
-
-Search Domain Groups
-|image130|
-
-To see Search Domain Groups in action visit the staff client advanced
-search page in your Koha system:
-
-Library group search on staff client
-|image131|
-
-`Library Property Groups <#libpropertygroups>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-You can assign specific categories to your libraries by adding groups
-for them
-
-Library Property Groups
-|image132|
-
-Properties are then applied to libraries via the add or edit library
-form
-
-Groups on the Add/Modify library form
-|image133|
-
-`Item Types <#itemtypeadmin>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Koha allows you to organize your collection by item types and collection
-codes.
-
-- *Get there:* More > Administration > Basic Parameters > Item Types
-
-Item types typically refer to the material type (book, cd, dvd, etc),
-but can be used in any way that works for your library.
-
-Item Types
-|image134|
-
-`Adding Item Types <#additemtype>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-To add a new item type, simply click the 'New Item Type' button at the
-top of the Item Types page.
-
-New Item Type
-|image135|
-
-- In the 'Item Type' field, enter a short code for your item type
-
-- The description is the plain text definition of the item type (for
- those with multiple languages installed you can translate the item
- type description in to all of those languages using the 'Translate in
- to other languages' link)
-
-- Item types and can grouped together for searching at the same time.
- For example you can put DVDs and Bluray in to a group called Movie
- and then they can be searched together. These groups are defined in
- the ITEMTYPECAT authorized value.
-
-- You can choose to have an image associated with your item type
-
- - You can choose from a series of image collections
-
- - You can link to a remote image
-
- - Or you can just have no image associated with the item type
-
- - **Important**
-
- To have your item type images appear in the OPAC you need to
- set `noItemTypeImages <#noItemTypeImages>`__ to 'Show'
-
- - *Get there:*\ More > Administration > Global System Preferences
- > `Admin <#adminprefs>`__
-
-- For items that you are suppressing from the OPAC you can hide their
- item type from being searched in the OPAC
-
-- For items that do not circulate, check the 'Not for loan' options
-
- - Items marked 'Not for loan' will appear in the catalog, but cannot
- be checked out to patrons
-
-- For items that you charge a rental fee for, enter the total fee you
- charge in the 'Rental charge' field
-
- - **Important**
-
- Do not enter symbols in this field, only numbers and decimal
- points (ex. $5.00 should be entered as 5 or 5.00)
-
- - This will charge the patron on checkout
-
-- If you would like a message or alert to appear when items of this
- type are checked in you can enter that in the 'Checkin message' box
-
- Checkin message setup
- |image136|
-
- - The Checkin message type can be a Message or an Alert. The only
- difference between these two is the styling. By default a Message
- is blue
-
- Checkin Message
- |image137|
-
- and an Alert is yellow.
-
- Checkin Alert
- |image138|
-
-- Some SIP devices need you to use a SIP-specific media type instead of
- Koha's item type (usually lockers and sorters need this media type),
- if you use a device like this you'll want to enter the SIP media
- type.
-
-- When finished, click 'Save Changes'
-
- - **Note**
-
- All fields, with the exception of the 'Item Type' will be
- editable from the Item Types list
-
-- Your new item type will now appear on the list
-
- New DVD Item Type
- |image139|
-
-`Editing Item Types <#edititemtype>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Each item type has an Edit button beside it. To edit an item simply
-click the 'Edit' link.
-
- **Important**
-
- You will not be able to edit the code you assigned as the 'Item
- Type' but you will be able to edit the description for the item.
-
-`Deleting Item Types <#deleteitemtype>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Each item has a Delete button beside it. To delete an item, simply click
-the 'Delete' link.
-
- **Important**
-
- You will not be able to delete item types that are being used by
- items within your system.
-
-Warning when you try to delete an item that is in use
-|image140|
-
-`Authorized Values <#authorizedvalues>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Authorized values can be used in several areas of Koha. One reason you
-would add an authorized value category would be to control the values
-that can be entered into MARC fields by catalogers.
-
-- *Get there:* More > Administration > Basic Parameters > Authorized
- Values
-
-`Existing Values <#existingauthvalues>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Koha installs with pre-defined values that your library is likely to
-use, for instance 'Lost'.
-
-- Asort1
-
- - Used for acquisitions statistical purposes
-
-- Asort2
-
- - Used for acquisitions statistical purposes
-
-- BOR\_NOTES
-
- - Values for custom patron messages that appear on the circulation
- screen and the OPAC. The value in the Description field should be
- the message text and is limited to 200 characters.
-
- Borrower messages
- |image141|
-
-- Bsort1
-
- - Values that can be entered to fill in the patron's sort 1 field
-
-- Bsort2
-
- - Values that can be entered to fill in the patron's sort 2 field
-
-- CART
-
- - Is the shelving cart location, used by
- `InProcessingToShelvingCart <#InProcessingToShelvingCart>`__ and
- `ReturnToShelvingCart <#ReturnToShelvingCart>`__
-
-- CCODE
-
- - Collection codes (appears when cataloging and working with items)
-
-- DAMAGED
-
- - Descriptions for items marked as damaged (appears when cataloging
- and working with items)
-
-- DEPARTMENT
-
- - Departments are required by and will be used in the `Course
- Reserves <#coursereserves>`__ module
-
-- HINGS\_AS
-
- - General Holdings: Acquisition Status Designator :: This data
- element specifies acquisition status for the unit at the time of
- the holdings report.
-
-- HINGS\_C
-
- - General Holdings: Completeness Designator
-
-- HINGS\_PF
-
- - Physical Form Designators
-
-- HINGS\_RD
-
- - General Holdings: Retention Designator :: This data element
- specifies the retention policy for the unit at the time of the
- holdings report.
-
-- HINGS\_UT
-
- - General Holdings: Type of Unit Designator
-
-- LOC
-
- - Shelving location (usually appears when adding or editing an item)
-
-- LOST
-
- - Descriptions for the items marked as lost (appears when adding or
- editing an item)
-
- - **Important**
-
- Values given to lost statuses should be numeric and not
- alphabetical in order for statuses to appear properly
-
-- MANUAL\_INV
-
- - Values for manual invoicing types
-
- - **Important**
-
- The value set as the Authorized Value for the MANUAL\_INV
- authorized value category will appear as the Description and
- the Authorized Value Description will be used as the amount.
- Enter monetary amounts in the description without currency
- symbols.
-
-- NOT\_LOAN
-
- - Reasons why a title is not for loan
-
- - **Important**
-
- Values given to lost statuses should be numeric and not
- alphabetical in order for statuses to appear properly
-
- - **Note**
-
- Negative number values will still allow holds (use for on
- order statuses for example) where as positive numbers will not
- allow holds or checkouts
-
-- ORDER\_CANCELLATION\_REASON
-
- - Reasons why an order might have been cancelled
-
-- PROC
-
- - The location to be used for
- `NewItemsDefaultLocation <#NewItemsDefaultLocation>`__ (change
- description as desired), also the location expected by
- `InProcessingToShelvingCart <#InProcessingToShelvingCart>`__.
-
-- REPORT\_GROUP
-
- - A way to sort and filter your reports, the default values in this
- category include the Koha modules (Accounts, Acquitisions,
- Catalog, Circulation, Patrons)
-
- Report Groups
- |image142|
-
-- REPORT\_SUBGROUP
-
- - Can be used to further sort and filter your reports. This category
- is empty by default. Values here need to include the authorized
- value code from REPORT\_GROUP in the Description (OPAC) field to
- link the subgroup to the appropriate group.
-
- Report Subgroups
- |image143|
-
-- RESTRICTED
-
- - Restricted status of an item
-
-- ROADTYPE
-
- - Road types to be used in patron addresses
-
-- SIP\_MEDIA\_TYPE
-
- - Used when `creating <#additemtype>`__ or
- `editing <#edititemtype>`__ an item type to assign a SIP specific
- media type for devices like lockers and sorters.
-
-- SUGGEST
-
- - List of patron suggestion reject or accept reasons (appears when
- managing suggestions)
-
-- WITHDRAWN
-
- - Description of a withdrawn item (appears when adding or editing an
- item)
-
-- YES\_NO
-
- - A generic authorized value field that can be used anywhere you
- need a simple yes/no pull down menu.
-
-`Add new Authorized Value Category <#newauthvalcat>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-In addition to the existing categories that come by default with Koha,
-librarians can add their own authorized value categories to control data
-that is entered into the system. To add a new category:
-
-- Click 'New Category'
-
- New Authorized Category form
- |image144|
-
-- Limit your Category to 10 characters (something short to make it
- clear what the category is for)
-
- - **Important**
-
- Category cannot have spaces or special characters other than
- underscores and hyphens in it.
-
-- When adding a new category you're asked to create at least one
- authorized value
-
- - Enter a code for your Authorized Value into the 'Authorized value'
- field
-
- - **Important**
-
- Authorized value is limited to 80 characters and cannot
- have spaces or special characters other than underscores
- and hyphens in it.
-
- - Use the Description field for the actual value that will be
- displayed. If you want something different to show in the OPAC,
- enter a 'Description (OPAC)'
-
- - If you would like to limit this authorized value category to only
- specific libraries you can choose them from the 'Branches
- limitation' menu. To have it show for all libraries just choose
- 'All branches' at the top of the list.
-
- - If you have
- `StaffAuthorisedValueImages <#StaffAuthorisedValueImages>`__
- and/or `AuthorisedValueImages <#AuthorisedValueImages>`__ set to
- show images for authorized values you can choose the image under
- 'Choose an icon'
-
-- Click 'Save'
-
-- Your new category and value will appear on the list of Authorized
- Values
-
- Custom Authorized Value on list of values
- |image145|
-
-`Add new Authorized Value <#newauthval>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-New authorized values can be added to any existing or new category. To
-add a value:
-
-- Click 'New authorized value for ...'
-
- New Authorized Value form
- |image146|
-
-- Enter a code for your Authorized Value into the 'Authorized value'
- field
-
- - **Important**
-
- Authorized value is limited to 80 characters and cannot have
- spaces or special characters other than underscores and
- hyphens in it.
-
-- Use the Description field for the actual value that will be
- displayed. If you want something different to show in the OPAC, enter
- a 'Description (OPAC)'
-
-- If you would like to limit this authorized value category to only
- specific libraries you can choose them from the 'Branches limitation'
- menu. To have it show for all libraries just choose 'All branches' at
- the top of the list.
-
-- If you have
- `StaffAuthorisedValueImages <#StaffAuthorisedValueImages>`__ and/or
- `AuthorisedValueImages <#AuthorisedValueImages>`__ set to show images
- for authorized values you can choose the image under 'Choose an icon'
-
-- Click 'Save'
-
-- The new value will appear in the list along with existing values
-
- List of authorized values in MARC504 category
- |image147|
-
-`Patrons & Circulation <#patscirc>`__
--------------------------------------
-
-Settings for controlling circulation and patron information.
-
-`Patron Categories <#patcats>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Patron categories allow you to organize your patrons into different
-roles, age groups, and patron types.
-
-- *Get there:* More > Administration > Patrons & Circulation > Patron
- Categories
-
-Patron category list
-|image148|
-
-Patrons are assigned to one of six main categories:
-
-- Adult
-
- - Most common patron type, usually used for a general 'Patron'
- category.
-
-- Child
-
- - Children patrons can have a guardian to be attached to them.
-
-- Staff
-
- - Librarians (and library workers) should be assigned the staff
- category so that you can `set their
- permissions <#patronpermissions>`__ and give them access to the
- staff client.
-
-- Organizational
-
- - Organizational patrons are organizations. Organizations can be
- used as guarantors for Professional patrons.
-
-- Professional
-
- - Professional patrons can be linked to Organizational patrons
-
-- Statistical
-
- - This patron type is used strictly for statistical purposes, such
- as in house use of items.
-
-`Adding a patron category <#addingpatroncat>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-To add a new patron category click 'New Category' at the top of the page
-
-New patron category form
-|image149|
-
-- The 'Category Code' is an identifier for your new code.
-
- - **Important**
-
- The category code is limited to 10 characters (numbers and
- letters)
-
- - **Important**
-
- This field is required in order to save your patron category.
- If left blank you will be presented with an error.
-
- Missing fields error
- |image150|
-
-- Enter a plain text version of the category in the 'Description'
- field.
-
- - **Important**
-
- This field is required in order to save your patron category.
- If left blank you will be presented with an error.
-
- Missing fields error
- |image151|
-
-- Enrollment period (in months) should be filled in if you have a
- limited enrollment period for your patrons (eg. Student cards expire
- after 9 months or until a specific date)
-
- - **Important**
-
- You cannot enter both a month limit and a date until. Choose
- to enter either one or the other.
-
- - **Important**
-
- This field is required in order to save your patron category.
- If left blank you will be presented with an error.
-
- Missing fields error
- |image152|
-
-- Some patron categories can have a minimum age (in years) requirement
- associated with them, enter this age in the 'Age required'
-
- - **Important**
-
- This value will only be checked if
- `BorrowerMandatoryField <#BorrowerMandatoryField>`__ defines
- the dateofbirth as a required field on the patron record
-
-- Patron categories can also have a maximum age (in years) associated
- with them (such as children), enter this age in the 'Upperage limit'
-
- - **Important**
-
- This value will only be checked if
- `BorrowerMandatoryField <#BorrowerMandatoryField>`__ defines
- the dateofbirth as a required field on the patron record
-
-- If you charge a membership fee for your patrons (such as those who
- live in another region) you can enter that in the 'Enrollment fee'
- field.
-
- - **Important**
-
- Only enter numbers and decimals in this field
-
- - **Note**
-
- Depending on your value for the
- `FeeOnChangePatronCategory <#FeeOnChangePatronCategory>`__
- preference this fee will be charged on patron renewal as well
- as when they are first enrolled.
-
-- If you want your patron to receive overdue notices, set the 'Overdue
- notice required' to 'Yes'
-
-- You can decide on a patron category basis if lost items are shown in
- the staff client by making a choice from the 'Lost items in staff
- client' pull down
-
- Choose a value for 'Hide Lost Items'
- |image153|
-
- - **Important**
-
- Note that this is only applicable in the staff client, so
- changing this value on patron categories who do not have
- access to the staff client won't make any difference
-
-- If you charge patrons for placing holds on items, enter the fee
- amount in the 'Hold fee' field.
-
- - **Important**
-
- Only enter numbers and decimals in this field
-
-- In the 'Category type' field choose one of the six main parent
- categories
-
- Six main patron categories
- |image154|
-
- - **Important**
-
- This field is required in order to save your patron category.
- If left blank you will be presented with an error.
-
- Missing fields error
- |image155|
-
-- The Branch Limitations let you limit this patron category to only
- some branches in your library system. Select 'All branches' if you
- would like any library to be able to use this category.
-
-- You can decide if this patron category is blocked from performing
- actions in the OPAC if their card is expired using the next option.
- By default it will follow the rule set in the
- `BlockExpiredPatronOpacActions <#BlockExpiredPatronOpacActions>`__
- preferenceBlock expired patrons
-
-- Next you can choose the default privacy settings for this patron
- category. This setting can be edited by the patron via the OPAC if
- you allow it with the `OPACPrivacy <#OPACPrivacy>`__ system
- preference.Default privacy
-
-- Finally you can assign advanced messaging preferences by default to a
- patron category
-
- - **Important**
-
- Requires that you have
- `EnhancedMessagingPreferences <#EnhancedMessagingPreferences>`__
- enabled
-
- - These defaults will be applied to new patrons that are added to
- the system. They will not edit the preferences of the existing
- patrons. Also, these can be changed for individual patrons, this
- setting is just a default to make it easier to set up messages for
- an entire category.
-
- - **Note**
-
- After setting the default for the patron category you can
- force those changes to all existing patrons by running the
- *borrowers-force-messaging-defaults* script found in the
- *misc/maintenance* folder. Ask your system administrator
- for assistance with this script.
-
-`Circulation and Fine Rules <#circfinerules>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-These rules define how your items are circulated, how/when fines are
-calculated and how holds are handled.
-
-- *Get there:* More > Administration > Patrons & Circulation >
- Circulation and fines rules
-
-The rules are applied from most specific to less specific, using the
-first found in this order:
-
-- same library, same patron type, same item type
-
-- same library, same patron type, all item type
-
-- same library, all patron types, same item type
-
-- same library, all patron types, all item types
-
-- default (all libraries), same patron type, same item type
-
-- default (all libraries), same patron type, all item types
-
-- default (all libraries), all patron types, same item type
-
-- default (all libraries), all patron types, all item types
-
-The `CircControl <#CircControl>`__ and
-`HomeOrHoldingBranch <#HomeOrHoldingBranch>`__ also come in to play when
-figuring out which circulation rule to follow.
-
-- If CircControl is set to "the library you are logged in at" circ
- rules will be selected based on the library you are logged in at
-
-- If CircControl is set to "the library the patron is from" circ rules
- will be selected based on the patron's library
-
-- If CircControl is set to "the library the item is from" circ rules
- will be selected based on the item's library where
- HomeOrHoldingBranch chooses if item's home library is used or holding
- library is used.
-
-- If `IndependentBranches <#IndependentBranches>`__ is set to 'Prevent'
- then the value of HomeOrHoldingBranch is used in figuring out if the
- item can be checked out. If the item's home library does not match
- the logged in library, the item cannot be checked out unless you are
- a `superlibrarian <#patronpermsdefined>`__.
-
- **Note**
-
- If you are a single library system choose your branch name before
- creating rules (sometimes having only rules for the 'all libraries'
- option can cause issues with holds)
-
- **Important**
-
- At the very least you will need to set a default circulation rule.
- This rule should be set for all item types, all libraries and all
- patron categories. That will catch all instances that do not match a
- specific rule. When checking out if you do not have a rule for all
- libraries, all item types and all patron types then you may see
- patrons getting blocked from placing holds. You will also want a
- rule for your specific library set for all item types and all patron
- types to avoid this holds issue. Koha needs to know what rule to
- fall back on.
-
-`Default Circulation Rules <#defaultcircrules>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Using the issuing rules matrix you can define rules that depend on
-patron/item type combos. To set your rules, choose a library from the
-pull down (or 'all libraries' if you want to apply these rules to all
-branches):
-
-Libraries to apply the rules to
-|image156|
-
-From the matrix you can choose any combination of patron categories and
-item types to apply the rules to
-
-Setting issuing rules for your libraries
-|image157|
-
-- First choose which patron category you'd like the rule to be applied
- to. If you leave this to 'All' it will apply to all patron categories
-
-- Choose the 'Item type' you would like this rule to apply to. If you
- leave this to 'All' it will apply to all item types
-
-- Limit the number of items a patron can have checked out at the same
- time by entering a number in the 'Current checkouts allowed' field
-
-- If you're allowing `OnSiteCheckouts <#OnSiteCheckouts>`__ then you
- may also want to set a limit on the number of items patron's can have
- onsite.
-
- - **Note**
-
- This setting also depends on the
- `ConsiderOnSiteCheckoutsAsNormalCheckouts <#ConsiderOnSiteCheckoutsAsNormalCheckouts>`__
- preference
-
-- Define the period of time an item can be checked out to a patron by
- entering the number of units (days or hours) in the 'Loan period'
- box.
-
-- Choose which unit of time, Days or Hours, that the loan period and
- fines will be calculated in in the 'Unit' column
-
-- You can also define a hard due date for a specific patron category
- and item type. A hard due date ignores your usual circulation rules
- and makes it so that all items of the type defined are due on, before
- or after the date you specify.
-
-- 'Fine amount' should have the amount you would like to charge for
- overdue items
-
- - **Important**
-
- Enter only numbers and decimal points (no currency symbols).
-
-- Enter the 'Fine charging interval' in the unit you set (ex. charge
- fines every 1 day, or every 2 hours)
-
-- 'When to charge' is most handy in libraries that have a fine charging
- interval of more than 1 day.
-
- - End of interval
-
- - Given a grace period of 2 days and a fine interval of 7 days,
- the first fine will appear 7 days after the due date, it will
- always take one fine interval (7 days), before the first fine
- is charged
-
- - Start of interval
-
- - Given a grace period of 2 days and a fine interval of 7 days,
- the first fine will appear 2 days after the due date and the
- second fine 7 days after the due date.
-
-- The 'Fine grace period' is the period of time an item can be overdue
- before you start charging fines.
-
- - **Important**
-
- This can only be set for the Day unit, not in Hours
-
-- The 'Overdue fines cap' is the maximum fine for this patron and item
- combination
-
- - **Important**
-
- If this field is left blank then Koha will not put a limit on
- the fines this item will accrue. A maximum fine amount can be
- set using the `MaxFine <#MaxFine>`__ system preference.
-
-- If you would like to prevent overcharging patrons for a lost items,
- you can check the box under 'Cap fine at replacement price.' This
- will prevent the patron's fines from going above the replacement
- price on the item.
-
- - **Note**
-
- If the 'Overdue fines cap' is also set, the fine will be the
- lesser of the two, if both apply to the given overdue
- checkout.
-
-- If your library 'fines' patrons by suspending their account you can
- enter the number of days their fine should be suspended in the
- 'Suspension in days' field
-
- - **Important**
-
- This can only be set for the Day unit, not in Hours
-
-- You can also define the maximum number of days a patron will be
- suspended in the 'Max suspension duration' setting
-
-- Next decide if the patron can renew this item type and if so, enter
- how many times they can renew it in the 'Renewals allowed' box
-
-- If you're allowing renewals you can control how long the renewal loan
- period will be (in the units you have chosen) in the 'Renewal period'
- box
-
-- If you're allowing renewals you can control how soon before the due
- date patrons can renew their materials with the 'No renewals before'
- box.
-
- - Items can be renewed at any time if this value is left blank.
- Otherwise items can only be renewed if the item is due after the
- number in units (days/hours) entered in this box.
-
- - To control this value on a more granular level please set the
- `NoRenewalBeforePrecision <#NoRenewalBeforePrecision>`__
- preference.
-
-- You can enable automatic renewals for certain items/patrons if you'd
- like. This will renew automatically following your circulation rules
- unless there is a hold on the item
-
- - **Important**
-
- You will need to enable the `automatic renewal cron
- job <#autorenewcron>`__ for this to work.
-
- - **Important**
-
- This feature needs to have the "no renewal before" column
- filled in or it will auto renew everyday after the due date
-
-- If the patron can place holds on this item type, enter the total
- numbers of items (of this type) that can be put on hold in the 'Holds
- allowed' field
-
-- Next you can decide if this patron/item combo are allowed to place
- holds on items that are on the shelf (or available in the library) or
- not. If you choose 'no' then items can only be placed on hold if
- checked out
-
-- You can also decide if patrons are allowed to place item specific
- holds on the item type in question. The options are:
-
- - Allow: Will allow patrons the option to choose next available or
- item specific
-
- - Don't allow: Will only allow patrons to choose next available
-
- - Force: Will only allow patrons to choose an specific item
-
-- Finally, if you charge a `rental fee <#rentalcharge>`__ for the item
- type and want to give a specific patron type a discount on that fee,
- enter the percentage discount (without the % symbol) in the 'Rental
- Discount' field
-
-When finished, click 'Add' to save your changes. To modify a rule,
-simply click the 'Edit' link to the right of the fule and edit the
-values that appear filled in at the bottom of the form.
-
-Edit circ and fine rule
-|image158|
-
-If you would like to delete your rule, click the 'Delete' link to the
-right of the rule.
-
-To save time you can clone rules from one library to another by choosing
-the clone option above the rules matrix.
-
-Circulation & Fine Rules Clone Tool
-|image159|
-
-After choosing to clone you will be presented with a confirmation
-message.
-
-Circulation & Fine Rules Successfully Cloned Message
-|image160|
-
-`Default Checkouts and Hold Policy <#defaultcheckoutpolicy>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-You can set a default maximum number of checkouts and hold policy that
-will be used if none is defined below for a particular item type or
-category. This is the fall back rule for defaults.
-
-Default Checkouts and Hold Policy
-|image161|
-
-From this menu you can set a default to apply to all item types and
-patrons in the library if no other option is set in the forms below.
-
-- In 'Total current checkouts allowed' enter the total number of items
- patrons can have checked out at one time
-
-- In 'Total current on-site checkouts allowed' enter the total number
- of items patrons can have checked out on site at a time
- (`OnSiteCheckouts <#OnSiteCheckouts>`__ needs to be set to 'Enable')
-
-- Control where patrons can place holds from using the 'Hold Policy'
- menu
-
- - From Any Library: Patrons from any library may put this item on
- hold. (default if none is defined)
-
- - From Home Library: Only patrons from the item's home library may
- put this book on hold.
-
- - No Holds Allowed: No patron may put this book on hold.
-
-- Control if there is a limit to filling a hold based on the item's
- library
-
- - any library
-
- - item's home library
-
- - item's holding library
-
- - **Note**
-
- The patron's home library should not affect whether a patron
- can place the hold, instead the hold will only be fillable
- when an item matching the pickup location becomes available.
-
-- Control where the item returns to once it is checked in
-
- - Item returns home
-
- - Item returns to issuing branch
-
- - Item floats
-
- - When an item floats it stays where it was checked in and does
- not ever return 'home'
-
-- Once your policy is set, you can unset it by clicking the 'Unset'
- link to the right of the rule
-
-`Checkouts Per Patron <#checkoutperpatron>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-For this library, you can specify the maximum number of loans that a
-patron of a given category can make, regardless of the item type.
-
-Set default checkouts per patron category
-|image162|
-
- **Note**
-
- If the total amount loanable for a given patron category is left
- blank, no limit applies, except possibly for a limit you define for
- a specific item type.
-
-For example, if you have a rule in the matrix that says Board patrons
-are allowed 10 books and 5 DVDs but you want to make it so that Board
-patrons only have a total of 12 things checked out at once. If you enter
-12 here and the patron has 10 books out already they will only be
-allowed 2 DVDs to equal the 12 total they're allowed.
-
-`Item Hold Policies <#holdpolicies>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-For this library, you can edit hold and return policies for a given item
-type, regardless of the patron's category.
-
-Hold policies per item type
-|image163|
-
-The various Hold Policies have the following effects:
-
-- From Any Library: Patrons from any library may put this item on hold.
- (default if none is defined)
-
-- From Home Library: Only patrons from the item's home library may put
- this book on hold.
-
-- No Holds Allowed: No patron may put this book on hold.
-
- **Important**
-
- Note that if the system preference
- `AllowHoldPolicyOverride <#AllowHoldPolicyOverride>`__ set to
- 'allow', these policies can be overridden by your circulation staff.
-
- **Important**
-
- These policies are based on the patron's home branch, not the branch
- that the reserving staff member is from.
-
-Control if there is a limit to filling a hold based on the item's
-library
-
-- any library
-
-- item's home library
-
-- item's holding library
-
-- **Note**
-
- The patron's home library should not affect whether a patron can
- place the hold, instead the hold will only be fillable when an
- item matching the pickup location becomes available.
-
-The various Return Policies have the following effects:
-
-- Item returns home: The item will prompt the librarian to transfer the
- item to its home library
-
- - **Important**
-
- If the `AutomaticItemReturn <#AutomaticItemReturn>`__
- preference is set to automatically transfer the items home,
- then a prompt will not appear
-
-- Item returns to issuing branch: The item will prompt the librarian to
- transfer the item back to the library where it was checked out
-
- - **Important**
-
- If the `AutomaticItemReturn <#AutomaticItemReturn>`__
- preference is set to automatically transfer the items home,
- then a prompt will not appear
-
-- Item floats: The item will not be transferred from the branch it was
- checked in at, instead it will remain there until transferred
- manually or checked in at another branch
-
-For example you might allow holds at your libraries but not what New
-items or DVDs to be placed on hold by other branches so you can set the
-'Hold policy' to 'From home library' so that those items can only be
-placed on hold if the items' owning library and the patron's home
-library are the same. You can also block holds completely on specific
-item types from this form. This is also how you can set up floating item
-types and types that remain with their home library.
-
-`Patron Attribute Types <#patronattributetypes>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Patron attributes can be used to define custom fields to associate with
-your patron records. In order to enable the use of custom fields you
-need to set the `ExtendedPatronAttributes <#ExtendedPatronAttributes>`__
-system preference.
-
-- *Get there:* More > Administration > Patrons & Circulation > Patron
- attribute types
-
-A common use for this field would be for a student ID number or a
-Driver's license number.
-
-List of Patron Attributes
-|image164|
-
-`Adding Patron Attributes <#addpatattributes>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-To add a new Patron Attribute Type, click the 'New Patron Attribute
-Type' button at the top of the page
-
-Add Patron Attribute Type form
-|image165|
-
-- In the 'Patron attribute type code', enter a short code to identify
- this field
-
- - **Important**
-
- This field is limited to 10 characters (numbers and letters
- only)
-
- - **Important**
-
- This setting cannot be changed after an attribute is defined
-
-- In the 'Description' field, enter a longer (plain text) explanation
- of what this field will contain
-
-- Check the box next to 'Repeatable' to let a patron record have
- multiple values of this attribute.
-
- - **Important**
-
- This setting cannot be changed after an attribute is defined
-
-- If 'Unique identifier' is checked, the attribute will be a unique
- identifier which means, if a value is given to a patron record, the
- same value cannot be given to a different record.
-
- - Unique attributes can be used as match points on the `patron
- import tool <#patronimport>`__
-
- - **Important**
-
- This setting cannot be changed after an attribute is defined
-
-- Check 'Allow password' to make it possible to associate a password
- with this attribute.
-
-- Check 'Display in OPAC' to display this attribute on a patron's
- details page in the OPAC.
-
-- Check 'Searchable' to make this attribute searchable in the staff
- patron search.
-
-- Check 'Display in check-out' to make this attribute visible in the
- patron's short detail display on the left of the checkout screen and
- other patron pages
-
- Show attribute in patron detail on the left
- |image166|
-
-- Authorized value category; if one is selected, the patron record
- input page will only allow values to be chosen from the authorized
- value list.
-
- - You will first need to add an authorized value list for it to
- appear in this menu
-
- - *Get there:*\ More > Administration > Basic Parameters >
- `Authorized Values <#authorizedvalues>`__
-
- - **Important**
-
- an authorized value list is not enforced during batch patron
- import.
-
-- If you would like this attribute to only be used by specific branches
- you can choose those branches from the 'Branches limitation' list.
- Choose 'All branches' to show it for all libraries.
-
- - **Important**
-
- Note that items with locations already set on them will not be
- altered. The branch limitation only limits the choosing of an
- authorized value based on the home branch of the current staff
- login. All authorized values for item records (LOC, LOST,
- CCODE, etc) will show in the OPAC for all patrons.
-
-- If you'd like to only show this attribute on patrons of one type
- choose that patron type from the 'Category' pull down
-
-- If you have a lot of attributes it might be handy to group them so
- that you can easily find them for editing. If you create an
- `Authorized Value <#authorizedvalues>`__ for PA\_CLASS it will show
- in the 'Class' pull down and you can then change your attributes page
- to have sections of attributes
-
- Patron Attributes Sorted
- |image167|
-
-- Click Save to save your new attribute
-
-Once added your attribute will appear on the list of attributes and also
-on the patron record add/edit form
-
-Patron Attributes list on the Patron add/edit form
-|image168|
-
-If you have set up classes for organizing attributes they will appear
-that way on the add/edit patron form
-
-Grouped Attributes
-|image169|
-
-`Editing/Deleting Patron Attributes <#editpatattributes>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Each patron attribute has an edit and a delete link beside it on the
-list of attributes.
-
-Some fields in the attribute will not be editable once created:
-
-- Patron attribute type code
-
-- Repeatable
-
-- Unique identifier
-
-You will be unable to delete an attribute if it's in use.
-
-Warning when trying to delete an attribute that is in use
-|image170|
-
-`Library Transfer Limits <#libtransferlimits>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Limit the ability to transfer items between libraries based on the
-library sending, the library receiving, and the collection code
-involved.
-
-- *Get there:* More > Administration > Patrons & Circulation > Library
- Transfer Limits
-
-These rules only go into effect if the preference
-`UseBranchTransferLimits <#UseBranchTransferLimits>`__ is set to
-'enforce'.
-
-Before you begin you will want to choose which library you are setting
-these limits for.
-
-Choose the library you're setting limits for
-|image171|
-
-Transfer limits are set based on the collections codes you have applied
-via the `Authorized Value <#authorizedvalues>`__ administration area.
-
-Collection Code values assigned in the Authorized Value area
-|image172|
-
-Collection codes will appear as tabs above the checkboxes:
-
-Collection Code tabs
-|image173|
-
-Check the boxes for the libraries that you accept checkins from for the
-item type you have selected at the top (in the example below - FIC)
-
-Example transfer limits set up
-|image174|
-
-In the above example, Centerville library will allow patrons to return
-items from all libraries except Liberty and Franklin to their branch.
-
-`Transport cost matrix <#transportcostmatrix>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-The Transport cost matrix lets a library system define relative costs to
-transport books to one another. In order for the system to use this
-matrix you must first set the
-`UseTransportCostMatrix <#UseTransportCostMatrix>`__ preference to
-'Use'.
-
- **Important**
-
- The Transport cost matrix takes precedence in controlling where
- holds are filled from, if the matrix is not used then Koha checks
- the `StaticHoldsQueueWeight <#holdqueueweight>`__.
-
-Costs are decimal values between some arbitrary maximum value (e.g. 1 or
-100) and 0 which is the minimum (no) cost. For example, you could just
-use the distance between each library in miles as your 'cost', if that
-would accurately reflect the cost of transferring them. Perhaps post
-offices would be a better measure. Libraries sharing a post office would
-have a cost of 1, adjacent post offices would have a cost of 2, etc.
-
-To enter transport costs simply click in the cell you would like to
-alter, uncheck the 'Disable' box and enter your 'cost'
-
-Transport cost matrix
-|image175|
-
-After entering in your cost, hit 'Enter' on your keyboard or click the
-'Save' button at the bottom of the matrix to save your changes.
-
- **Note**
-
- A NULL value will make no difference where the From and To libraries
- are the same library. However, as a best practice, you should put a
- 0 in there. For all other To/From combinations, a NULL value will
- cause that relationship to act as if it has been disabled. So, in
- summary, don't leave any of the values empty. It's best to always
- put a number in there ( even if you choose to disable that given
- To/From option ).
-
-`Item Circulation Alerts <#itemcircalerts>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Libraries can decide if they want to have patrons automatically notified
-of circulation events (check ins and check outs).
-
-- *Get there:* More > Administration > Patrons & Circulation > Item
- Circulation Alerts
-
-These preferences are set based on patron types and item types.
-
- **Important**
-
- These preference can be overridden by changes in the individual
- patron's messaging preferences.
-
-To set up circulation alerts:
-
-- Choose your library from the pull down at the top of the screen
-
- Libraries to set Circulation Alerts
- |image176|
-
- - To set preferences for all libraries, keep the menu set to
- 'Default'
-
-- By default all item types and all patrons are notified of check ins
- and check outs. To change this, click on the item/patron type combo
- that you would like to stop notices for.
-
- Circulation Alert Matrix
- |image177|
-
- - In the above example, Juveniles and Kids will not receive check
- out notices.
-
-`Cities and Towns <#citytowns>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-To standardize patron input you can define cities or towns within your
-region so that when new patrons are added librarians simply have to
-select the town from a list instead of having to type the town and zip
-(or postal) code information.
-
-- *Get there:* More > Administration > Patrons & Circulation > Cities
- and Towns
-
-`Adding a City <#addingcity>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-To add a new city, click the 'New City' button at the top of the page
-and enter the city name, state, zip/postal code and country.
-
-New city entry form
-|image178|
-
-One you click Submit, your city will be saved and will be listed on the
-Cities and Towns page
-
-List of Cities
-|image179|
-
-Cities can be edited or deleted at any time.
-
-`Viewing Cities on Patron Add Form <#citiesonpatform>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-If you have defined local cities using the New city form, then when
-adding or editing a patron record you will see those cities in a pull
-down menu to make city selection easy.
-
-Cities pull down on the patron record
-|image180|
-
-This will allow for easy entry of local cities into the patron record
-without risking the potential for typos or mistaken zip/postal codes.
-
-`Catalog Administration <#catadmin>`__
---------------------------------------
-
-Set these controls before you start cataloging on your Koha system.
-
-- *Get there:* More > Administration > Catalog
-
-`MARC Bibliographic Frameworks <#marcbibframeworks>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Think of Frameworks as templates for creating new bibliographic records.
-Koha comes with some predefined frameworks that can be edited or
-deleted, and librarians can create their own frameworks for content
-specific to their libraries.
-
-- *Get there:* More > Administration > Catalog > MARC Bibliographic
- Frameworks
-
-Frameworks List
-|image181|
-
- **Important**
-
- Do not delete or edit the Default Framework since this will cause
- problems with your cataloging records - always create a new template
- based on the Default Framework, or alter the other Frameworks.
-
-After clicking the 'MARC structure' link to the right of each framework
-you can decide how many fields you want to see on one screen by using
-the pagination options at the top of the table.
-
-Pagination options
-|image182|
-
-`Add New Framework <#addframework>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-To add a new framework
-
-- Click 'New Framework'
-
- Add Framework Form
- |image183|
-
- - Enter a code of 4 or fewer characters
-
- - Use the Description field to enter a more detailed definition of
- your framework
-
-- Click 'Submit'
-
-- Once your Framework is added click 'MARC structure' to the right of
- it on the list of Frameworks
-
- Choose basis for new Framework
- |image184|
-
- - You will be asked to choose a Framework to base your new Framework
- off of, this will make it easier than starting from scratch
-
-- Once your Framework appears on the screen you can edit or delete each
- field by following the instructions for `editing
- subfields <#editsubfields>`__
-
-`Edit Existing Frameworks <#editframeworks>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Clicking 'Edit' to the right of a Framework will only allow you to edit
-the Description for the Framework:
-
-Edit Framework
-|image185|
-
-To make edits to the fields associated with the Framework you must first
-click 'MARC Structure' and then follow the instructions for `editing
-subfields <#editsubfields>`__
-
-`Add subfields to Frameworks <#addsubfieldsframework>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-To add a field to a Framework click the 'New Tag' button at the top of
-the Framework definition
-
-New Tag Button
-|image186|
-
-This will open up a blank form for entering MARC field data
-
-Add a new tag to framework
-|image187|
-
-Enter the information about your new tag:
-
-- The 'Tag' is the MARC field number
-
-- The 'Label for lib' is the text that will appear in the staff client
- when in the cataloging module
-
-- The 'Label for OPAC' is the text that will appear in the OPAC when
- viewing the MARC version of the record
-
-- If this field can be repeated, check the 'Repeatable' box
-
-- If this field is mandatory, check the 'Mandatory' box
-
-- If you want this field to be a pull down with limited possible
- answers, choose which 'Authorized value' list you want to use
-
-When you're finished, click 'Save Changes' and you will be presented
-with your new field
-
-New tag and link to subfields
-|image188|
-
-To the right of the new field is a link to 'Subfields,' you will need to
-add subfields before this tag will appear in your MARC editor. The
-process of entering the settings for the new subfield is the same as
-those found in the `editing subfields in frameworks <#editsubfields>`__
-section of this manual.
-
-`Edit Framework Subfields <#editsubfields>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Frameworks are made up of MARC fields and subfields. To make edits to
-most Frameworks you must edit the fields and subfields. Clicking 'Edit'
-to the right of each subfield will allow you to make changes to the text
-associated with the field
-
-Modify MARC Field
-|image189|
-
-- Each field has a tag (which is the MARC tag) that is uneditable
-
- - The 'Label for lib' is what will show in the staff client if you
- have `advancedMARCeditor <#advancedMARCeditor>`__ set to display
- labels
-
- - The 'Label for OPAC' is what will show on the MARC view in the
- OPAC
-
- - If you check 'Repeatable' then the field will have a plus sign
- next to it allowing you to add multiples of that tag
-
- - If you check 'Mandatory' the record will not be allowed to save
- unless you have a value assigned to this tag
-
- - 'Authorized value' is where you define an `authorized
- value <#authorizedvalues>`__ that your catalogers can choose from
- a pull down to fill this field in
-
-To edit the subfields associated with the tag, click 'Subfields' to the
-right of the tag on the 'MARC Structure' listing
-
-- From the list of subfields you can click 'Delete' to the right of
- each to delete the subfields
-
-- To edit the subfields click 'Edit Subfields'
-
-- For each subfield you can set the following Basic constraint values
-
- Editing the 504 Subfield
- |image190|
-
- - Text for librarian
-
- - what appears before the subfield in the librarian interface
-
- - Text for OPAC
-
- - what appears before the field in the OPAC.
-
- - If left empty, the text for librarian is used instead
-
- - Repeatable
-
- - the field will have a plus sign next to it allowing you to add
- multiples of that tag
-
- - Mandatory
-
- - the record will not be allowed to save unless you have a value
- assigned to this tag
-
- - Managed in tab
-
- - defines the tab where the subfield is shown. All subfields of a
- given field must be in the same tab or ignored. Ignore means
- that the subfield is not managed.
-
-- For each subfield you can set the following Advanced constraint
- values
-
- Advanced constraints
- |image191|
-
- - Default value
-
- - defines what you want to appear in the field by default, this
- will be editable, but it saves time if you use the same note
- over and over or the same value in a field often.
-
- - **Note**
-
- If you would like a field to fill in with today's date you
- can use the YYYY MM DD syntax in the 'Default value'. For
- example: a default of "Year:YYYY Month:MM Day:DD" (without
- quotes) will print as "Year:2015 Month:11 Day:30"
-
- - Visibility
-
- - allows you to select from where this subfield is
- visible/hidden, simply check the boxes where you would like the
- field to show and uncheck the boxes where you would like it
- hidden.
-
- Framework visibility
- |image192|
-
- - Is a URL
-
- - if checked, it means that the subfield is a URL and can be
- clicked
-
- - Link
-
- - If you enter a field/subfield here (200b), a link appears after
- the subfield in the MARC Detail view. This view is present only
- in the staff client, not the OPAC. If the librarian clicks on
- the link, a search is done on the database for the
- field/subfield with the same value. This can be used for 2 main
- topics :
-
- - on a field like author (200f in UNIMARC), put 200f here, you
- will be able to see all bib records with the same author.
-
- - on a field that is a link (4xx) to reach another bib record.
- For example, put 011a in 464$x, will find the serials that
- are with this ISSN.
-
- - **Warning**
-
- This value should not change after data has been added to
- your catalog. If you need to change this value you must ask
- your system administrator to run
- misc/batchRebuildBiblioTables.pl.
-
- - Koha link
-
- - Koha is multi-MARC compliant. So, it does not know what the
- 245$a means, neither what 200$f (those 2 fields being both the
- title in MARC21 and UNIMARC). So, in this list you can "map" a
- MARC subfield to its meaning. Koha constantly maintains
- consistency between a subfield and its meaning. When the user
- want to search on "title", this link is used to find what is
- searched (245 if you're MARC21, 200 if you're UNIMARC).
-
-- For each subfield you can set the following Other option values
-
- |image193|
-
- - Authorized value
-
- - means the value cannot by typed by the librarian, but must be
- chosen from a pull down generated by the `authorized
- value <#authorizedvalues>`__ list
-
- - In the example above, the 504a field will show the MARC504
- Authorized Values when cataloging
-
- Example of an Authorized Subfield
- |image194|
-
- - Thesaurus
-
- - means that the value is not free text, but must be searched in
- the authority/thesaurus of the selected category
-
- - Plugin
-
- - means the value is calculated or managed by a plugin. Plugins
- can do almost anything.
-
- - Examples:
-
- - For call numbers there is an option to add a call number
- browser next to the the call number subfield so that you can
- identify which call numbers are in use and which are not.
- Simply choose the cn\_browser.pl plugin. Learn more in the
- `cataloging section <#addingitems>`__ of this manual.
-
- - If you'd like to let file uploads via cataloging you can
- choose the upload.pl plugin and this will allow you to
- `upload files to Koha to link to your
- records <#uploadbibfile>`__.
-
- - In UNIMARC there are plugins for every 1xx fields that are
- coded fields. The plugin is a huge help for cataloger! There
- are also two plugins (unimarc\_plugin\_210c and
- unimarc\_plugin\_225a that can "magically" find the editor
- from an ISBN, and the collection list for the editor)
-
-- To save your changes simply click the 'Save Changes' button at the
- top of the screen
-
-`Import/Export Frameworks <#importexportframeworks>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Next to each framework is a link to either import or export the
-framework.
-
-`Export Framework <#exportframeworks>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-To export a framework simply click the 'Export' link to the right of
-framework title.
-
-Export link next to framework
-|image195|
-
-When you click 'Export' you will be prompted to choose what format to
-export the file in.
-
-Export formats
-|image196|
-
-A framework exported this way can be imported into any other Koha
-installation using the import framework option.
-
-`Import Framework <#importframeworks>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-An easy way to create a new framework is to import one created for your
-or another Koha installation. This framework would need to be exported
-from the other system `using the instructions
-above <#exportframeworks>`__ to be available for import here.
-
-To import a framework you first need to create `a new
-framework <#addframework>`__. Once you have that framework, click
-'Import' to the right of the new framework.
-
-Import link next to framework
-|image197|
-
-You will be prompted to find a file on your computer to import into the
-framework.
-
-Choose a file to import
-|image198|
-
-You will be asked to confirm your actions before the file is imported.
-
-Confirm your desire to import
-|image199|
-
-As your file is uploaded you will see an image that will confirm that
-the system is working.
-
-Import timer
-|image200|
-
-Once your import is complete you will be brought to the framework edit
-tool where you can make any changes you need to the framework you
-imported.
-
-`Koha to MARC Mapping <#kohamarcmapping>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-While Koha stores the entire MARC record, it also stores common fields
-for easy access in various tables in the database. Koha to MARC Mapping
-is used to tell Koha where to find these values in the MARC record. In
-many cases you will not have to change the default values set by in this
-tool on installation, but it is important to know that the tool is here
-and can be used at any time.
-
-- *Get there:* More > Administration > Catalog > Koha to MARC Mapping
-
-The Koha to MARC Mapping page offers you the option of choosing from one
-of three tables in the database to assign values to.
-
-Koha to MARC Mapping Table Pull Down
-|image201|
-
-After choosing the table you would like to view, click 'OK.' To edit any
-mapping click on the 'Koha Filed' or the 'Edit' link.
-
-Map MARC Field to Koha Field
-|image202|
-
-Choose which MARC field you would like to map to this Koha Field and
-click the 'OK' button. If you would like to clear all mappings, click
-the 'Click to "Unmap"' button.
-
- **Important**
-
- At this time you can map only 1 MARC field to 1 Koha field. This
- means that you won't be able to map both the 100a and the 700a to
- the author field, you need to choose one or the other.
-
-`Keywords to MARC Mapping <#keywordmapping>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-This tool will allow you to map MARC fields to a set of predefined
-keywords.
-
-- *Get there:* More > Administration > Catalog > Keywords to MARC
- Mapping
-
- **Important**
-
- This tool only effects sites that are not using the XSLT
- Stylesheets.
-
-At this time the only keyword in use is 'subtitle.'
-
-Using this tool you can define what MARC field prints to the detail
-screen of the bibliographic record using keywords. The following example
-will use the subtitle field.
-
-Using the Framework pull down menu, choose the
-`Framework <#marcbibframeworks>`__ you would like to apply this rule to.
-For example, the subtitle for books can be found in the 245$b field.
-
-Assigning Book Subtitle
-|image203|
-
-However the subtitle for DVDs appears in 245$p
-
-Assigning DVD Subtitle
-|image204|
-
-Using this tool you can tell Koha to print the right field as the
-subtitle when viewing the bibliographic record in the OPAC.
-
-Subtitle display in the OPAC
-|image205|
-
-This tool can be used to chain together pieces of the record as well. If
-you want the series number to show in the title on your search results
-you simply have to map 490 $v to 'subtitle' along with the 245 $b.
-
- **Note**
-
- Chain together the fields you want to show after the item title in
- the order in which you want them to appear.
-
-Future developments will include additional keyword assigned fields.
-
-`MARC Bibliographic Framework Test <#marcbibframeworkstest>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Checks the MARC structure.
-
-- *Get there:* More > Administration > Catalog > MARC Bibliographic
- Framework Test
-
-If you change your MARC Bibliographic framework it's recommended that
-you run this tool to test for errors in your definition.
-
-Framework Test
-|image206|
-
-`Authority Types <#authoritiesadmin>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Authority Types are basically MARC Frameworks for Authority records and
-because of that they follow the same editing rules found in the `MARC
-Bibliographic Frameworks <#marcbibframeworks>`__ section of this manual.
-Koha comes with many of the necessary Authority frameworks already
-installed. To learn how to add and edit Authority Types, simply review
-the `MARC Bibliographic Frameworks <#marcbibframeworks>`__ section of
-this manual.
-
-- *Get there:* More > Administration > Catalog > Authority Types
-
-`Classification Sources <#classificationsources>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Source of classification or shelving scheme is an `Authorized
-Values <#authorizedvalues>`__ category that is mapped to field 952$2 and
-942$2 in Koha's MARC Bibliographic frameworks and stored in the
-items.cn\_source field in the database.
-
-- *Get there:* More > Administration > Catalog > Classification sources
-
-Classification Sources
-|image207|
-
-Commonly used values of this field are:
-
-- ddc - Dewey Decimal Classification
-
-- lcc - Library of Congress Classification
-
-If you chose to install classification sources during Koha's
-installation, you would see other values too:
-
-- ANSCR (sound recordings)
-
-- SuDOC classification
-
-- Universal Decimal Classification
-
-- Other/Generic Classification
-
-`Adding/Editing Classification Sources <#addingclasssource>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-You can add your own source of classification by using the New
-Classification Source button. To edit use the Edit link.
-
-Add classification source
-|image208|
-
-When creating or editing:
-
-- You will need to enter a code and a description.
-
-- Check the 'Source in use?' checkbox if you want the value to appear
- in the drop down list for this category.
-
-- Select the appropriate `filing rule <#classfilingrules>`__ from the
- drop down list.
-
-`Classification Filing Rules <#classfilingrules>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Filing rules determine the order in which items are placed on shelves.
-
-Values that are pre-configured in Koha are:
-
-- Dewey
-
-- LCC
-
-- Generic
-
-Filing rules are mapped to `Classification
-sources <#addingclasssource>`__. You can setup new filing rules by using
-the New Filing Rule button. To edit use the Edit link.
-
-When creating or editing:
-
-- Enter a code and a description
-
-- Choose an appropriate filing routine - dewey, generic or lcc
-
-`Record Matching Rules <#recordmatchingrules>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Record matching rules are used when importing MARC records into Koha.
-
-- *Get there:* More > Administration > Catalog > Record Matching Rules
-
-The rules that you set up here will be referenced with you `Stage MARC
-Records for Import <#stagemarc>`__.
-
-It is important to understand the difference between Match Points and
-Match Checks before adding new matching rules to Koha.
-
-Match Points are the criteria that you enter that must be met in order
-for an incoming record to match an existing MARC record in your catalog.
-You can have multiple match points on an import rule each with its own
-score. An incoming record will be compared against your existing records
-(âone record at a timeâ) and given a score for each match point. When
-the total score of the matchpoints matches or exceeds the threshold
-given for the matching rule, Koha assumes a good match and
-imports/overlays according your specifications in the import process. An
-area to watch out for here is the sum of the match points. Doublecheck
-that the matches you want will add up to a successful match.
-
-Example:
-
-Threshold of 1000
-
-Match Point on 020$a 1000
-
-Match Point on 022$a 1000
-
-Match Point on 245$a 500
-
-Match Point on 100$a 100
-
-In the example above, a match on either the 020$a or the 022$a will
-result in a successful match. A match on 245$a title and 100$a author
-(and not on 020$a or 022$a) will only add up to 600 and not be a match.
-And a match on 020$a and 245$a will result in 1500 and while this is a
-successful match, the extra 500 point for the 245$a title match are
-superfluous. The incoming record successfully matched on the 020$a
-without the need for the 245$a match. However, if you assigned a score
-of 500 to the 100$a Match Point, a match on 245$a title and 100$a author
-will be considered a successful match (total of 1000) even if the 020$a
-is not a match.
-
-Match Checks are not commonly used in import rules. However, they can
-serve a couple of purposes in matching records. First, match checks can
-be used as the matching criteria instead of the match points if your
-indexes are stale and out of date. The match checks go right for the
-data instead of relying on the data in the indexes. (If you fear your
-indexes are out of date, a rebuild of your indexes would be a great idea
-and solve that situation!) The other use for a Match Check is as a
-âdouble checkâ or âvetoâ of your matching rule. For example, if you have
-a matching rule as below:
-
-Threshold of 1000
-
-Match Point on 020$a 1000
-
-Match Check on 245$a
-
-Koha will first look at the 020$a tag/subfield to see if the incoming
-record matches an existing record. If it does, it will then move on to
-the Match Check and look directly at the 245$a value in the incoming
-data and compare it to the 245$a in the existing âmatchedâ record in
-your catalog. If the 245$a matches, Koha continues on as if a match was
-successful. If the 245$a does not match, then Koha concludes that the
-two records are not a match after all. The Match Checks can be a really
-useful tool in confirming true matches.
-
-When looking to create matching rules for your authority records the
-following indexes will be of use:
-
-+--------------------------+--------------------+
-| Index name | Matches Marc Tag |
-+==========================+====================+
-| LC-cardnumber | 010$a |
-+--------------------------+--------------------+
-| Personal-name | 100$a |
-+--------------------------+--------------------+
-| Corporate-name-heading | 110$a |
-+--------------------------+--------------------+
-| Meeting-name | 111$a |
-+--------------------------+--------------------+
-| Title-uniform | 130$a |
-+--------------------------+--------------------+
-| Chronological-term | 148$a |
-+--------------------------+--------------------+
-| Subject-topical | 150$a |
-+--------------------------+--------------------+
-| Name-geographic | 151$a |
-+--------------------------+--------------------+
-| Term-genre-form | 155$a |
-+--------------------------+--------------------+
-
-Table: Authority Indexes
-
-`Adding Matching Rules <#addrecordmatchrule>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-To create a new matching rule :
-
-- Click 'New Record Matching Rule'
-
- Add record matching rule
- |image209|
-
- - Choose a unique name and enter it in the 'Matching rule code'
- field
-
- - 'Description' can be anything you want to make it clear to you
- what rule you're picking
-
- - 'Match threshold' is the total number of 'points' a biblio must
- earn to be considered a 'match'
-
- - 'Record type' is the type of import this rule will be used for -
- either authority or bibliographic
-
- - Match points are set up to determine what fields to match on
-
- - 'Search index' can be found by looking at the ccl.properties file
- on your system which tells the zebra indexing what data to search
- for in the MARC data".
-
- - 'Score' - The number of 'points' a match on this field is worth.
- If the sum of each score is greater than the match threshold, the
- incoming record is a match to the existing record
-
- - Enter the MARC tag you want to match on in the 'Tag' field
-
- - Enter the MARC tag subfield you want to match on in the
- 'Subfields' field
-
- - 'Offset' - For use with control fields, 001-009
-
- - 'Length' - For use with control fields, 001-009
-
- - Koha only has one 'Normalization rule' that removes extra
- characters such as commas and semicolons. The value you enter in
- this field is irrelevant to the normalization process.
-
- - 'Required match checks' - ??
-
-`Sample Bibliographic Record Matching Rule: Control Number <#samplerecordmatch>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-LOC Matching Rule
-|image210|
-
-- Match threshold: 100
-
-- Record type: Bibliographic
-
- - **Note**
-
- If you'd like a rule to match on the 001 in authority records
- you will need the repeat all of these values and change just
- the record type to 'Authority record'
-
-- Matchpoints (just the one):
-
-- Search index: Control-number
-
-- Score: 101
-
-- Tag: 001
-
- - **Note**
-
- this field is for the control number assigned by the
- organization creating, using, or distributing the record
-
-- Subfields: a
-
-- Offset: 0
-
-- Length: 0
-
-- Normalization rule: Control-number
-
-- Required Match checks: none (remove the blank one)
-
- Remove match check
- |image211|
-
-`OAI Sets Configuration <#oaisetsconfig>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-On this page you can create, modify and delete OAI-PMH sets
-
-`Create a set <#oaicreate>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-To create a set:
-
-- Click on the link 'Add a new set'
-
-- Fill the mandatory fields 'setSpec' and 'setName'
-
-- Then you can add descriptions for this set. To do this click on 'Add
- description' and fill the newly created text box. You can add as many
- descriptions as you want.
-
-- Click on 'Save' button'
-
-`Modify/Delete a set <#oaimodify>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-To modify a set, just click on the link 'Modify' on the same line of the
-set you want to modify. A form similar to set creation form will appear
-and allow you to modify the setSpec, setName and descriptions.
-
-To delete a set, just click on the link 'Delete' on the same line of the
-set you want to delete.
-
-`Define mappings <#oaimapping>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Here you can define how a set will be build (what records will belong to
-this set) by defining mappings. Mappings are a list of conditions on
-record content. A record only need to match one condition to belong to
-the set.
-
-- Fill the fields 'Field', 'Subfield' and 'Value'. For example if you
- want to include in this set all records that have a 999$9 equal to
- 'XXX'. Fill 'Field' with 999, 'Subfield' with 9 and 'Value' with XXX.
-
-- If you want to add another condition, click on 'OR' button and repeat
- step 1.
-
-- Click on 'Save'
-
-To delete a condition, just leave at least one of 'Field', 'Subfield' or
-'Value' empty and click on 'Save'.
-
- **Note**
-
- Actually, a condition is true if value in the corresponding subfield
- is strictly equal to what is defined if 'Value'. A record having
- 999$9 = 'XXX YYY' will not belong to a set where condition is 999$9
- = 'XXX'.
-
-And it is case sensitive : a record having 999$9 = 'xxx' will not belong
-to a set where condition is 999$9 = 'XXX'.
-
-`Build sets <#oaibuild>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Once you have configured all your sets, you have to build the sets. This
-is done by calling the script misc/migration\_tools/build\_oai\_sets.pl.
-
-`Item search fields <#itemsearchadmin>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-From here you can add custom search fields to the `item
-search <#searchguide-itemsearch>`__ option in the staff client. Item
-search fields
-
-To add a new search term simply click the 'New search field' buttonAdd
-new field
-
-- Name is a field for you to identify the search term
-
-- Label is what will appear on the item search page
-
-- MARC field allows you to pick which field you'd like to search in
-
-- MARC subfield is the subfield you'd like to search in
-
-- Authorised values category can be used to turn this search field in
- to a pull down instead of a free text field
-
-Once your new field is added it will be visible at the top of this page
-and on the item search pageSearch option
-
-`Acquisitions <#acqadmin>`__
-----------------------------
-
-The Koha Acquisitions module provides a way for the library to record
-orders placed with vendors and manage purchase budgets.
-
-Before using the `Acquisitions Module <#acqmodule>`__, you will want to
-make sure that you have completed all of the set up.
-
-- *Get there:* More > Administration > Acquisitions
-
-`Currencies and Exchange Rates <#currexchangeadmin>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-If you place orders from more than one country you will want to input
-currency exchange rates so that your acquisitions module will properly
-calculate totals.
-
-- *Get there:* More > Administration > Acquisitions > Currencies and
- Exchange Rates
-
-Currencies
-|image212|
-
- **Note**
-
- This data is not automatically updated, so be sure to keep it up to
- date so that your accounting is kept correct.
-
-The ISO code you enter will be used when importing MARC files via the
-staging tools, the tool will attempt to find and use the price of the
-currently active currency.
-
-The active currency is the main currency you use in your library. Your
-active currency will have a check mark in the 'Active' column. If you
-don't have an active currency you will see an error message telling you
-to choose an active currency.
-
-No active currency warning
-|image213|
-
-`Budgets <#budgetplanning>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Budgets are used for tracking accounting values related to acquisitions.
-For example you could create a Budget for the current year (ex. 2015)
-and then break that into `Funds <#funds>`__ for different areas of the
-library (ex. Books, Audio, etc).
-
-- *Get there:* More > Administration > Acquisitions > Budgets
-
-When visiting the main budget administration you will see two tabs, one
-for active and one for inactive budgets.
-
-Budgets List
-|image214|
-
-`Adding budgets <#addbudget>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Budgets can either be created `from scratch <#addnewbudget>`__, by
-`duplicating the previous year's budget <#duplicatebudget>`__ or by
-`closing a previous year's budget <#closebudget>`__.
-
-`Add a new budget <#addnewbudget>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-If you haven't used Koha before for acquisitions then you'll need to
-start fresh with a new budget. To add a new budget click the 'New
-Budget' button.
-
-New Budget Form
-|image215|
-
-- Choose the time period this budget is for, whether it's an academic
- year, a fiscal year, a quarter, etc.
-
-- The Description should be something that will help you identify the
- budget when ordering
-
-- In the amount box do not use any symbols, simply enter the amount of
- the budget with numbers and decimals.
-
-- Marking a budget active makes it usable when placing orders in the
- acquisitions module, even if the order is placed after the budget end
- date. This will allow you to record orders that were places in a
- previous budget period.
-
-- Locking a budget means that Funds will not be able to be modified by
- librarians
-
-Once you have made your edits, click the 'Save Changes' button. You will
-be brought to a list of your existing budgets.
-
-List of Budgets
-|image216|
-
-`Duplicate a budget <#duplicatebudget>`__
-'''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-To duplicate a budget from a previous year, click on the link for the
-budget name from the list of budgets
-
-Budgets List
-|image217|
-
-On the screen listing the budget breakdown click the Edit button at the
-top and choose to Duplicate budget
-
-Duplicate Budget
-|image218|
-
-You can also click the 'Actions' button to the right of the budget and
-choose 'Duplicate'.Duplicate budget
-
-In both cases you will be presented with a form where you simply need to
-enter the new start and end date and save the budget.
-
-New Duplicate Budget
-|image219|
-
-Check the box for 'Mark the original budget as inactive' if the original
-budget should no longer be used.
-
-Check the box for 'Set all funds to zero' if you wish the new budget to
-contain all the same fund structures as the previous budget but no
-allocations until you manually enter an amount in the fund.
-
-This will not only duplicate your budget, but all of the funds
-associated with that budget so that you can reuse budgets and funds from
-year to year and so that you can move unreceived orders and if desired
-unspent funds from a previous budget to the new budget.
-
-`Close a budget <#closebudget>`__
-'''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Close a budget to move or roll over unreceived orders and if desired
-unspent funds from a previous budget to a new budget. Before closing
-your budget you might want to `duplicate the previous year's
-budget <#duplicatebudget>`__ so that you have somewhere for the
-unreceived orders to roll to.
-
-Find the previous budget with unreceived orders on the Active budgets or
-the Inactive budgets tab and select 'Close' under 'Actions'. Close a
-budget
-
- **Note**
-
- In order for the unreceived orders to be automatically moved to the
- new budget, the fund structures in the previous budget must exist in
- the new budget. Budgets without unreceived orders cannot be closed.
-
-When you select 'Close' you will be presented with a form.Closing a
-budget
-
-Use the 'Select a budget' drop down to choose the new budget for the
-unreceived orders.
-
-Check the box for 'Move remaining unspent funds' to move the unspent
-amounts from the funds of the budget being closed to the selected
-budget.
-
-Once you have made your choices, click the 'Move unreceived orders'
-button. You will be presented with a dialog box that says 'You have
-chosen to move all unreceived orders from 'Budget X' to 'Budget Y'. This
-action cannot be reversed. Do you wish to continue?' Budget X is the
-budget to be closed and Budget Y is the selected budget. Close warning
-
-If everything seems correct click 'OK' and the unreceived orders and, if
-selected, unspent funds will be moved.
-
-Wait until the 'Report after moving unreceived orders from budget X to
-Y' displays. This will list the order numbers which have been impacted
-(grouped by fund) and detail if the unreceived order was moved or if
-there was a problem. For example, if the new budget does not contain a
-fund with the same name as the previous budget, the order will not be
-moved.
-
-Close report
-|image220|
-
-`Funds <#funds>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Administration > Acquisitions > Funds
-
-`Add a Fund <#addbudgetfund>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-A fund is added to a budget.
-
- **Important**
-
- A `budget <#addbudget>`__ must be defined before a fund can be
- created.
-
-To add a new fund click the New button and then choose which Budget you
-would like to add the fund to.
-
-Choose which budget to add a fund to
-|image221|
-
-In the form that appears you want to enter the basics about your fund.
-
-New Fund Form
-|image222|
-
-The three first fields are required, the rest are optional
-
-- Fund Code is a unique identifier for your fund
-
-- The Fund Name should be something that librarians will understand
-
-- Amount should be entered with only numbers and decimals, no other
- characters
-
-- Warning at (%) or Warning at (amount) can be filled in to make Koha
- warn you before you spend a certain percentage or amount of your
- budget. This will prevent you from overspending.
-
-- You can choose to assign this fund to a librarian. Doing so will make
- it so that only that librarian can make changes to the Fund
-
-- Choose which library will be using this fund
-
-- You can restrict who can order from this fund by choosing either the
- 'owner', 'owner and users' or 'owner, users and library' from the
- 'Restrict access to' menu
-
- Restrict Fund Access
- |image223|
-
- - **Important**
-
- Without an owner, the access restriction will be ignored, be
- sure to enter an owner as well as choose a restriction
-
-- Notes are simply for any descriptive notes you might want to add so
- that librarians know when to use this fund
-
-- Planning categories are used for statistical purposes. To learn more
- about planning categories, check out the `Planning Category
- FAQ <#planningcatfaq>`__.
-
-When complete, click 'Submit' and you will be brought to a list of all
-of the funds for the budget.
-
-List of funds
-|image224|
-
-The monetary columns in the fund table break down as follows:
-
-1. Base-level allocated is the "Amount" value you defined when creating
- the fund
-
-2. Base-level ordered is the ordered amount for this fund (without child
- funds)
-
-3. Total ordered is the base-level ordered for this fund and all its
- child funds
-
-4. Base-level spent is the spent amount for this fund (without child
- funds)
-
-5. Total spent is the base-level spent for this fund and all its child
- funds
-
-6. Base-level available is 1 - 2
-
-7. Total available is 1 - 3
-
-To the right of each fund you will find the 'Actions' button under which
-you will find the 'Edit,' 'Delete,' and 'Add Child Fund' options.
-
-Fund actions
-|image225|
-
-A child fund simply a sub-fund of the fund listed. An example would be
-to have a fund for 'Fiction' and under that have a fund for 'New
-Releases' and a fund for 'Science Fiction.' It is an optional way to
-further organize your finances.
-
-Funds with children will show with a small arrow to the left. Clicking
-that will show you the children funds.
-
-Child funds
-|image226|
-
-`Budget Planning <#fundsplanning>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-When viewing the list of funds click the 'Planning' button and choose
-how you would like to plan to spend your budget.
-
-Planning pull down menu
-|image227|
-
-If you choose 'Plan by MONTHS' you will see the budgeted amount broken
-down by months:
-
-Budget Planning Formula
-|image228|
-
-To hide some of the columns you can click the 'hide' link to the right
-(or below as in the screenshot above) the dates. To add more columns you
-can click the 'Show a column' link found below the 'Fund Remaining'
-heading.
-
-Choose columns to add
-|image229|
-
-From here you can plan your budget spending by manually entering values
-or by clicking the 'Auto-fill row' button. If you choose to auto-fill
-the form the system will try to divide the amount accordingly, you may
-have to make some edits to split things more accurately.
-
-Auto-filled columns
-|image230|
-
-Once your changes are made, click the 'Save' button. If you would like
-to export your data as a CSV file you can do so by entering a file name
-in the 'Output to a file named' field and clicking the 'Output' button.
-
-Export planning as CSV
-|image231|
-
-`EDI Accounts <#ediaccounts>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-From here you can set up the information needed to connect to your
-acquisitions vendors.
-
- **Note**
-
- Before you begin you will need at least one `Vendor set up in
- Acquisitions <#addacqvendor>`__.
-
-To add account information click the 'New account' button.New account
-
-In the form that appears you will want to enter your vendor information.
-
-New account information
-
-Each vendor will have one account.
-
-`Library EANs <#libraryeans>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-A library EAN is the identifier the vendor gives the library to send
-back to them so they know which account to use when billing. One EDI
-account can have multiple EANs.
-
-To add an EAN click the 'New EAN' button.
-
-New EAN
-
-In the form that appears enter the information provided by your vendor.
-
-New EAN Form
-
-`Additional Parameters <#additionaladmin>`__
---------------------------------------------
-
-- *Get there:* More > Administration > Additional Parameters
-
-`Z39.50/SRU servers <#z3950admin>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Z39.50 is a clientâserver protocol for searching and retrieving
-information from remote computer databases, in short it's a tool used
-for copy cataloging.
-
-SRU- Search/Retrieve via URL - is a standard XML-based protocol for
-search queries, utilizing CQL - Contextual Query Language - a standard
-syntax for representing queries.
-
-Using Koha you can connect to any Z39.50 or SRU target that is publicly
-available or that you have the log in information to and copy both
-bibliographic and/or authority records from that source.
-
-- *Get there:* More > Administration > Additional Parameters >
- Z39.50/SRU Servers
-
-Koha comes with a default list of Z39.50/SRU targets set up that you can
-add to, edit or delete
-
-List of Z39.50 Servers in Koha
-|image232|
-
-To find additional Z39.50 targets you use IndexData's IRSpy:
-`http://irspy.indexdata.com `__ or the
-Library of Congress's List of Targets http://www.loc.gov/z3950/
-
-`Add a Z39.50 Target <#addztarget>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-- From the main Z39.50 page, click 'New Z39.50 Server'
-
- New Z39.50 Server Form
- |image233|
-
- - 'Z39.50 server' should be populated with a name that will help you
- identify the source (such as the library name).
-
- - 'Hostname' will be the address to the Z39.50 target.
-
- - 'Port' tells Koha what port to listen on to get results from this
- target.
-
- - 'Userid' and 'Password' are only required for servers that are
- password protected.
-
- - Check the 'Preselected' box if you want this target to always be
- selected by default.
-
- - 'Rank' lets you enter where in the list you'd like this target to
- appear.
-
- - If this is left blank the targets will be in alphabetical
- order.
-
- - 'Syntax' is the MARC flavor you use.
-
- - 'Encoding' tells the system how to read special characters.
-
- - 'Timeout' is helpful for targets that take a long while. You can
- set the timeout so that it doesn't keep trying the target if
- results aren't found in a reasonable amount of time.
-
- - 'Record type' lets you define if this is a bibliographic or an
- authority target.
-
- - 'XSLT file(s)' lets enter one or more (comma-separated) XSLT file
- names that you want to apply on the search results.
-
- - When retrieving records from external targets you may wish to
- automate some changes to those records. XSLT's allow you to do
- this. Koha ships with some sample XSLT files in the
- /koha-tmpl/intranet-tmpl/prog/en/xslt/ directory ready for use:
-
- - Del952.xsl: Remove items (MARC21/NORMARC)
-
- - Del995.xsl: Remove items (UNIMARC)
-
- - Del9LinksExcept952.xsl: Remove $9 links. Skip item fields
- (MARC21/NORMARC)
-
- - Del9LinksExcept995.xsl: Remove $9 links. Skip item fields
- (UNIMARC)
-
-`Suggested Bibliographic Z39.50 Targets <#suggestztarget>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Koha libraries with open Z39.50 targets can share and find connection
-information on the Koha wiki:
-http://wiki.koha-community.org/wiki/Koha_Open_Z39.50_Sources. You can
-also find open Z39.50 targets by visiting IRSpy:
-http://irspy.indexdata.com.
-
-The following targets have been used successfully by other Koha
-libraries (in the Americas):
-
-- ACCESS PENNSYLVANIA 205.247.101.11:210 INNOPAC
-
-- CUYAHOGA COUNTY PUBLIC webcat.cuyahoga.lib.oh.us:210 INNOPAC
-
-- GREATER SUDBURY PUBLIC 216.223.90.51:210 INNOPAC
-
-- HALIFAX PUBLIC catalogue.halifaxpubliclibraries.ca:210 horizon
-
-- HALTON HILLS PUBLIC cat.hhpl.on.ca:210 halton\_hills
-
-- LIBRARY OF CONGRESS lx2.loc.gov: 210 LCDB
-
-- LONDON PUBLIC LIBRARY catalogue.londonpubliclibrary.ca:210 INNOPAC
-
-- MANITOBA PUBLIC library.gov.mb.ca:210 horizon
-
-- MILTON PL cat.mpl.on.ca:210 horizon
-
-- NATIONAL LIBRARY OF WALES cat.llgc.org.uk:210 default
-
-- NHUPAC 199.192.6.130:211 nh\_nhupac
-
-- OCEAN STATE LIBRARIES (RI) catalog.oslri.net:210 INNOPAC
-
-- OHIOLINK olc1.ohiolink.edu:210 INNOPAC
-
-- PUBCAT prod890.dol.state.vt.us:2300 unicorn
-
-- SAN JOAQUIN VALLEY PUBLIC LIBRARY SYSTEM (CA) hip1.sjvls.org:210
- ZSERVER
-
-- SEATTLE PUBLIC LIBRARY ZSERVER.SPL.ORG:210 HORIZON
-
-- TORONTO PUBLIC symphony.torontopubliclibrary.ca:2200 unicorn
-
-- TRI-UNI 129.97.129.194:7090 voyager
-
-- VANCOUVER PUBLIC LIBRARY z3950.vpl.ca:210 Horizon
-
-`Suggested Authority Z39.50 Targets <#suggestauthz39>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-The following targets have been used successfully by other Koha
-libraries (in the Americas):
-
-- LIBRARIESAUSTRALIA AUTHORITIES
- z3950-test.librariesaustralia.nla.gov.au:210 AuthTraining Userid:
- ANLEZ / Password: z39.50
-
-- LIBRARY OF CONGRESS NAME AUTHORITIES lx2.loc.gov:210 NAF
-
-- LIBRARY OF CONGRESS SUBJECT AUTHORITIES lx2.loc.gov:210 SAF
-
-`Add a SRU Target <#addsru>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-- From the main Z39.50/SRU page, click 'New SRU Server'
-
- New SRU Server Form
- |image234|
-
- - 'Server name' should be populated with a name that will help you
- identify the source (such as the library name).
-
- - 'Hostname' will be the address to the Z39.50 target.
-
- - 'Port' tells Koha what port to listen on to get results from this
- target.
-
- - 'Userid' and 'Password' are only required for servers that are
- password protected.
-
- - Check the 'Preselected' box if you want this target to always be
- selected by default.
-
- - 'Rank' lets you enter where in the list you'd like this target to
- appear.
-
- - If this is left blank the targets will be in alphabetical
- order.
-
- - 'Syntax' is the MARC flavor you use.
-
- - 'Encoding' tells the system how to read special characters.
-
- - 'Timeout' is helpful for targets that take a long while. You can
- set the timeout so that it doesn't keep trying the target if
- results aren't found in a reasonable amount of time.
-
- - 'Additional SRU options' is where you can enter additional options
- of the external server here, like sru\_version=1.1 or
- schema=marc21, etc. Note that these options are server dependent.
-
- - 'SRU Search field mapping' lets you add or update the mapping from
- the available fields on the Koha search form to the specific
- server dependent index names.
-
- - To further refine your searches, you could add the following
- index names to the SRU search field mappings. To do this, edit
- the server and click the Modify button next to this field.
-
- +---------------+---------------------------+
- | Title | dc.title |
- +---------------+---------------------------+
- | ISBN | bath.isbn |
- +---------------+---------------------------+
- | Any | cql.anywhere |
- +---------------+---------------------------+
- | Author | dc.author |
- +---------------+---------------------------+
- | ISSN | bath.issn |
- +---------------+---------------------------+
- | Subject | dc.subject |
- +---------------+---------------------------+
- | Standard ID | bath.standardIdentifier |
- +---------------+---------------------------+
-
- Table: SRU Mapping
-
- - 'XSLT file(s)' lets enter one or more (comma-separated) XSLT file
- names that you want to apply on the search results.
-
- - When retrieving records from external targets you may wish to
- automate some changes to those records. XSLT's allow you to do
- this. Koha ships with some sample XSLT files in the
- /koha-tmpl/intranet-tmpl/prog/en/xslt/ directory ready for use:
-
- - Del952.xsl: Remove items (MARC21/NORMARC)
-
- - Del995.xsl: Remove items (UNIMARC)
-
- - Del9LinksExcept952.xsl: Remove $9 links. Skip item fields
- (MARC21/NORMARC)
-
- - Del9LinksExcept995.xsl: Remove $9 links. Skip item fields
- (UNIMARC)
-
-`Did you mean? <#didyoumean>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-*Get there:* More > Administration > Additional Parameters > Did you
-mean?
-
-Koha can offer 'Did you mean?' options on searches based on values in
-your `authorities <#catauthorities>`__.
-
- **Important**
-
- Did you mean? only works in the OPAC at this time. The Intranet
- options are here for future development.
-
-Using this page you can control which options Koha gives patrons on
-their search results.
-
-Did you mean?
-|image235|
-
-To turn on the 'Did you mean?' bar on your search results you need to
-check the box next to each plugin you would like to use. The two plugins
-you have to choose from are:
-
-- The ExplodedTerms plugin suggests that the user try searching for
- broader/narrower/related terms for a given search (e.g. a user
- searching for "New York (State)" would click the link for narrower
- terms if they're also interested in "New York (City)"). This is only
- relevant for libraries with highly hierarchical authority data.
-
-- The AuthorityFile plugin searches the authority file and suggests the
- user might be interested in bibs linked to the top 5 authorities
-
-If you want one plugin to take priority over another you simply drag it
-above the other.
-
-Drag and drop options
-|image236|
-
-If you choose both plugins you will see several options at the top of
-your search results
-
-Both plugins
-|image237|
-
-If you choose just the AuthorityFile you'll see just authorities.
-
-AuthorityFile
-|image238|
-
-`Column settings <#admincolumns>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-This administration area will help you hide or display columns on fixed
-tables throughout the staff client.
-
-- *Get there:* Administration > Additional Parameters > Column settings
-
-Column settings
-|image239|
-
-Clicking on the module you'd like to edit tables for will show you the
-options available to you.
-
-This area lets you control the columns that show in the table in
-question. If nothing is hidden you will see no check marks in the 'is
-hidden by default' column.
-
-Column settings
-|image240|
-
-And will see all of the columns when viewing the table on its regular
-page.
-
-Columns on currency table
-|image241|
-
-If columns are hidden they will have checks in the 'is hidden by
-default' column.
-
-Column settings
-|image242|
-
-And hidden when you view the table.
-
-Columns on currency table
-|image243|
-
-You can also toggle columns using the 'Show/Hide Columns button in the
-top right of the page
-
-Toggle columns
-|image244|
-
-`Audio alerts <#audioadmin>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-If you have your `AudioAlerts <#AudioAlerts>`__ preference set to
-'Enable' you will be able to control the various alert sounds that Koha
-uses from this area.
-
-- *Get there:* More > Administration > Additional Parameters > Audio
- alerts
-
-Each dialog box in Koha has a CSS class assigned to it that can be used
-as a selector for a sound.Audio alerts
-
-You can edit the defaults by clicking the 'Edit' button to the right of
-each alertEdit alert
-
-You can assign alerts to other CSS classes in Koha by entering that
-information in the selector box. For example if you enter
-
-::
-
- body:contains('Check in message')
-
-Then when you visit the checkin page you will hear an alert.
-
-Every page in Koha has a unique ID in the body tag which can be used to
-limit a sound to a specific page
-
-Any ID selector (where html contains id="name\_of\_id" ) and can also be
-a trigger as: #name\_of\_selector
-
-`SMS cellular providers <#smsadmin>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
- **Important**
-
- This option will only appear if the
- `SMSSendDriver <#SMSSendDriver>`__ preference is set to 'Email'
-
-From here you can enter as many cellular providers as you need to send
-SMS notices to your patrons using the email protocol.SMS Providers
-
-Some examples in the US are:
-
-+---------------------+-----------------------------+
-| Mobile Carrier | SMS Gateway Domain |
-+=====================+=============================+
-| Alltel | sms.alltelwireless.com |
-+---------------------+-----------------------------+
-| AT&T | txt.att.net |
-+---------------------+-----------------------------+
-| Boost Mobile | sms.myboostmobile.com |
-+---------------------+-----------------------------+
-| Project Fi | msg.fi.google.com |
-+---------------------+-----------------------------+
-| Republic Wireless | text.republicwireless.com |
-+---------------------+-----------------------------+
-| Sprint | messaging.sprintpcs.com |
-+---------------------+-----------------------------+
-| T-Mobile | tmomail.net |
-+---------------------+-----------------------------+
-| U.S. Cellular | email.uscc.net |
-+---------------------+-----------------------------+
-| Verizon Wireless | vtext.com |
-+---------------------+-----------------------------+
-| Virgin Mobile | vmobl.com |
-+---------------------+-----------------------------+
-
-Table: SMS Provider Examples
-
-To add new providers enter the details in the form and click 'Add new'
-to save.Add SMS Provider
-
-These options will appear in the OPAC for patrons to choose from on the
-`messaging tab <#opacmymsgs>`__ if you have
-`EnhancedMessagingPreferences <#EnhancedMessagingPreferences>`__
-enabled.Options for providers in the OPAC
-
-Tools
-=====
-
-Tools in Koha all perform some sort of action. Often many of the items
-listed under Tools in Koha are referred to as 'Reports' in other library
-management systems.
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools
-
-`Patrons and Circulation <#patrontools>`__
-------------------------------------------
-
-`Patron lists <#patronlists>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Patrons and Circulation > Patron lists
-
-Patron lists are a way to store a group of patrons for easy modification
-via the `batch patron modification tool <#batchpatronmod>`__ or
-reporting.
-
-Patron lists
-|image245|
-
-To create a new list of patrons click the 'New patron list' button
-
-New patron list
-|image246|
-
-Enter a list name and save the list.
-
-Empty patron list
-|image247|
-
-Each list has an 'Actions' menu with more list options.Patron list
-actions
-
-To add patrons to the list click the 'Add patrons' link in the 'Actions'
-menu.
-
-Add patron to a list
-|image248|
-
-Enter the patron's name or cardnumber in the search box and click on the
-right result to add the patron.
-
-Patrons to add
-|image249|
-
-Once you have all of the patrons you would like to add you can click the
-'Add patrons' button to save them to the list.
-
-List of patrons
-|image250|
-
-`Comments <#comments>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Patrons and Circulation > Comments
-
-All comments added by patrons via the OPAC to bibliographic records
-require moderation by the librarians. If there are comments awaiting
-moderation they will be listed on the main page of the staff client
-below the module list:
-
-Comments pending approval
-|image251|
-
-and next to the Comments tool on the Tools ModuleComment count on Tools
-
-To moderate comments click on the notification on the main dashboard or
-go directly to the Comments Tool and click 'Approve' or 'Delete' to the
-right of the comments awaiting moderation.
-
-Comment awaiting moderation
-|image252|
-
-If there are no comments to moderate you will see a message saying just
-that
-
-No comments to moderate
-|image253|
-
-You can also review and unapprove comments you have approved in the past
-by choosing the 'Approved comments' tab
-
-Approved comments
-|image254|
-
-`Patron Import <#patronimport>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Patrons and Circulation > Import Patrons
-
-The patron import tool can be used at any time to add patrons in bulk.
-It is commonly used in universities and schools when a new batch of
-students registers.
-
-`Creating Patron File <#createpatronfile>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Your Koha installation comes with a blank CSV file that you can use as a
-template for your patron records. If you would like to create the file
-yourself, make sure that your file has the following fields in this
-order as the header row:
-
-cardnumber, surname, firstname, title, othernames, initials,
-streetnumber, streettype, address, address2, city, state, zipcode,
-country, email, phone, mobile, fax, emailpro, phonepro, B\_streetnumber,
-B\_streettype, B\_address, B\_address2, B\_city, B\_state, B\_zipcode,
-B\_country, B\_email, B\_phone, dateofbirth, branchcode, categorycode,
-dateenrolled, dateexpiry, gonenoaddress, lost, debarred,
-debarredcomment, contactname, contactfirstname, contacttitle,
-guarantorid, borrowernotes, relationship, ethnicity, ethnotes, sex,
-password, flags, userid, opacnote, contactnote, sort1, sort2,
-altcontactfirstname, altcontactsurname, altcontactaddress1,
-altcontactaddress2, altcontactaddress3, altcontactstate,
-altcontactzipcode, altcontactcountry, altcontactphone, smsalertnumber,
-privacy, patron\_attributes
-
- **Important**
-
- The 'password' should be stored in plaintext, and will be converted
- to a Bcrypt hash.
-
- If your passwords are already encrypted, talk to your systems
- administrator about options
-
- **Important**
-
- Date formats should match your `system preference <#dateformat>`__,
- and must be zero-padded, e.g. '01/02/2008'.
-
- **Important**
-
- The fields 'branchcode', 'categorycode' and all fields you have
- defined in the `BorrowerMandatoryField <#BorrowerMandatoryField>`__
- preference are required and must match valid entries in your
- database.
-
- **Note**
-
- If loading `patron attributes <#patronattributetypes>`__, the
- 'patron\_attributes' field should contain a comma-separated list of
- attribute types and values.
-
- - The attribute type code and a colon should precede each value.
-
- - For example: "INSTID:12345,BASEBALL:Cubs"
-
- - This field must be wrapped in quotes if multiple values are
- defined.
-
- - Since values can contain spaces, additional doubled-quotes may
- be required:
-
- - "INSTID:12345,BASEBALL:Cubs,""BASEBALL:White Sox"""
-
- - When replacing a patron record, any attributes specified in
- the input file replace all of the attribute values of any type
- that were previously assigned to the patron record.
-
-`Importing Patrons <#importpatrons>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Once you have created your file, you can use the Patron Import Tool to
-bring the data into Koha.
-
-- Choose your CSV file
-
- Import Patron Form
- |image255|
-
-- Choose to match on 'Cardnumber' or 'Username' to prevent adding of
- duplicate card numbers to the system
-
- Patron match options
- |image256|
-
-- Next you can choose default values to apply to all patrons you are
- importing
-
- - ex. If you're importing patrons specific to one branch you can use
- the field on the Import form to apply the branch code to all those
- you are importing.
-
-- Finally you need to decide on what data you want to replace if there
- are duplicates.
-
- If match found
- |image257|
-
- - A matching record is found using the field you chose for matching
- criteria to prevent duplication
-
- - If you included patron attributes in your file you can decide
- whether to add your values to existing values or erase existing
- values and enter only your new values.
-
-`Notices & Slips <#notices>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Patrons and Circulation > Notices & Slips
-
-All notices and circulation receipts (or slips) generated by Koha can be
-customized using the Notices & Slips Tool. The system comes with several
-predefined templates that will appear when you first visit this tool.
-
-Notices & Slips Tool
-|image258|
-
-Each notice can be edited, but only a few can be deleted, this is to
-prevent system errors should a message try to send without a template.
-Each notice and slip can be edited on a per library basis, by default
-you will see the notices for all libraries.
-
-If you have a style you'd like applied to all slips you can point the
-`SlipCSS <#SlipCSS>`__ preference to a stylesheet. The same is true for
-notices, using the `NoticeCSS <#NoticeCSS>`__ preference to define a
-stylesheet.
-
-You will also want to review the `Notices & Slips Field
-Guide <#noticesfieldguide>`__ for more information on formatting these
-notices.
-
-`Adding Notices & Slips <#addnotices>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-To add a new notice or slip
-
-- Click 'New Notice'
-
- New Notice Form
- |image259|
-
-- Choose which library this notice or slip is for
-
- - **Important**
-
- Not all notices can be branch specific for more information
- review the `Notices & Slips Field
- Guide <#noticesfieldguide>`__ in this manual.
-
-- Choose the module this notice is related to
-
-- The Code is limited to 20 characters
-
- - **Important**
-
- When working with the overdue notices you want each notice at
- each branch to have a unique code. Think about using the
- branch code in front of the notice code for each branch.
-
-- Use the name field to expand on your Code
-
- - **Note**
-
- With overdue notices, be sure to put your branch name in the
- description as well so that it will be visible when setting up
- your `triggers <#noticetriggers>`__.
-
-- Next you can customize the notice for every possible delivery method
-
- - Every notice should have an Email template set for itNew Email
- notice
-
- - If you're using the
- `TalkingTechItivaPhoneNotification <#TalkingTechItivaPhoneNotification>`__
- service you can set up a Phone notificationNew Phone notice
-
- - If you plan on printing this notice you can set the Print template
- nextNew Print notice
-
- - If you have enabled SMS notices with the
- `SMSSendDriver <#SMSSendDriver>`__ preference you can set the text
- for your SMS notices nextNew SMS notice
-
-- Each notice offers you the same options
-
- - If you plan on writing the notice or slip in HTML check the 'HTML
- Message' box, otherwise the content will be generated as plain
- text
-
- - Message Subject is what will appear in the subject line of the
- email
-
- - In the message body feel free to type whatever message you feel is
- best, use the fields on the left hand side to enter individualized
- data from the from database.
-
- - **Note**
-
- Review the `Notices & Slip Field
- Guide <#noticesfieldguide>`__ for info on what fields can
- be used here.
-
- - **Important**
-
- Overdue notices can use <> tags by
- themselves, or use to span all of the tags.
- Learn more about the `Overdue Notice
- Markup <#noticemarkup>`__
-
- - On overdue notices make sure to use <>
- tags to print out the data related to all items that are
- overdue.
-
- - The other option, only for overdue notices, is to use
- the tags to span the line so that it will
- print out multiple lines One example for the
- tag option is:
-
- "<>" by <>,
- <>, Barcode: <> ,
- Checkout date: <>, Due date:
- <> Fine: <> Due date:
- <>
-
- - **Important**
-
- Only the overdue notices take advantage of the
- tags, all other notices referencing items
- need to use <>
-
- - **Note**
-
- To add today's date you can use the <> syntax
-
- - **Note**
-
- If you don't want to print the patron's full name on your
- slips or notice you can enter data in the Other name or
- Initials field for each patron and use that value instead.
-
-`Overdue Notice Markup <#noticemarkup>`__
-'''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-When creating your overdue notices there are two tags in addition to the
-various database fields that you can use in your notices. You will also
-want to review the `Notices & Slips Field Guide <#noticesfieldguide>`__
-for information on formatting item information in these notices.
-
- **Important**
-
- These new tags only work on the overdue notices, not other
- circulation related notices at this time.
-
-These tags are and which should enclose all fields from
-the biblio, biblioitems, and items tables.
-
-An example of using these tags in a notice template might be like:
-
-::
-
- The following item(s) is/are currently overdue:
-
- "<>" by <>, <>, Barcode: <> Fine: <>
-
-Which, assuming two items were overdue, would result in a notice like:
-
-::
-
- The following item(s) is/are currently overdue:
-
- "A Short History of Western Civilization" by Harrison, John B, 909.09821 H2451, Barcode: 08030003 Fine: 3.50
- "History of Western Civilization" by Hayes, Carlton Joseph Huntley, 909.09821 H3261 v.1, Barcode: 08030004 Fine: 3.50
-
-`Existing Notices & Slips <#existingnotices>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Among the default notices are notices for several common actions within
-Koha. All of these notices can be customized by altering their text via
-the Notices & Slips tool and their style using the
-`NoticeCSS <#NoticeCSS>`__ preference to define a stylesheet. You will
-also want to review the `Notices & Slips Field
-Guide <#noticesfieldguide>`__ for information on formatting item
-information in these notices. Here are some of what those notices do:
-
-- ACCTDETAILS
-
- - Sent to patrons when their account is set up if the
- `AutoEmailOPACUser <#AutoEmailOPACUser>`__ preference is set to
- 'Send'
-
-- ACQCLAIM (Acquisition Claim)
-
- - Used in the claim acquisition module
-
- - *Get there:* More > Acquisitions > Late issues
-
-- CHECKIN
-
- - This notice is sent as the 'Check in' notice for all items that
- are checked in
-
- - This notice is used if two criteria are met:
-
- 1. The
- `EnhancedMessagingPreferences <#EnhancedMessagingPreferences>`__
- is set to 'Allow'
-
- 2. The patron has requested to receive this notice
-
- - *Get there:*\ OPAC > Login > my messaging
-
- - *Get there:*\ Staff Client > Patron Record >
- `Notices <#patnotices>`__
-
-- CHECKOUT
-
- - This notice is sent as the 'Check out' notice for all items that
- are checked out
-
- - This notice is used if two criteria are met:
-
- 1. The
- `EnhancedMessagingPreferences <#EnhancedMessagingPreferences>`__
- is set to 'Allow'
-
- 2. The patron has requested to receive this notice
-
- - *Get there:*\ OPAC > Login > my messaging
-
- - *Get there:*\ Staff Client > Patron Record >
- `Notices <#patnotices>`__
-
-- DUE
-
- - This notice is sent as the 'Item due' for an item is due
-
- - This notice is used if two criteria are met:
-
- 1. The
- `EnhancedMessagingPreferences <#EnhancedMessagingPreferences>`__
- is set to 'Allow'
-
- 2. The patron has requested to receive this notice
-
- - *Get there:*\ OPAC > Login > my messaging
-
- - *Get there:*\ Staff Client > Patron Record >
- `Notices <#patnotices>`__
-
-- DUEDGST
-
- - This notice is sent as the 'Item due' for all items that are due
-
- - This notice is used if two criteria are met:
-
- 1. The
- `EnhancedMessagingPreferences <#EnhancedMessagingPreferences>`__
- is set to 'Allow'
-
- 2. The patron has requested to receive this notice as a digest
-
- - *Get there:*\ OPAC > Login > my messaging
-
- - *Get there:*\ Staff Client > Patron Record >
- `Notices <#patnotices>`__
-
-- HOLD (Hold Available for Pickup)
-
- - This notice is used if two criteria are met:
-
- 1. The
- `EnhancedMessagingPreferences <#EnhancedMessagingPreferences>`__
- is set to 'Allow'
-
- 2. The patron has requested to receive this notice
-
- - *Get there:*\ OPAC > Login > my messaging
-
- - *Get there:*\ Staff Client > Patron Record >
- `Notices <#patnotices>`__
-
- - When this notice references the branches table it is referring to
- the pickup branch information.
-
-- HOLDPLACED (a notice to the library staff that a hold has been
- placed)
-
- - This notice requires the
- `emailLibrarianWhenHoldIsPlaced <#emailLibrarianWhenHoldIsPlaced>`__
- system preference to be set to 'Enable'
-
- - When this notice references the branches table it is referring to
- the pickup branch information.
-
-- MEMBERSHIP\_EXPIRY
-
- - This notice can be sent to patrons to warn them that their cards
- are expiring soon.
-
- - Requires that you have the
- `MembershipExpiryDaysNotice <#MembershipExpiryDaysNotice>`__ set
- and the `related cron job <#patronexpirycron>`__ set.
-
-- ODUE (Overdue Notice)
-
- - This notice is used to send Overdue Notices to Patrons
-
- - See a `Sample Overdue Notice <#samplenotice>`__
-
- - Requires that you set `Overdue Notice/Status
- Triggers <#noticetriggers>`__
-
-- PREDUE
-
- - This notice is sent as the 'Advanced notice' for an item is due
-
- - This notice is used if two criteria are met:
-
- 1. The
- `EnhancedMessagingPreferences <#EnhancedMessagingPreferences>`__
- is set to 'Allow'
-
- 2. The patron has requested to receive this notice
-
- - *Get there:*\ OPAC > Login > my messaging
-
- - *Get there:*\ Staff Client > Patron Record >
- `Notices <#patnotices>`__
-
-- PREDUEDGST
-
- - This notice is sent as the 'Advanced notice' for all items that
- are due
-
- - This notice is used if two criteria are met:
-
- 1. The
- `EnhancedMessagingPreferences <#EnhancedMessagingPreferences>`__
- is set to 'Allow'
-
- 2. The patron has requested to receive this notice as a digest
-
- - *Get there:*\ OPAC > Login > my messaging
-
- - *Get there:*\ Staff Client > Patron Record >
- `Notices <#patnotices>`__
-
-- RENEWAL
-
- - This notice is sent as the 'Check out' notice for all items that
- are renewed
-
- - This notice is used if three criteria are met:
-
- 1. The
- `EnhancedMessagingPreferences <#EnhancedMessagingPreferences>`__
- is set to 'Allow'
-
- 2. The `RenewalSendNotice <#RenewalSendNotice>`__ preference is
- set to 'Send'
-
- 3. The patron has requested to receive the checkout notice
-
- - *Get there:*\ OPAC > Login > my messaging
-
- - *Get there:*\ Staff Client > Patron Record >
- `Notices <#patnotices>`__
-
-- RLIST (Routing List)
-
- - Used in the serials module to notify patrons/staff of new issues
- of a serial
-
- - *Get there:* More > Serials > `New
- Subscription <#newsubscription>`__
-
- - You have the option to select the 'Routing List' notice when
- creating a new subscription (Choose from the 'Patron notification'
- drop down).
-
- - **Note**
-
- Notice also that if you'd like to notify patrons of new serial
- issues, you can click on 'define a notice' which will take you
- to the 'Notices' tool
-
-- SHARE\_ACCEPT
-
- - Used to notify a patron when another patron has accepted their
- shared list.
-
- - Requires that you set
- `OpacAllowSharingPrivateLists <#OpacAllowSharingPrivateLists>`__
- to 'Allow'
-
-- SHARE\_INVITE
-
- - Used to notify a patron that another patron would like to share a
- list with them.
-
- - Requires that you set
- `OpacAllowSharingPrivateLists <#OpacAllowSharingPrivateLists>`__
- to 'Allow'
-
-- TO\_PROCESS
-
- - Used to notify a staff member if a purchase suggestion has been
- moved to the fund they manage
-
- - Requires the
- `notice\_unprocessed\_suggestions <#emailsuggestfund>`__ cron job
-
-There are also a set of predefined slips (or receipts) listed on this
-page. All of these slips can be customized by altering their text via
-the Notices & Slips tool and their style using the
-`SlipCSS <#SlipCSS>`__ preference to define a stylesheet. Here is what
-those slips are used for:
-
-- ISSUEQSLIP
-
- - Used to print the quick slip in circulation
-
- - The quick slip only includes items that were checked out today
-
-- ISSUESLIP
-
- - Used to print a full slip in circulation
-
- - The slip or receipt will show items checked out today as well as
- items that are still checked out
-
-- HOLD\_SLIP
-
- - Used to print a holds slip
-
- - The holds slip is generated when a hold is confirmed
-
-- TRANSFERSLIP
-
- - Used to print a transfer slip
-
- - The transfer slip is printed when you confirm a transfer from one
- branch to another in your system
-
-`Overdue Notice/Status Triggers <#noticetriggers>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Patrons and Circulation > Overdue
- Notice/Status Triggers
-
-In order to send the overdue notices that you defined using the
-`Notices <#notices>`__ tool, you need to first set the triggers to have
-these messages.
-
- **Important**
-
- In order to have overdue notices sent to your patrons, you need to
- `set that patron category <#addingpatroncat>`__ to require overdue
- notices.
-
- **Important**
-
- Depending on the value of your
- `OverdueNoticeCalendar <#OverdueNoticeCalendar>`__ preference the
- delay may or may not include days the library is closed based on the
- `holiday calendar <#calholidays>`__.
-
-The Overdue Notice/Status Triggers tool gives the librarian the power to
-send up to three notices to each patron type notifying them of overdue
-items
-
-Overdue Notice/Status Triggers Tool
-|image260|
-
-- Delay is the number of days after an issue is due before an action is
- triggered.
-
- - **Important**
-
- If you want Koha to trigger an action (send a letter or
- restrict member), a delay value is required.
-
-- To send additional notices, click on the tabs for 'Second' and
- 'Third' notice
-
-- If you would like to prevent a patron from checking items out because
- of their overdue items, check the 'Restrict' box, this will put a
- notice on the patron's record at checkout informing the librarian
- that the patron cannot check out due to overdue items.
-
- - If you choose to restrict a patron in this way you can also have
- Koha automatically remove that restriction with the
- `AutoRemoveOverduesRestrictions <#AutoRemoveOverduesRestrictions>`__
- preference.
-
-- Next you can choose the delivery method for the overdue notice. You
- can choose from Email, Phone (if you are using the `iTiva Talking
- Tech service <#TalkingTechItivaPhoneNotification>`__), Print and SMS
- (if you have set your `SMSSendDriver <#SMSSendDriver>`__).
-
- - **Note**
-
- The Feed option is not yet a feature in Koha, it is there for
- future development.
-
-- See a `Sample Overdue Notice <#samplenotice>`__
-
-`Patron Card Creator <#patroncardcreator>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Patron Card Creator
-
-The Patron Card Creator allow you to use layouts and templates which you
-design to print your custom patron cards on your printer. Here are some
-of the features of the Patron Card Creator module:
-
-- Customize patron card layouts with text retrieved from the Koha
- patron data
-
-- Design custom card templates for printed patron cards (to match the
- label sheets)
-
-- Build and manage batches of patron cards to print
-
-- Export (as PDF) single or multiple batches to print
-
-- Export (as PDF) single or multiple patron cards from within a batch
-
-`Layouts <#cardlayouts>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Patron Card Creator > Manage > Layouts
-
-A layout defines the text and images that will be printed on to the card
-and where it will appear.
-
- **Note**
-
- Up to three lines of text, the patron's number in barcode
- representation and up to two images can be printed on to the card.
-
-`Add a Layout <#addcardlayout>`__
-'''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-If you have no layouts defined, you will add a new layout by clicking
-the 'New' button and choosing 'Layout'.New layout button
-
-You may also choose to press 'Manage layout' on the left side. Here you
-are offered a list of available layouts you can select for editing. But
-at the top of the page there is still the 'New layout' button.
-
-Add New Layout
-|image261|
-
-- The name you assign to the layout is for your benefit, name it
- something that will be easy to identify at a later date
-
-- The Units pull down is used to define what measurement scale you're
- going to be using for your layout.
-
- Units of Measurement
- |image262|
-
- - **Note**
-
- A Postscript Point is 1/72" an Adobe Agate is 1/64", an Inch
- is 25.4 SI Millimeters
-
-- Next note if this layout is for the front or the back of the patron
- card
-
- - **Note**
-
- You will need a layout for both the front and back of your
- card if you have 2-sided library cards, this option doesn't
- allow you to print two sided cards, just lets you track which
- side of the card you're designing.
-
-- You have the option of adding up to 3 lines of text to your card.
- Your text can be static text of your choosing and/or fields from the
- patron record. If you want to print fields from the patron record you
- want to put the field names in brackets like so -
-
- - **Note**
-
- A full list of field names can be found in the database schema
- at http://schema.koha-community.org
-
-- For each line of text, you can choose your font, font size and the
- location of the text on the card using the lower X and Y coordinates
-
-- In order to show the barcode and the patron card number you will need
- to check the 'Print Card Number as Barcode' option. This will turn
- the patron card number into a barcode. If you want the number to
- print in human readable format you will need to check the 'Print Card
- Number as Text Under Barcode' option.
-
-- Finally you can choose up to two images to print on the card.
-
- - One can be the `patron image <#uploadpatronimages>`__ which you
- can resize to meet your needs.
-
- - The other image can be something like a library logo or symbol
- that you uploaded using the '`Manage
- Images <#managecardimages>`__' module of the Patron Card Creator
- Tool.
-
- **Important**
-
- It is the designers responsibility to define textlines, barcode and
- images such that overlap is avoided.
-
-After saving, your layouts will appear on the 'Manage layouts' page.
-
-Manage Layouts
-|image263|
-
-`Templates <#patrontemplate>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Patron Card Creator > Manage > Card
- templates
-
-A template describes the arrangement of labels on the label sheet/card
-stock you are using. This might be Avery 5160 for address labels,
-Gaylord 47-284 for spine labels or Avery 28371 for your patron cards,
-just to give a couple of examples. All of the information you will need
-for setting up a template may be on the packaging, and if not it can
-usually be found on the vendor's website or can be measured from a
-sample sheet.
-
-`Add a Template <#addcardtemplate>`__
-'''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-To add a new template click on the 'New template' button at the top of
-your page which brings you to the Edit template form immediately. You
-may also choose to press 'Manage templates' on the left side. Here you
-are offered a list of available templates you can select for editing.
-But in the top of the page there is still the 'New template' button.
-
-New template button
-|image264|
-
-Using the form that appears after pressing either 'Edit' or 'New
-template'you can define the template for your sheet of labels or cards.
-
-Add Patron Card Template
-|image265|
-
-- Template ID is simply a system generated unique id
-
-- Template Code should be the name of this template to identify it on a
- list of templates
-
-- You can use the Template Description to add additional information
- about the template
-
-- The Units pull down is used to define what measurement scale you're
- going to be using for the template.
-
- Measurement Units
- |image266|
-
- - **Note**
-
- A Postscript Point is 1/72" an Adobe Agate is 1/64", an Inch
- is 25.4 SI Millimeters
-
-- The measurements (page height, page width, card width, card height)
- may be on the packaging, and if not it can usually be found on the
- vendor's website or can be measured from a sample sheet.
-
-- A profile is a set of "adjustments" applied to a given template just
- prior to printing which compensates for anomalies unique and peculiar
- to a given printer (to which the profile is assigned).
-
- - Before defining a profile try printing some sample cards so that
- you can take measurements to define a profile to perform the right
- adjustments for your printer/template combination.
-
- - After finding and documenting any anomalies in the printed
- document, then you can `create a profile <#addcardprofile>`__ and
- assign it to the template.
-
- - **Important**
-
- Do not specify a profile unless needed, i.e. do not click to
- define a printer profile. It is not possible to remove a
- profile from a template but you can switch to another profile.
-
- - **Note**
-
- If you are using different printers you may be required to
- define several templates that are identical only different
- profiles are specified.
-
-After saving, your templates will appear on the 'Manage templates' page.
-
-Manage Templates
-|image267|
-
-`Profiles <#patronprofile>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Patron Card Creator > Manage > Profiles
-
-A profile is a set of "adjustments" applied to a given
-`template <#patrontemplate>`__ just prior to printing which compensates
-for anomalies unique and peculiar to a given printer. This means if you
-set a template up and then print a sample set of data and find that the
-items are not all aligned the same on each card, you need to set up a
-profile for each printer (or even different tray selections on the same
-printer) to make up for the differences in printing styles, such as the
-shifting of text to the left, right, top or bottom.
-
-If your cards are printing just the way you want, you will not need a
-profile.
-
-`Add a Profile <#addcardprofile>`__
-'''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-To add a new profile, you want to click on the 'Profiles' button at the
-top of your page and choose 'New Profile'
-
-New Profile Button
-|image268|
-
-To add a new profile, you want to click on the 'New profile' button at
-the top of your page. Using the form that appears you can define the
-values to correct the card misalignments on your label sheet. You may
-also choose 'Manage profiles' on the left side and select one of the
-currently available profiles for editing.
-
-Add Printer Profile
-|image269|
-
-- The Printer Name and Paper Bin do not have to match your printer
- exactly, they are for your reference so you can remember what printer
- you have set the profile for.
-
- - **Note**
-
- For example: if you want to use the Printer model number in
- printer name you can, or you can call it 'the printer on my
- desk'
-
-- Template will be filled in once you have chosen which template to
- apply the profile to on the `template edit form <#addcardtemplate>`__
-
-- The Units pull down is used to define what measurement scale you're
- going to be using for your profile.
-
- Units of Measurement
- |image270|
-
- - **Note**
-
- A Postscript Point is 1/72" an Adobe Agate is 1/64", an Inch
- is 25.4 SI Millimeters
-
-- Offset should be used when the entire image is off center either
- vertically or horizontally. Creep describes a condition where the
- distance between the labels changes across the page or up and down
- the page
-
- - For offset and creep values, negative numbers move the printed
- information up and to the left on the printed sheet and positive
- numbers move down and to the right
-
- - Example: the text is printed 0 .25" from the left edge of the
- first label, 0 .28" from the left edge of the second label and 0
- .31" from the left edge of the third label. This means the
- horizontal creep should be set to (minus) -0.03 " to make up for
- this difference.
-
-After saving, your profiles will appear on the 'Manage Printer Profiles'
-page.
-
-Manage Profiles
-|image271|
-
-Once you have saved your new profile, you can return to the list of
-templates and choose to edit the template that this profile is for.
-
-`Batches <#patroncardbatches>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Patron Card Creator > Manage > Card
- batches
-
-A batch is a collection of patrons for whom you want to generate cards.
-
-`Add a Batch <#addcardbatch>`__
-'''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-To add a new batch, you want to click on the 'New batches' button at the
-top of your page. Choosing the menu item 'Manage batches' on the left a
-list of already defined batches is displayed. In this display you can
-either select a batch for editing or add a new batch.
-
-New Batch Button
-|image272|
-
-For a new batch a message pops up and directs you to select patrons to
-be processed in this batch.No items in batch
-
-After choosing the 'Add item(s)' button the Patron Search window pops
-up.Patron search
-
-From here you can search for patrons to add to your batch by any part of
-their name, their category and/or library. Entering \* in the search box
-will display all the patrons. Patron search results
-
-From the results you can add patrons to the batch by clicking the 'Add'
-button. After adding patrons from the results you can start over and
-perform another search or click 'Close' at the bottom of the screen to
-indicate that you are done. You will then be presented with your
-batch.Patron batch
-
-If you are satisfied with your batch you can proceed to export. If you
-want to correct or even delete that batch the buttons to do so can be
-found at the top of your screen. You can always come back here through
-the 'Manage > Card batches' button.
-
-If you would like to export all patron cards you can click 'Export card
-batch' otherwise you can choose specific patrons to print cards for by
-checking the box to the right of their names and then choose 'Export
-selected card(s)' at the top.
-
-The export menu will ask you to choose a template, a layout and starting
-position (where on the sheet should printing begin).
-
- **Note**
-
- For the starting position if the first 6 labels have already been
- used on your sheet you can start printing on label in position 7 on
- the sheet. The labels are numbered left to right from top to bottom.
-
-Export batch
-
-Once you click 'Export' you will be presented with a PDF of your labels
-for printingPDF Export
-
-When you open the PDF you will see the cards for printing
-
-Final cards
-|image273|
-
-The above image shows a layout that is made up of two textlines. The
-first one is just plain text, the second one is composed of the
- fields. A patron image is printed (if available)
-and the barcode of patrons number is displayed in code 39. All this is
-printed on a template with three columns and 8 rows using position 1-3
-here. When printing this PDF please take care that your printer doesn't
-rescale the PDF (e.g do not fit to paper size) otherwise the printer
-will not be able to print to the right place per your templates.
-
-`Manage Images <#managecardimages>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Patron Card Creator > Manage > Images
-
-Images uploaded using this tool will appear on the menu when creating
-`patron card layouts <#cardlayouts>`__. You are limited in how many
-images you can upload (not counting patron images) by the
-`ImageLimit <#ImageLimit>`__ system preference.
-
- **Important**
-
- Images must be under 500k in size.
-
- **Note**
-
- Pictures uploaded with this tool should be at least 300dpi which is
- the minimum quality for a printable image.
-
-In the center of the screen is a simple upload form, simply browse for
-the file on your computer and give it a name you'll recognize later.
-
-Upload Images
-|image274|
-
-Once the file is uploaded you will be presented with a confirmation
-message.
-
-Image Uploaded
-|image275|
-
-And the image will be listed with all of your others on the right hand
-side of the page.
-
-Images
-|image276|
-
-To delete one or multiple of these images, click the checkbox to the
-right of each image you want to delete and click the 'Delete' button.
-
-`Patrons (anonymize, bulk-delete) <#anonpatrons>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Patrons and Circulation > Patrons
- (anonymize, bulk-delete)
-
-This tool allows you to bulk anonymize circulation histories (this means
-that you keep records of how many times items were checked out - but not
-the patrons who checked the items out) or bulk delete patrons (remove
-them from the system completely).
-
- **Important**
-
- Patrons with outstanding fines or items checked out are not saved.
- They are not completely removed from the system (they are only moved
- to the delete\_borrowers table), but this tool does not provide as
- many checks as one may desire.
-
- **Important**
-
- Before using this tool it is recommended that you backup your
- database. Changes made here are permanent.
-
- **Important**
-
- The anonymization will fail quietly if
- `AnonymousPatron <#AnonymousPatron>`__ preference does not contain a
- valid value.
-
-Patron Anonymize/Bulk Delete Tool
-|image277|
-
-To either delete or anonymize patrons
-
-- Check the 'Verify' box on the task you would like to complete (Delete
- or Anonymize)
-
-- Enter a date before which you want to alter the data
-
-- If deleting patrons you can also choose to find patrons who
-
- - have not borrowed since a specific date
-
- - have accounts that will expire before a specific date
-
- - are in a specific `patron category <#patcats>`__
-
- - are in a `patron list <#patronlists>`__
-
-- Click 'Next'
-
-- A confirmation will appear asking if you're sure this is what you
- want to happen
-
- Patron Anonymize/Bulk Delete Confirmation
- |image278|
-
-- Clicking 'Finish' will delete or anonymize your data
-
- Completed Process
- |image279|
-
-`Batch patron modification <#batchpatronmod>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Patrons and Circulation > Batch patron
- modification
-
-With this tool you can make edits to a batch of patron records. Simply
-load in a file of cardnumbers (one per line), choose from a `list of
-patrons <#patronlists>`__ or scan patron card numbers in to the box
-provided.
-
-Batch patron modification
-|image280|
-
-Once you have the file loaded or the barcodes scanned click 'Continue.'
-You will be presented with a list of the patrons and the changes you can
-make.
-
-Patrons to modify
-|image281|
-
-To the left of each text box there is a checkbox. Clicking that checkbox
-will clear our the field values.
-
- **Important**
-
- If the field is mandatory you will not be able to clear the value in
- it.
-
-If you have multiple patron attributes you can change them all by using
-the plus (+) sign to the right of the text box. This will allow you to
-add another attribute value.
-
-Editing patron attributes
-|image282|
-
-Once you have made the changes you want, you can click 'Save' and Koha
-will present you with the changed patron records.
-
-`Tag Moderation <#tagsmoderation>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Patrons and Circulation > Tags
-
-Depending on your `tagging system preferences <#taggingprefs>`__,
-librarians may need to approve tags before they are published on the
-OPAC. This is done via the Tag Moderation Tool. If there are tags
-awaiting moderation they will be listed on the main staff dashboard
-under the module labels:
-
-Tags pending approval
-|image283|
-
-To moderate the tags visit the Tags tool. When first visiting the tool,
-you will be presented with a list of tags that are pending approval or
-rejection by a librarian
-
-Tags pending moderation
-|image284|
-
-- To see all of the titles this tag was added to simply click on the
- termTitles with a specific tag
-
- - From this list of titles you can remove a tag without outright
- rejecting it from being used in the future by clicking the 'Remove
- tag' button to the right of the title.
-
-- To approve a tag, you can either click the 'Approve' button in line
- with the term, or check all terms you want to approve and click
- 'Approve' below the table.
-
-- To reject a tag, you can either click the 'Reject' button in line
- with the term, or check all terms you want to approve and click
- 'Reject' below the table.
-
-Once a tag has been approved or rejected it will be moved to the
-appropriate list of tags. A summary of all tags will appear on the right
-of the screen.
-
-Summary of tags
-|image285|
-
-Even though a tag is approved or rejected, it can still be moved to
-another list. When viewing approved tags each tag has the option to
-reject:
-
-Approved Tags
-|image286|
-
-To check terms against the approved and rejected lists (and possibly
-against `the dictionary <#TagsExternalDictionary>`__ you have assigned
-for tag moderation) simply enter the term into the search box on the
-bottom right of the screen to see the status of the term
-
-Sample Check list test search
-|image287|
-
-Finally you can find tags by using the filters on the left.
-
-Tag filters
-|image288|
-
-`Upload Patron Images <#uploadpatronimages>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Patrons and Circulation > Upload Patron
- Images
-
-Patron images can be uploaded in bulk if you are `allowing patron
-images <#patronimages>`__ to be attached to patron records. These images
-can also be used when creating `patron cards <#patroncardcreator>`__.
-
-- Create a txt file and title it "DATALINK.TXT" or "IDLINK.TXT"
-
-- On each line in the text file enter the patron's card number followed
- by comma (or tab) and then the image file name
-
- Sample file and image
- |image289|
-
- - Make sure that your TXT file is a plain text document, not RTF.
-
-- Zip up the text file and the image files
-
-- Go to the Upload Patron Images Tool
-
- Upload Image Tool for Single Image
- |image290|
-
-- For a single image, simply point to the image file and enter the
- patron card number
-
-- For multiple images, choose to upload a zip file
-
-- After uploading you will be presented with a confirmation
-
- Image Upload Confirmation
- |image291|
-
- **Important**
-
- There is a limit of 100K on the size of the picture uploaded and it
- is recommended that the image be 200x300 pixels, but smaller images
- will work as well.
-
-`Rotating Collections <#rotatingcollections>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Catalog > Rotating Collections
-
-Rotating Collections is a tool for managing collections of materials
-that frequently get shifted from library to library. It adds the ability
-to store not only an item's home library and current location but also
-information about where it is supposed to be transferred to next to
-ensure that all items in the collection are sent to the correct library.
-When an item in a rotating collection is checked in, library staff is
-notified that the item is part of a rotating collection and which branch
-it should be sent to if it is not at the correct one.
-
- **Important**
-
- The `AutomaticItemReturn <#AutomaticItemReturn>`__ system preference
- must be set to "Don't automatically transfer items to their home
- library when they are returned" for Rotating Collections to function
- properly.
-
-- To create a new rotating collection, click the "New Collection"
- button, fill in the Title and Description, and click Submit. Once
- submitted you'll see "Collection Name added successfully"; click
- "Return to rotating collections home" to return to the main Rotating
- Collections management page (or click Rotating Collections in the
- sidebar).
-
-- To add items to a collection, click "Add or remove items" next to the
- collection's name in the list of collections. Under "Add or remove
- items" scan or type in the barcode of the item you wish to add to the
- collection, and hit Enter or click Submit if necessary.
-
-- To remove an item from a collection, either click Remove next to the
- item's barcode in the list of items within the collection or check
- the "Remove item from collection" box next to the Barcode text box
- under "Add or remove items, and scan or type in the barcode, clicking
- Submit or hitting Enter if necessary. Note: The "Remove item from
- collection" checkbox will remain checked as long as you are on the
- "Add or remove items" page, unless you uncheck it, to facilitate
- quickly removing a number of items at a time by scanning their
- barcodes.
-
-`Transfer a Rotating Collection <#transferrotatingcollection>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Transferring a collection will:
-
-- Change the current location of the items in that collection to the
- library it is to be transferred to
-
-- Initiate a transfer from its original current location/holding
- library to the current location/holding library it is to be rotated
- to. When a library receives a collection they will need to check in
- the items to complete the transfer.
-
-You can transfer a collection in one of two ways:
-
-- From the main Rotating Collections page, click on Transfer next to
- the title of the collection you wish to transfer; choose the library
- you wish to transfer the collection to and click "Transfer
- collection".
-
-- Or, from the "add or remove items" page for a collection, you can
- click the Transfer button, choose the library you wish to transfer
- the collection to and click "Transfer Collection".
-
- **Important**
-
- In order to complete the transfer process, the library receiving the
- rotating collection should check in all items from the collection as
- they receive them. This will clear the transfer so that the items
- are no longer shown as being "in transit".
-
-If an item in a rotating collection is checked in at a library other
-than the one it is supposed to be transferred to, a notification will
-appear notifying library staff that the item is part of a rotating
-collection, also letting them know where the item needs to be sent.
-
-Rotating Collection Item Notification
-|image292|
-
-`Catalog <#catalogtools>`__
----------------------------
-
-`Batch item modification <#batchmodifyitems>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Catalog > Batch item modification
-
-This tool will allow you to modify a batch of item records in Koha.
-
-Batch Modification Tool
-|image293|
-
-From the tool you can choose to upload a file of barcodes or item ids,
-or you can scan items one by one into the box below the upload tool. You
-can also decide the items edited should be populated with the default
-values you have defined in your `default
-framework <#marcbibframeworks>`__.
-
-Once you have your file uploaded or the barcodes listed you can click
-'Continue.'
-
-Batch Modify Summary
-|image294|
-
-You will be presented with a summary of the items you want to modify.
-From here you can uncheck the items you don't want to modify before
-making changes in the form below. You can also hide columns you don't
-need to see to prevent having to scroll from left to right to see the
-entire item form.
-
- **Note**
-
- To uncheck all items thar are currently checked out you can click
- the 'Clear on loan' link at the top of the form.
-
-Using the edit form you can choose which fields to make edits to. By
-checking the checkbox to the right of each field you can clear the
-values in that field for the records you are modifying.
-
-Choose fields you want to change in bulk
-|image295|
-
-Once you have made you changes you will be presented with the resulting
-items.
-
-Item results summary
-|image296|
-
- **Note**
-
- You can also edit items on one bib record in a batch by going to the
- bib record and clicking Edit > Edit items in batch
-
-Edit items in a batch
-|image297|
-
-`Batch item deletion <#batchdeleteitems>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Catalog > Batch item deletion
-
-This tool will allow you to delete a batch of item records from Koha.
-
-From the tool you can choose to upload a file of barcodes or item ids,
-or you can scan items one by one into the box below the upload tool.
-
-Batch Deletion Tool
-|image298|
-
-Once you have your file uploaded or the barcodes scanned you can click
-'Continue.'
-
-You will be presented with a confirmation screen. From here you can
-uncheck the items you don't want to delete and decide if Koha should
-delete the bib record if the last item is being deleted before clicking
-'Delete selected items.' If you'd like you can delete the bibliogrphic
-record if you're deleting the last item by clicking the checkbox next to
-'Delete records if no items remain'.
-
-Confirm Deletion
-|image299|
-
-If your file (or list of scanned barcodes) has more than 1000 barcodes,
-Koha will be unable to present you with a list of the items. You will
-still be able to delete them, but not able to choose which items
-specifically to delete or delete the biblio records.
-
-More than 1000 records in the file
-|image300|
-
-If the items are checked out you will be presented with an error after
-clicking 'Delete selected items' and the items will not be deleted.
-
-Items not Deleted
-|image301|
-
-If the items can be deleted they will be and you will be presented with
-a confirmation of your deletion.
-
-Batch Deletion Confirmation
-|image302|
-
-`Batch record deletion <#batchrecorddelete>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-This tool will take a batch of record numbers for either bibliographic
-records or authority records and allow you to delete all those records
-and any items attached to them in a batch. Batch record deletion
-
-First you need to tell the tool if you're deleting bibliographic or
-authority records. Next you can load a file with biblionumbers or
-authids or enter a list of those numbers in the box provided. Once you
-submit the form you will be presented with a summary of the records you
-are trying to delete.Summary
-
-If a record you want to delete can't be deleted it will be highlighted.
-
-Check the records you want to delete and click the 'Delete selected
-records' button to finish the process.
-
-`Batch Record Modification <#batchrecordmod>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Catalog > Batch record modification
-
-This tool will allow you to edit batches of bibliographic and/or
-authority records using `MARC Modification
-Templates <#marcmodtemplates>`__. Before visiting this tool you will
-want to set up at least one MARC modification template.
-
-Batch record modification
-|image303|
-
-When you visit the tool it will ask you:
-
-- Choose whether you're editing bibliographic or authority records
-
-- Enter the biblionumbers or authids
-
- - You can upload a file of these numbers or
-
- - Enter the numbers (one per line) in the box provided
-
-- Finally choose the MARC Modification Template you'd like to use to
- edit these records.
-
-Once you've entered your critera click 'Continue'Records to edit
-
-You will be presented with a list of records that will be edited. Next
-to each one is a checkbox so you can uncheck any items you would rather
-not edit at this time.
-
-Clicking Preview MARC will allow you to see what edits will be made when
-you finalize the edit.Modified MARC Preview
-
-Once you're sure everything is the way you want you can click the
-'Modify selected records' button and your records will be modified.
-
-`Automatic item modifications by age <#autoitemagemod>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Catalog > Automatic item modifications by
- age
-
-This tool allows librarians to update item specific fields when an item
-reaches a certain age.
-
- **Note**
-
- Staff need the items\_batchmod permission to access this tool
-
- **Important**
-
- The settings in this tool will be acted upon by the `corresponding
- cron job <#autoitemupdatecron>`__
-
-If you haven't created any rules you will see the option to 'Add rules'
-on the Tool page. Click this button to create rules.Automatic item
-modifications by age
-
-If you have rules already there will be a button that reads 'Edit
-rules'. To create a new rule click the 'Edit rules' button at the top of
-the page
-
-List of rules
-|image304|
-
-You will be brought to a page where you can edit exisitng rules or
-create a new rule
-
-Add/Edit rules
-|image305|
-
-In the form that appears you can set :
-
-- the age in days at which the item will update (Age)
-
-- what criteria is needed to trigger the update (Conditions)
-
-- what changes are made when the script runs (Substitutions)
-
-New rule
-|image306|
-
-Once you're done you can click the 'Add this rule' link and then add
-additional rules or you can click the 'Submit these rules' button to
-save your changes.
-
-List of rules
-|image307|
-
-`Export Data (MARC & Authorities) <#exportbibs>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Catalog > Export Data
-
-Koha comes with a tool that will allow you to export your bibliographic,
-holdings and/or authority data in bulk. This can be used to send your
-records to fellow libraries, organizations or services; or simply for
-backup purposes.
-
-`Export Bibliographic Records <#exportmarc>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-At the top of the screen you need to pick what data you're exporting. If
-you're exporting bibliographic records with or without the holdings
-information you want to click the 'Export bibliographic records' tab.
-
-- Fill in the form in order to limit your export to a specific range
- (all fields are optional)
-
- Select Records to Export
- |image308|
-
- - Choose to limit your export by any one or more of the following
- options
-
- - Limit to a bib number range
-
- - Limit to a specific item type
-
- - **Important**
-
- This limit will use the type you have defined in the
- `item-level\_itypes <#item-level_itypes>`__ preference.
- If you have the item-level\_itypes preference set to
- 'specific item' and you have no items attached to a bib
- record it will not be exported. To get all bib records
- of a specific type you will need your item-level\_itypes
- preference set to 'biblio record'.
-
- - Limit to a specific library or group of libraries
-
- - Limit to a call number range
-
- - Limit to an acquisition date range
-
- - If you'd like you can load a file of biblionumbers for the records
- you would like to export
-
- File of Records to Export
- |image309|
-
- - Next choose what to skip when exporting
-
- Export options
- |image310|
-
- - By default items will be exported, if you would like to only
- export bibliographic data, check the 'Don't export items' box
-
- - To limit your export only to items from the library you're
- logged in as (if you leave the 'Library' field set to 'All') or
- to the library you selected above check the 'Remove non-local
- items' box
-
- - You can also choose what fields you don't want to export. This
- can be handy if you're sharing your data, you can remove all
- local fields before sending your data to another library
-
- - Finally choose the file type and file name
-
- File export format
- |image311|
-
- - Choose to export your data in marc or marcxml format
-
- - Choose the name you want your file to save as
-
- - Click 'Export bibliographic records'
-
-`Export Authority Records <#exportauthority>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-At the top of the screen you need to pick what data you're exporting. If
-you're exporting authority records you want to click the 'Export
-authority records' tab.
-
-- Fill in the form in order to limit your export to a specific range or
- type of authority record (all fields are optional)
-
- Export authorities
- |image312|
-
-- Or you can choose a file of authids to exportAuthorities file
-
-- Next choose fields that you would like to exclude from the export
- separated by a space (no commas)
-
- Authority export options
- |image313|
-
- - If you'd like to exclude all subfields of the 200 for example just
- enter 200
-
- - If you'd like to exclude a specific subfield enter it beside the
- field value 100a will exclude just the subfield 'a' of the 100
-
-- Finally choose the file type and file name
-
- Export format
- |image314|
-
- - Choose to export your data in marc or marcxml format
-
- - Choose the name you want your file to save as
-
-- Click 'Export authority records'
-
-`Inventory/Stocktaking <#inventory>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Catalog > Inventory/Stocktaking
-
-Koha's Inventory Tool can be used in one of two ways, the first is by
-printing out a shelf list that you can then mark items off on, or by
-uploading a text files of barcodes gathered by a portable scanner.
-
-If you do not have the ability to use your barcode scanner on the floor
-of the library, the first option available to you is to generate a shelf
-list based on criteria you enter.
-
-Inventory & Stocktaking Tool
-|image315|
-
-Choose which library, shelving location, call number range, item status
-and when the item was last seen to generate a shelf list that you can
-then print to use while walking around the library checking your
-collection
-
-Shelf List
-|image316|
-
-Alternatively you can export the list to a CSV file for altering in an
-application on your desktop. Simply check the box next to 'Export to csv
-file' to generate this file.
-
-Once you have found the items on your shelves you can return to this
-list and check off the items you found to have the system update the
-last seen date to today.
-
-If you have a portable scanner (or a laptop and USB scanner) you can
-walk through the library with the scanner in hand and scan barcodes as
-you come across them. Once finished you can then upload the text file
-generated by the scanner to Koha
-
-Barcode Import for Inventory Tool
-|image317|
-
-Choose the text file and the date you want to mark all items as seen and
-then scroll to the very bottom and click 'Submit.'
-
-`Label Creator <#labelcreator>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Catalog > Label Creator
-
-The Label Creator allow you to use layouts and templates which you
-design to print a nearly unlimited variety of labels including barcodes.
-Here are some of the features of the Label Creator module:
-
-- Customize label layouts
-
-- Design custom label templates for printed labels
-
-- Build and manage batches of labels
-
-- Export single or multiple batches
-
-- Export single or multiple labels from within a batch
-
-- Export label data in one of three formats:
-
- - PDF - Readable by any standard PDF reader, making labels printable
- directly on a printer
-
- - CSV - Export label data after your chosen layout is applied
- allowing labels to be imported in to a variety of applications
-
- - XML - Included as an alternate export format
-
-`Templates <#labeltemplates>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Label Creator > Manage > Label templates
-
-A template is based on the label/card stock you are using. This might be
-Avery 5160 for address labels, Gaylord 47-284 for spine labels or Avery
-28371 for your patron cards, just to give a couple of examples. These
-labels will include all of the information you will need for setting up
-a Koha, this information may be on the packaging, and if not it can
-usually be found on the vendor's website.
-
-`Add a Template <#addlabeltemplate>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-To add a new template, you want to click on the 'New' button at the top
-of the Label Creator and choosing 'Label template'.
-
-New Label Template Option
-|image318|
-
-Using the form that appears you can define the template for your sheet
-of labels or cards.
-
-Label Template Form
-|image319|
-
-- Template ID will be automatically generated after saving your
- template, this is simply a system generated unique id
-
-- Template Code should be something you can use to identify your
- template on a list of templates
-
-- You can use the Template Description to add additional information
- about the template
-
-- The Units pull down is used to define what measurement scale you're
- going to be using for the template. This should probably match the
- unit of measurement used on the template description provided by the
- product vendor.
-
- Measurement Units
- |image320|
-
-- The measurements, number of columns and number of rows can be found
- on the vendor product packaging or website.
-
- - **Important**
-
- If you do not supply a left text margin in the template, a
- 3/16" (13.5 point) left text margin will apply by default.
-
-- A profile is a set of "adjustments" applied to a given template just
- prior to printing which compensates for anomalies unique and peculiar
- to a given printer (to which the profile is assigned).
-
- - Before picking a profile try printing some sample labels so that
- you can easily define a profile that is right for your
- printer/template combination.
-
- - After finding any anomalies in the printed document, `create a
- profile <#addlabelprofile>`__ and assign it to the template.
-
-After saving, your templates will appear on the 'Manage' area under
-'Label templates'.
-
-List of label templates
-|image321|
-
-`Profiles <#labelprofiles>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Label Creator > Manage > Printer Profiles
-
-A profile is a set of "adjustments" applied to a given
-`template <#addlabeltemplate>`__ just prior to printing which
-compensates for anomalies unique and peculiar to a given printer (to
-which the profile is assigned). This means if you set a template up and
-then print a sample set of data and find that the items are not all
-aligned the same on each label, you need to set up a profile for each
-printer to make up for the differences in printing styles, such as the
-shifting of text to the left, right, top or bottom.
-
-If your labels are printing just the way you want, you will not need a
-profile.
-
-`Add a Profile <#addlabelprofile>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-To add a new profile, you want to click on the 'New' button at the top
-of the Label Creator tool and choose 'Printer profile'.
-
-New Profile Button
-|image322|
-
-Using the form that appears you can create a profile to fix any problems
-with your template.
-
-Create a Printer Profile
-|image323|
-
-- The Printer Name and Paper Bin do not have to match your printer
- exactly, they are for your reference so you can remember what printer
- you have set the profile for. So if you want to use the Printer model
- number in printer name or you can call it 'the printer on my desk'
-
-- Template will be filled in once you have chosen which template to
- apply the profile to on the `template edit
- form <#addlabeltemplate>`__
-
-- The Units pull down is used to define what measurement scale you're
- going to be using for your profile.
-
- Units of Measurement
- |image324|
-
-- Offset describes what happens when the entire image is off center
- either vertically or horizontally and creep describes a condition
- where the distance between the labels changes across the page or up
- and down the page
-
- - For these values, negative numbers move the error up and to the
- left and positive numbers move the error down and to the right
-
- - Example: the text is .25" from the left edge of the first label,
- .28" from the left edge of the second label and .31" from the left
- edge of the third label. This means the horizontal creep should be
- set to .03" to make up for this difference.
-
-After saving, your profiles will appear on the 'Manage' area under
-'Printer profiles'.
-
-List of Profiles
-|image325|
-
-Once you have saved your new profile, you can return to the list of
-templates and choose to edit the template that this profile is for.
-
-`Layouts <#labellayouts>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Label Creator > Manage > Layouts
-
-A layout is used to define the fields you want to appear on your labels.
-
-`Add a Layout <#addlabellayout>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-To add a new layout, you want to click on the 'New' button at the top of
-the Label Creator tool and choose 'Layout'.
-
-New Layout Button
-|image326|
-
-Using the form that appears you can create a profile to fix any problems
-with your template.
-
-Add New Layout
-|image327|
-
-- The name of your layout can be anything you'd like to help you
- identify it later.
-
-- If this is a barcode label you'll want to choose the encoding (Code
- 39 is the most common)
-
-- The layout type can be any combination of bibliographic information
- and/or barcode. For example a spine label would just be Biblio
- whereas a label for your circulation staff to use to checkout the
- book would probably be Biblio/Barcode.
-
-- The Bibliographic Data to Print includes any of the data fields that
- may be mapped to your MARC frameworks. You can choose from the preset
- list of fields or you can click on 'List Fields' and enter your own
- data. In 'List Fields', you can specify MARC subfields as a
- 4-character tag-subfield string: (ie. 254a for the title field), You
- can also enclose a whitespace-separated list of fields to concatenate
- on one line in double quotes. (ie. "099a 099b" or "itemcallnumber
- barcode"). The fields available are from the database tables list
- below. Finally you could add in static text strings in single-quote
- (ie. 'Some static text here.')
-
- - You can use the schema viewer (http://schema.koha-community.org)
- with the following tables to find field names to use:
-
- - Currently all fields in the following tables are used: items,
- biblioitems, biblio, branches
-
- List fields
- |image328|
-
-- Choose if the label maker should print out the guidelines around each
- label
-
-- Choose if you'd like Koha to try to split your call numbers (usually
- used on Spine Labels)
-
-- Finally choose your text settings such as alignment, font type and
- size.
-
-After saving, your layouts will appear on the 'Manage Layouts' page.
-
-`Batches <#labelbatches>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Label Creator > Manage > Label batches
-
-Batches are made up of the barcodes you would like to print. Once in
-this tool you can search for the item records you would like to print
-out labels for.
-
-`Add a Batch <#addlabelbatch>`__
-''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
-
-Batches can be created in one of two ways. The first is to click the
-'Create Label Batch' link on the '`Staged MARC
-Management <#managestaged>`__' page:
-
-Create Label Batch Link on Staged Records List
-|image329|
-
-The other is to choose to create a new batch from the label creator tool
-
-Create New Batch
-|image330|
-
-You will be brought to an empty batch with a box to scan barcodes or
-itemnumbers in to and an 'Add item(s)' button at the bottom of the page.
-
-Add Items
-|image331|
-
-You can either scan barcodes in to the box provided and click the 'Add
-item(s)' button or you can click the 'Add item(s)' button with the
-barcodes box empty. Clicking 'Add item(s)' with nothing in the barcodes
-box will open a search window for you to find the items you want to add
-to the batch.
-
-Search for items for a Batch
-|image332|
-
-From the search results, click the check box next to the items you want
-to add to the batch and click the 'Add checked' button. You can also add
-items one by one by clicking the 'Add' link to the left of each item.
-
-Batch search results
-|image333|
-
-Once you have added all of the items click the 'Done' button. The
-resulting page will list the items you have selected.
-
-List of items in the batch
-|image334|
-
-To print your labels, click the 'Export full batch' button. To print
-only some of the labels, click the 'Export selected item(s)' button.
-Either way you will be presented with a confirmation screen where you
-can choose your template and layout.
-
-Start batch export
-|image335|
-
-You will then be presented with three download options: PDF, Excel, and
-CSV.
-
-Batch save options
-|image336|
-
-After saving your file, simply print to the blank labels you have in
-your library.
-
-`Quick Spine Label Creator <#quicklabelcreator>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Catalog > Quick Spine Label Creator
-
- **Note**
-
- This tool does not use the label layouts or templates, it simply
- prints a spine label in the first spot on the label sheet.
-
- - Define the fields you want to print on the spine label in the
- `SpineLabelFormat <#SpineLabelFormat>`__ system preference
-
- - Format your label printing by editing spinelabel.css found in
- koha-tmpl/intranet-tmpl/prog/en/css/
-
-To use this tool you simply need the barcode for the book you'd like to
-print the spine label for.
-
-Quick Spine Label Creator
-|image337|
-
-`MARC modification templates <#marcmodtemplates>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-The MARC Modification Templates system gives Koha users the power to
-make alterations to MARC records automatically while staging MARC
-records for import.
-
-This tool is useful for altering MARC records from various
-venders/sources work with your MARC framework. The system essentially
-allows one to create a basic script using actions to Copy, Move, Add,
-Update and Delete fields.
-
-Start by adding a new template (a template can be made up of one or more
-actions) by entering a name and clicking 'Create template'.
-
-Add a new template
-|image338|
-
-Next you can add actions to the template by filling in the Action box.
-For example if you're loading in a batch of files from your EBook vendor
-you might want to add the biblio item type of EBOOK to the 942$c.Add
-action
-
-- Choose 'Add/Update'
-
-- Enter the field 942 and subfield c
-
-- Enter the value of 'EBOOK' (or whatever your ebook item type code is)
-
-- Provide a description so you can identify this action later
-
-- Click 'Add action'
-
-Each action can also have an optional condition to check the value or
-existance of another field. For example you might want to add the call
-number to the item record if it's not already there.
-
-Add conditional action
-|image339|
-
-- Choose 'Copy'
-
-- Decide if you want to copy the first occurance or all occurances of
- the field
-
-- Enter the field 090 (or other biblio call number field) and subfield
- a to copy
-
-- Enter the 952 field and o subfield to copy to
-
-- Choose 'if'
-
-- Enter the 952 field and o subfield
-
-- Choose "doesn't exist"
-
-- Provide a description so you can identify this action later
-
-- Click 'Add action'
-
-The Copy & Move actions also support Regular Expressions, which can be
-used to automatically modify field values during the copy/move. An
-example would be to strip out the '$' character in field 020$c.
-
-Add regex action
-|image340|
-
-- Choose 'Copy and replace'
-
-- Decide if you want to copy the first occurance or all occurances of
- the field
-
-- Enter the field 020 and subfield c to copy
-
-- Enter the 020 field and c subfield to copy to
-
-- Check the 'RegEx' box and enter your regular expression (in this case
- s/\\$// )
-
-- Choose 'if'
-
-- Enter the 020 field and c subfield
-
-- Choose "matches"
-
-- Check the 'RegEx' box and enter your regular expression (in this case
- m/^\\$/ )
-
-- Provide a description so you can identify this action later
-
-- Click 'Add action'
-
- **Note**
-
- The value for an update can include variables that change each time
- the template is used. Currently, the system supports two variables,
- \_\_BRANCHCODE\_\_ which is replaced with the branchcode of the
- library currently using the template, and \_\_CURRENTDATE\_\_ which
- is replaced with the current date in ISO format ( YYYY-MM-DD ).
-
-You could also use regular expressions to add your library's proxy URL
-in front of links in your MARC record.Add proxy URL
-
-- Choose 'Copy and replace'
-
-- Decide if you want to copy the first occurance or all occurances of
- the field
-
-- Enter the field 856 and subfield u to copy
-
-- Enter the 856 field and u subfield to copy to
-
-- Check the 'RegEx' box and enter your regular expression (in this case
- s/^/PROXY\_URL/ )
-
-- Provide a description so you can identify this action later
-
-- Click 'Add action'
-
-When choosing between 'Copy' and 'Copy and replace' keep the following
-example in mind:
-
-::
-
- 245 _aThe art of computer programming _cDonald E. Knuth.
- 300 _aA_exists _bB_exists
-
-If we apply action (a) Copy the whole field 245 to 300, we get:
-
-::
-
- 245 _aThe art of computer programming _cDonald E. Knuth.
- 300 _aA_exists _bB_exists
- 300 _aThe art of computer programming _cDonald E. Knuth.
-
-If we apply action (b) Copy the subfield 245$a to 300$a, we get:
-
-::
-
- 245 _aThe art of computer programming _cDonald E. Knuth.
- 300 _aThe art of computer programming _bB_exists
-
-Once your actions are saved you can view them at the top of the screen.
-Actions can be moved around using the arrows to the left of them.
-
-View actions
-|image341|
-
-Depending on your actions the order may be very important. For example
-you don't want to delete a field before you copy it to another field.
-
-To add another template you can either start fresh or click the
-'Duplicate current template' checkbox to create a copy of an existing
-template to start with.
-
-Duplicate template
-|image342|
-
-Once your template is saved you will be able to pick it when using the
-`Stage MARC Records for Import <#stagemarc>`__ tool.
-
-Choose template
-|image343|
-
-`Stage MARC Records for Import <#stagemarc>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Catalog > Stage MARC records for import
-
-This tool can be used to import both bibliographic and authority records
-that are saved in MARC format. Importing records into Koha includes two
-steps. The first is to stage records for import.
-
-- First find the MARC file on your computer
-
- Stage MARC Records for Import
- |image344|
-
-- Next you will be presented with options for record matching and item
- imports
-
- Upload options
- |image345|
-
- - Enter 'Comments about this file' to identify your upload when
- going to the '`Manage Staged MARC Records <#managestaged>`__' tool
-
- - Tell Koha which type of file this is, bibliographic or authority
-
- Record type
- |image346|
-
- - Choose the character encoding
-
- Chracter encoding
- |image347|
-
- - Choose if you would like to use a `MARC Modification
- Template <#marcmodtemplates>`__ to alter the data you're about to
- import
-
- Choose modification template
- |image348|
-
- - Choose whether or not you want to look for matching records
-
- Look for matches
- |image349|
-
- - You can set up `record matching rules <#recordmatchingrules>`__
- through the administration area
-
- Matching rules
- |image350|
-
- - When using the ISBN matching rule Koha will find only exact
- matches. If you find that the ISBN match is not working to
- your satisfaction you can change the
- `AggressiveMatchOnISBN <#AggressiveMatchOnISBN>`__
- preference to 'Do' and then run your import again.
-
- - Next choose what to do with matching records if they are found
-
- - Finally choose what to do with records that are unique
-
- - Next you can choose whether or not to import the item data found
- in the MARC records (if the file you're loading is a bibliographic
- file)
-
- Import items
- |image351|
-
- - From here you can choose to always add items regardless of
- matching status, add them only if a matching bib was found, add
- items only if there was no matching bib record, replace items
- if a matching bib was found (The match will look at the
- itemnumbers and barcodes to match on for items. Itemnumbers
- take precendence over barcodes), or Ignore items and not add
- them.
-
-- Click 'Stage for import'
-
-- You will be presented with a confirmation of your MARC import
-
- MARC Import Confirmation
- |image352|
-
-- To complete the process continue to the `Manage Staged MARC Records
- Tool <#managestaged>`__
-
-`Staged MARC Record Management <#managestaged>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Catalog > Staged MARC Record Management
-
-Once you have `staged <#stagemarc>`__ your records for import you can
-complete the import using this tool.
-
-List of Staged MARC Records
-|image353|
-
-- From the list of staged records, click on the file name that you want
- to finish importing
-
- - You will note that records that have already been imported will
- say so under 'Status'
-
-- A summary of your import will appear along with the option to change
- your matching rules
-
- Manage Staged Records Batch
- |image354|
-
-- Below the summary is the option to import the batch of bib records
- using a specific framework
-
- Choose Framework to Import Into
- |image355|
-
- - Choosing a framework other than 'Default' isn't necessary, but
- it's helpful for running reports and having the right bib level
- item type selected on import.
-
-- Below the framework selection there will be a list of the records
- that will be imported
-
- List of Staged Records
- |image356|
-
- - Review your summary before completing your import to make sure
- that your matching rule worked and that the records appear as you
- expect them to
-
- - Matches will appear with info under the 'Match details column'
-
- Matched record
- |image357|
-
- and when clicking the 'View' link under 'Diff' you can see the
- difference between versions.
-
- Record differences
- |image358|
-
-- Click 'Import into catalog' to complete the import
-
- Import summary
- |image359|
-
-- Once your import is complete a link to the new bib records will
- appear to the right of each title that was imported
-
-- You can also undo your import by clicking the 'Undo import into
- catalog' button
-
-Records imported using this tool remain in the 'reservoir' until they
-are cleaned. These items will appear when searching the catalog from the
-`Cataloging <#cataloging>`__ tool:
-
-Reservoir Results
-|image360|
-
-To clean items out of the 'reservoir':
-
-- Visit the main screen of the Manage Staged MARC Records tool
-
- List of Staged MARC Records
- |image361|
-
-- To clean a batch, click the 'Clean' button to the right
-
-- You will be presented with a confirmation message
-
- Clean MARC Records Confirmation
- |image362|
-
- - Accept the deletion and the records will be removed from the
- reservoir and the status will be changed to 'cleaned'
-
-`Upload Local Cover Image <#uploadlocalimages>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Catalog > Upload Local Cover Image
-
-This tool will allow you to upload cover images for the materials in
-your catalog. To access this tool, staff will need the
-`upload\_local\_cover\_images permission <#toolspermissions>`__. In
-order for images to show in the staff client and/or OPAC you will need
-to set your `LocalCoverImages <#LocalCoverImages>`__ and/or
-`OPACLocalCoverImages <#OPACLocalCoverImages>`__ preferences to
-'Display.' Images can be uploaded in batches or one by one.
-
- **Note**
-
- Koha does not have a maximum file size limit for this tool, but
- Apache may limit the maximum size of uploads (talk to your sys
- admin).
-
- **Note**
-
- When you want to upload multiple images onto a bib record, they will
- display left to right (then top to bottom, depending on screen real
- estate) in order of uploading, and the one on the left (the first
- one uploaded) will be the one used as a thumbnail cover in search
- results and on the detail page. There is no way to reorder cover
- images uploaded in this way, so be sure to upload them in the order
- you'd like them to appear.Multiple cover images on one record
-
-If uploading a single image:
-
-- Visit the tool and click the 'Browse' button to browse to the image
- on your local machine.
-
- Upload single cover image
- |image363|
-
-- Click 'Upload file'
-
-- Choose 'Image file' under the 'File type' section
-
-- Enter the biblionumber for the record you're attaching this image to.
- This is not the same as the barcode, this is the system generated
- number assigned by Koha.
-
- - Find the biblionumber by looking at the end of the URL in the
- address bar when on the detail page
-
- Biblionumber in URL
- |image364|
-
- - or by clicking on the MARC tab on the detail page in the staff
- client
-
- Biblionumber on MARC Record
- |image365|
-
-- If you would like to replace any other cover images you may have
- uploaded in the past, check the 'Replace existing covers' box under
- the 'Options' section
-
-- Click 'Process images'
-
-- You will be presented with a summary of the upload and a link to the
- record you have just added the image to
-
-If uploading a batch of images at once you will need to prepare a ZIP
-file first.
-
-- Enter in to the ZIP file all the images you are uploading
-
-- Also include a text file (\*.TXT) named either datalink.txt or
- idlink.txt listing the biblionumber followed by the image name for
- each image one per line
-
- - ex. 4091,image4091.jpg
-
- ZIP File Contents
- |image366|
-
-- Browse your local computer to the ZIP file
-
-- Click 'Upload file'
-
-- Choose 'Zip file' under the 'File type' section
-
-- If you would like to replace any other cover images you may have
- uploaded in the past, check the 'Replace existing covers' box under
- the 'Options' section
-
-- Click 'Process images'
-
-- You will be presented with a summary of the upload
-
- Upload Summary
- |image367|
-
- **Important**
-
- The source image is used to generate a 140 x 200 px thumbnail image
- and a 600 x 800 px full-size image. The original sized image
- uploaded will not be stored by Koha
-
-You will be able to see your cover images in the staff client on the
-detail page under the 'Image' tab in the holdings table at the bottom
-
-Cover images in the staff client
-|image368|
-
-In the OPAC the cover images will also appear in the images tab, as well
-as next to the title and on the search results.
-
-If you would like to remove a cover image you can click 'Delete image'
-below the image if you have the `upload\_local\_cover\_images
-permission <#toolspermissions>`__.
-
-`Additional Tools <#additionaltools>`__
----------------------------------------
-
-`Calendar <#calholidays>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Additional Tools > Calendar
-
-Libraries can define library closings and holidays to be used when
-calculating due dates. You can make use of the Calendar by turning on
-the proper system preferences:
-
-- *Get there:*\ More > Administration > Global System Preferences >
- Circulation > `useDaysMode <#useDaysMode>`__
-
- - Choose the method for calculating due date - either include days
- the library is closed in the calculation or don't include them.
-
-- *Get there:* More > Administration > Global System Preferences >
- Circulation > `finescalendar <#finesCalendar>`__
-
- - This will check the holiday calendar before charging fines
-
-Calendar & Holidays Tools
-|image369|
-
-`Adding Events <#addevents>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Before adding events, choose the library you would like to apply the
-closings to. When adding events you will be asked if you would like to
-apply the event to one branch or all branches. To add events, simply
-
-- Click on the date on the calendar that you would like to apply the
- closing to
-
- Calendar Add Form
- |image370|
-
-- In the form that appears above the calendar, enter the closing
- information (for more info on each option click the question mark [?]
- to the right of the option)
-
- - Library will be filled in automatically based on the library you
- chose from the pull down at the top of the page
-
- - The day information will also be filled in automatically based on
- the date you clicked on the calendar
-
- - In the description enter the reason the library is closed
-
- - Next you can choose if this event is a one time event or if it is
- repeatable.
-
- - If this is a one day holiday choose 'Holiday only on this day'
-
- - If this is a weekly closing (like a weekend day) then you can
- choose 'Holiday repeated every same day of the week'
-
- - If this is an annual holiday closing choose 'Holiday repeated
- yearly on the same date'
-
- - If the library is going to be closed for the week or a range of
- time choose 'Holiday on a range' and enter a 'To Date' at the
- top
-
- - If the library is going to be closed for a range of time each
- year (such as summer holidays for schools) choose 'Holiday
- repeated yearly on a range' and enter a 'To Date' at the top
-
- - Finally decide if this event should be applied to all libraries or
- just the one you have originally selected
-
- - If you'd rather enter all the holidays and then copy them all
- to another branch all at once you can use the copy menu below
- the calendar
-
- Copy holidays
- |image371|
-
-- After saving you will see the event listed in the summary to the
- right the calendar
-
- Calendar Summary
- |image372|
-
-`Editing Events <#editevents>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-To edit events
-
-- Click on the event on the calendar that you want to change (do this
- by clicking on the date on the calendar, not the event listed in the
- summary)
-
- Edit holiday form
- |image373|
-
-- From this form you can make edits to the holiday or delete the
- holiday completely.
-
- - All actions require that you click 'Save' before the change will
- be made.
-
-- Clicking on repeatable events will offer slightly different options
-
- Edit repeatable event
- |image374|
-
- - In the form above you will note that there is now an option to
- 'Generate an exception for this repeated holiday,' choosing this
- option will allow you to make it so that this date is not closed
- even though the library is usually closed on this date.
-
- - All actions require that you click 'Save' before the change
- will be made.
-
-`Additional Help <#calendarhelp>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-When adding or editing events you can get additional help by clicking on
-the question mark next to various different options on the form
-
-Additional Calendar Help Buttons
-|image375|
-
-`CSV Profiles <#csvprofiles>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Additional Tools > CSV Profiles
-
-CSV Profiles are created to define how you would like your cart or list
-to export.
-
-`Add CSV Profiles <#addcsvprofile>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-To add a CSV Profile
-
-- Click 'CSV Profiles' from the Tools menu
-
-- The 'Profile type' determines what type of fields you plan to use
- (MARC or SQL) to define your profile
-
- - If you choose MARC then you will need to enter MARC fields
-
- MARC CSV Profile
- |image376|
-
- - If you choose SQL then you will need to enter SQL database fields
-
- SQL CSV Profile
- |image377|
-
- - The 'Profile name' will appear on the export pull down list when
- choosing 'Download' from your cart or list
-
- Download List
- |image378|
-
- - The 'Profile description' is for your own benefit, but will also
- appear in the OPAC when patrons download content, so make sure
- it's clear to your patrons as well
-
- - The 'CSV separator' is the character used to separate values and
- value groups
-
- **Note**
-
- The most common option here is comma because most spreadsheet
- applications know how to open files split by commas.
-
- - The 'Field separator' is the character used to separate duplicate
- fields
-
- - Example: You may have multiple 650 fields and this is the
- character that will appear in between each one in the column
-
- Field separators in between multiple subjects
- |image379|
-
- - The 'Subfield separator' is the character used to separate
- duplicate subfields
-
- - Example: You may have multiple $a subfields in a field
-
- - The 'Encoding' field lets you define the encoding used when saving
- the file
-
- - Finally format your CSV file using the 'Profile MARC' or 'Profile
- SQL' field
-
- - Define which fields or subfields you want to export, separated
- by pipes. Example : 200\|210$a\|301 for MARC and
- biblio.title\|biblio.author for SQL
-
- - **Note**
-
- You can also use your own headers (instead of the ones from
- Koha) by prefixing the field number with an header,
- followed by the equal sign. Example : Personal
- name=100\|title=245$a\|300
-
- When you have entered in all of the information for you profile,
- simply click 'Submit' and you will be presented with a confirmation
- that your profile has been saved.
-
- Confirmation of new CSV profile
- |image380|
-
-`Modify CSV Profiles <#editcsvprofile>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Once you have created at least one CSV Profile an 'Edit profile' tab
-will appear next to the 'New profile' button.
-
-Modify CSV Profiles
-|image381|
-
-- Choose the profile you would like to edit and alter the necessary
- fields.
-
-- After submitting your changes you will be presented with a
- confirmation message at the top of the screen
-
- Confirmation of CSV modification
- |image382|
-
-- To delete a profile, check the 'Delete selected profile' option
- before clicking 'Submit Query'
-
- Delete an existing CSV Profile
- |image383|
-
-`Using CSV Profiles <#usecsvprofiles>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Your CSV Profiles will appear on the export list or cart menu under the
-'Download' button in both the staff client and the OPAC
-
-CSV Profiles on Download Menu in the Staff Client
-|image384|
-
-`Log Viewer <#logviewer>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Additional Tools > Log Viewer
-
-Actions within the Koha system are tracked in log files. Your `system
-preferences <#logs>`__ can be changed to prevent the logging of
-different actions. These logs can be viewed using the Log Viewer Tool.
-
-Log Viewer
-|image385|
-
-Choosing different combinations of menu options will produce the log
-file for that query.
-
-A query for all logs related to the Circulation module produces a result
-like this
-|image386|
-
-`News <#newstool>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Additional Tools > News
-
-Koha's news module allows librarians to post news to the OPAC, staff
-interface and circulation receipts.
-
-Koha News Module
-|image387|
-
-To add news to either the OPAC, the Staff Client or a Circulation
-receipt:
-
-- Click 'New Entry'
-
- Add Koha News Form
- |image388|
-
- - Under 'Display Location' choose whether to put the news on the
- OPAC, Slip (circulation receipt) or the Librarian (Staff)
- Interface.Display location
-
- - Choose the library this news item will show for
-
- - Choose a title for your entry
-
- - Using the publication and expiration date fields you can control
- from which date and for how long your news item appears
-
- - Examples: (these assume today's date as 07-May-2015)
-
- - Publish on current date: set publication date as 07-May-2015
-
- - Schedule for publishing in future: set date later than
- 07-May-2015
-
- - Backdate the news item: set date earlier than 07-May-2015
-
- - 'Appear in position' lets you decide what order your news items
- appear in
-
- - The 'News' box allows for the use of HTML for formatting of your
- news item
-
-- After filling in all of the fields, click 'Submit'
-
-- News in the OPAC will appear above the
- `OpacMainUserBlock <#OpacMainUserBlock>`__
-
- News in the OPAC
- |image389|
-
- - Below the news in the OPAC there will be an RSS icon allowing you
- to subscribe to library newsNews RSS feed
-
-- News in the Staff Client will appear on the far left of the screen
-
- News in the Staff Client
- |image390|
-
-- News on the circulation receipts will appear below the items that are
- checked out
-
- News at the bottom of the circulation receipt
- |image391|
-
-- Depending on your choice for the
- `NewsAuthorDisplay <#NewsAuthorDisplay>`__ preference you will also
- see the person who created the news item (this uses the logged in
- person)
-
-`Task Scheduler <#taskscheduler>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Additional Tools > Task Scheduler
-
-The task scheduler is a way to schedule reports to run whenever you
-want.
-
-To schedule a task, visit the Task Scheduler and fill in the form
-
-Task Scheduler
-|image392|
-
-- Current Server Time shows the time on your server (schedule all of
- your reports to run based on that time - not on your local time)
-
-- Time should be entered as hh:mm (2 digit hour, 2 digit minute)
-
-- Date should be entered using the calendar pop up
-
-- From Report choose the report you want to schedule
-
-- Choose whether to receive the text of or a link to the results
-
-- In the Email filed enter the email of the person you want to receive
- your report
-
-Below the task scheduler form, there is a list of scheduled reports
-
-Scheduled Tasks
-|image393|
-
-You can also schedule reports directly from the list of saved reports by
-clicking the 'Schedule' link
-
-Saved Reports List
-|image394|
-
-`Troubleshooting <#taskscedtroubleshoot>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Task scheduler will not work if the user the web server runs as doesn't
-have the permission to use it. To find out if the right user has the
-permissions necessary, check /etc/at.allow to see what users are in it.
-If you don't have that file, check etc/at.deny. If at.deny exists but is
-blank, then every user can use it. Talk to your system admin about
-adding the user to the right place to make the task scheduler work.
-
-`Quote of the Day (QOTD) Editor <#QOTDEditor>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Additional Tools > Edit quotes for QOTD
- feature
-
-This tool will allow you to add and edit quotes to show on the OPAC if
-you're using the Quote of the Day (QOTD) feature.
-
-To turn this feature on set the `QuoteOfTheDay <#QuoteOfTheDay>`__
-preference to 'Enable and add at least one quote via the Quote of the
-Day Editor. Once these steps are complete you will see your quotes above
-the `OpacMainUserBlock <#OpacMainUserBlock>`__ in the OPAC:
-
-Quote in the OPAC
-|image395|
-
-`Add a Quote <#addquote>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-To add a quote:
-
-- Click the 'Add quote' button in the toolbar and an empty quote entry
- will be added to the end of the current quote list.
-
- Add quote button
- |image396|
-
- - **Important**
-
- Both the 'Source' and the 'Text' fields must be filled in in
- order to save the new quote.
-
- Add quote
- |image397|
-
-- When finished filling in both fields, press the key on your
- keyboard to save the new quote.
-
-- The list will update and the new quote should now be visible in the
- list.
-
- **Note**
-
- You may cancel the addition of a new quote any time prior to saving
- it simply by pressing the key on your keyboard.
-
-`Edit/Delete a Quote <#editquote>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Once the current quote pool has been loaded into the editing table, you
-may edit the quote source and text.
-
-- Edit either the 'Source' or 'Text' fields by clicking on the desired
- field.
-
- Edit quote
- |image398|
-
-- When you are finished editing a field, press the key on your
- keyboard to save the changes.
-
-The list will be updated, the edits saved, and visible.
-
-If you'd like you can also delete quote(s).
-
-- Select the quote(s) you desire to delete by clicking on the
- corresponding quote id.
-
-- Once quote selection is finished, simply click the 'Delete quote(s)'
- button.
-
-- You will be prompted to confirm the deletion.
-
-- After confirming the deletion, the list will update and the quote(s)
- will no longer appear.
-
-`Import Quotes <#importquote>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-If you'd like you can import a batch of quotes as a CSV file. Your file
-must contain two columns in the form: "source","text" with no header
-row.
-
- **Note**
-
- You will be prompted to confirm upload of files larger than 512KB.
-
-- To start the import process click the 'Import quotes' button at the
- top of the screen
-
- Import quotes button
- |image399|
-
-- Once on the import quotes screen you can browse your computer for the
- file you would like to import
-
- Import quotes
- |image400|
-
-- After selecting the CSV file, click the 'Open' button and the file
- will be uploaded into a temporary editing table.
-
- Imported quotes
- |image401|
-
-- From the listing you can edit either the 'Source' or 'Text' fields by
- clicking on the desired field. When you are finished editing a field,
- press the key on your keyboard to save the changes.
-
- Edit imported quote
- |image402|
-
-- You can also delete quotes from this listing before completing the
- import.
-
- - Select the quote(s) you desire to delete by clicking on the
- corresponding quote id.
-
- Selected for deletion
- |image403|
-
- - Once quote selection is finished, simply click the 'Delete
- quote(s)' key.
-
- Delete quote(s)
- |image404|
-
- - You will be prompted to confirm the deletion.
-
- Confirm deletion
- |image405|
-
- - After confirming the deletion, the list will update and the
- quote(s) will no longer appear.
-
-- Once you are satisfied with the quotes, click the 'Save quotes'
- button in the toolbar at the top and the quotes will be saved.
-
- Save quotes button
- |image406|
-
-`Upload <#uploadtool>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- *Get there:* More > Tools > Additional Tools > Upload
-
-This tool will allow you to upload files to your Koha system for
-selection from the `Cataloging form <#uploadbibfile>`__.
-
-`Upload Files <#uploadfiles>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-When you first visit the Upload tool you might see a warning about
-missing a category.Upload to temprorary
-
-Categories are defined in the `authorized value <#authorizedvalues>`__
-in the UPLOAD category. If you do not have upload categories then your
-files will be temporary and will be deleted the next time the server is
-rebooted. Once you have a value in the UPLOAD authorized value category
-you will see a Category pull down below the 'Browse' button.Upload to
-category
-
-Browse your computer a file, choose a category and decide if the public
-will be able to download this file via the OPAC. Once your file is
-uploaded you will be presented with a confirmation.Upload confirmation
-
-`Search Files <#searchuploads>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-All uploaded files are searchable from below the upload form. Using the
-form you can search any part of the filename and/or the Hashvalue.Search
-uploaded files
-
-You will be presened with the results of your search.Search results
-
-Patrons
-=======
-
-Before importing and/or adding patrons be sure to set up your `patron
-categories <#patcats>`__.
-
-`Add a new patron <#addnewpatron>`__
-------------------------------------
-
-Patrons are added by going to the 'Patrons' module.
-
-- *Get there:* Patrons
-
-Once there you can add a new patron.
-
-- Click 'New patron'
-
- Choose patron type
- |image407|
-
-- The fields that appear on the patron add form can be controlled by
- editing the `BorrowerUnwantedField <#BorrowerUnwantedField>`__ system
- preference.
-
-- First enter the identifying information regarding your patron
-
- Add Patron Form
- |image408|
-
- - Required fields are defined in the
- `BorrowerMandatoryField <#BorrowerMandatoryField>`__ system
- preference
-
- - Salutation is populated by the
- `BorrowersTitles <#BorrowersTitles>`__ system preference
-
- - **Note**
-
- If you'd like to prevent full names from printing on
- `slips <#notices>`__ and you're not using the Initials or
- Other name fields for anything else, you can use them for
- shortened versions of the name to then be printed on the slip.
-
- For example:
-
- ::
-
- Firstname: Nicole C.
- Surname: Engard
- Initials: NCE
-
- Then on the slip you can have it print the
- <> instead of the full name (NCE).
-
- Or you could do something like this:
-
- ::
-
- Firstname: Nicole
- Surname: Engard
- Initials: E
-
- Then on the slip you can have it print the
- <>, <> instead of the
- full name (E, Nicole).
-
-- Next enter the contact information
-
- Patron Contact Information
- |image409|
-
- - For contact information, note that the primary phone and email
- addresses are the ones that appear on notices and slips printed
- during circulation (receipts, transfer slips and hold slips). The
- primary email is also the one that overdue notices and other
- messages go to.
-
-- If this patron is a child, you will be asked to attach the child
- patron to an adult patron
-
- Guarantor Linking
- |image410|
-
- - Click 'Set to Patron' to search your system for an existing patron
-
- - If the Guarantor is not in the system, you can enter the first and
- last name in the fields available
-
- - The relationships are set using the
- `borrowerRelationship <#borrowerRelationship>`__ system preference
-
-- If this patron is a professional, you will be asked to attach the
- patron to an organizational patron
-
- Organization Linking
- |image411|
-
- - Click 'Set to Patron to search your system for an existing patron
-
-- Each patron can have an alternate contact
-
- Alternate Contact
- |image412|
-
- - An alternate contact could be a parent or guardian. It can also be
- used in academic settings to store the patron's home address.
-
-- The library management section includes values that are used within
- the library
-
- Library Management
- |image413|
-
- - The card number field is automatically calculated if you have the
- `autoMemberNum <#autoMemberNum>`__ system preference set that way
-
- - **Note**
-
- For a newly installed system this preference will start at
- 1 and increment by 1 each time after. To have it start with
- the starting number of your barcodes, enter the first
- barcode by hand in the patron record and save the patron.
- After that the field will increment that number by 1.
-
- - If you accidentally chose the wrong patron category at the
- beginning you can fix that here
-
- - Sort 1 and 2 are used for statistical purposes within your library
-
-- Next, the Library Setup section includes additional library settings
-
- Library set-up options
- |image414|
-
- - The registration date will automatically be filled in with today's
- date
-
- - If your patron cards expire (based on your `patron category
- settings <#patcats>`__) the Expiry date will automatically be
- calculated
-
- - The OPAC Note is a note for the patron - it will appear in the
- OPAC on the patron's record
-
- - The Circulation Note is meant solely for your library staff and
- will appear when the circulation staff goes to check an item out
- to the patron
-
- Sample Circulation Note
- |image415|
-
- - The Staff/OPAC asks for the username and password to be used by
- the patron (and/or staff member) to log into their account in the
- OPAC and for staff to log in to the staff client.
-
- - Staff will only be able to use this log in info to log in to
- the staff client if they have the `necessary
- permissions <#patronpermissions>`__.
-
-- If you have set `additional patron
- attributes <#patronattributetypes>`__ up, these will appear next
-
- Additional Patron Attributes
- |image416|
-
-- Finally, if you have
- `EnhancedMessagingPreferences <#EnhancedMessagingPreferences>`__ set
- to 'allow,' you can choose the messaging preferences for this patron.
-
- Patron Messaging Settings
- |image417|
-
- - These notices are:
-
- - Advanced notice : A notice in advance of the patron's items
- being due (The patron can choose the number of days in advance)
-
- - Item checkout : A notice that lists all the of the items the
- patron has just checked out and/or renewed, this is an
- electronic form of the checkout receipt
-
- - Hold filled : A notice when you have confirmed the hold is
- waiting for the patron
-
- - Item due : A notice on the day and item is due back at the
- library
-
- - Item check-in : A notice that lists all the of the items the
- patron has just checked in
-
- - Patrons can choose to receive their notices as a digest by
- checking the 'Digest only?' box along with the delivery method. A
- digest is a combination of all the messages of that type (so all
- items due in 3 days in one email) in to one email instead of
- multiple emails for each alert.
-
- - **Important**
-
- These preferences will override any you set via the `patron
- categories <#addingpatroncat>`__
-
- - **Important**
-
- These preference can be altered by the patron via the OPAC
-
-- Once finished, click 'Save'
-
-If the system suspects this patron is a duplicate of another it will
-warn you.
-
-Patron Duplicate Suspected
-|image418|
-
- **Note**
-
- A duplicate patron is detected if first and last names match and
- there is no date of birth populated or if first name, last name and
- date of birth fields are all populated. If two patrons have matching
- names, but one has a date of birth and the other does not they will
- not match as duplicates.
-
-If you have set a minimum or upper age limit on the patron category and
-are requiring that the birth date be filled in, Koha will warn you if
-the patron you're adding is too old or young for the patron category you
-have selected:
-
-Patron age warning
-|image419|
-
-`Add a Staff Patron <#addstaffpatron>`__
-----------------------------------------
-
-All staff members must be entered into Koha as patrons of the 'Staff'
-type. Follow the steps in `Add a Patron <#addnewpatron>`__ to add a
-staff member. To give the staff member permissions to access the staff
-client, follow the steps in `Patron Permissions <#patronpermissions>`__
-
- **Important**
-
- Remember to assign your staff secure usernames and passwords since
- these will be used to log into the staff client.
-
-`Add a Statistical Patron <#addstatspatron>`__
-----------------------------------------------
-
-One way to track use of in house items is to "check out" the materials
-to a statistical patron. The "check out" process doesnât check the book
-out, but instead tracks an in house use of the item. To use this method
-for tracking in house use you first will need a `patron
-category <#patcats>`__ set up for your Statistical patron.
-
-In House Patron Category
-|image420|
-
-Next, you will need to create a new patron of the statistical type
-
-New In House Patron
-|image421|
-
-Next, follow the steps put forth in the '`Add a new
-Patron <#addnewpatron>`__' section of this manual. Since this patron is
-not a real person, simply fill in the required fields, the correct
-library and nothing else.
-
-To learn about other methods of tracking in house use visit the
-`Tracking inhouse use <#trackinhouse>`__ section of this manual.
-
-`Duplicate a Patron <#duplicatepatron>`__
------------------------------------------
-
-Sometimes when you're adding a new family to your system you don't want
-to type the contact information over and over. Koha allows for you to
-duplicate a patron and change only the parts you want to (or need to)
-change.
-
-- Open the patron you want to use as your base (the patron you want to
- duplicate information from)
-
-- Click the 'Duplicate' button at the top of their record
-
- The Duplicate Button is the 3rd one in
- |image422|
-
-- All of the fields with the exception of first name, card number,
- username and password have been duplicated. Fill in the missing
- pieces and click 'Save'
-
- Duplicating Patron Form
- |image423|
-
- - **Note**
-
- Clicking in a field that is already populated with data will
- clear that field of all information (making it easier for you
- to type in something different)
-
-- You will be brought to your new patron
-
- Newly created patron
- |image424|
-
-`Add Patron Images <#addpatronimages>`__
-----------------------------------------
-
-If you would like you can add patron images to help identify patrons. To
-enable this feature you must first set the
-`patronimages <#patronimages>`__ preference to 'Allow'.
-
-If the preference is set to 'Allow' you will see a placeholder image
-under the patron's name and box to upload a patron image below the basic
-contact information.
-
-Add patron image
-|image425|
-
-In the 'Upload Patron Image' box click 'Browse' to find the image on
-your computer and 'Upload' to load the image on to the patron record.
-
-Patron image
-|image426|
-
- **Important**
-
- There is a limit of 100K on the size of the picture uploaded and it
- is recommended that the image be 200x300 pixels, but smaller images
- will work as well.
-
-`Editing Patrons <#editpatrons>`__
-----------------------------------
-
-Patrons in Koha can be edited using one of many edit buttons.
-
-- To edit the entire patron record simply click the 'Edit' button at
- the top of the patron record.
-
- Main Patron Edit Menu
- |image427|
-
-- Patron passwords are not recoverable. The stars show on the patron
- detail next to the Password label are always there even if a password
- isn't set. If a patron forgets their password the only option is to
- reset their password. To change the patron's password, click the
- 'Change Password' button
-
- Patron Password Change Form
- |image428|
-
- - Koha cannot display existing passwords. Leave the field blank to
- leave password unchanged.
-
- - This form can automatically generate a random password if you
- click the link labeled "Click to fill with a randomly generated
- suggestion. Passwords will be displayed as text."
-
-- To edit a specific section of the patron record (for example the
- Library Use section) click the 'Edit' link below the section
-
- Library Use Section of Patron Record
- |image429|
-
-- A patron image can be added by browsing for the image on your machine
- from the 'Manage Patron Image' section
-
- Manage Patron Image Form
- |image430|
-
- - This form will not appear if you have the
- `patronimages <#patronimages>`__ system preference to not allow
- patron images
-
- - To add patron images in bulk, use the `Upload Patron
- Images <#uploadpatronimages>`__ Tool
-
-- Patrons can also be blocked from checking items out by setting Patron
- Flags
-
- Patron Warning Flags
- |image431|
-
- - If you would like your circulation staff to confirm a patron's
- address before checking items out to the patron, you can see the
- 'Gone no Address' flag
-
- Patron's address in doubt
- |image432|
-
- - If the patron reports that they have lost their card you can set
- the 'Lost Card' flag to prevent someone else from using that card
- to check items out
-
- Patron lost card
- |image433|
-
- - If you would like to bar a patron from the library you can add a
- manual restriction
-
- Add manual restriction
- |image434|
-
- - **Note**
-
- This flag can automatically be set with the `Overdue/Notice
- Status Triggers <#noticetriggers>`__
-
- - If you enter in a date and/or note related to the restriction you
- will see that in the restricted message as well
-
- Restricted until message
- |image435|
-
-- Children patrons do not become adults automatically in Koha unless
- you have `Juvenile to Adult cron job <#j2acron>`__ running. To
- upgrade a child patron to and adult patron category manually go to
- the 'More' menu and choose 'Update Child to Adult Patron'
-
- Update Child to Adult Patron
- |image436|
-
- - You will then be presented with a pop up window asking which one
- of your adult patron categories this Child should be updated to
-
- Choose Adult Category to Update To
- |image437|
-
-`Managing Patron Self Edits <#mangepatronedits>`__
---------------------------------------------------
-
-If you are allowing patrons to edit their accounts via the OPAC with the
-`OPACPatronDetails <#OPACPatronDetails>`__ preference then you will need
-to approve all changes via the staff client before they're applied. If
-there are patron edits awaiting action they will appear on the staff
-client dashboard below the modules list (along with other items awaiting
-action).
-
-Patron requests waiting
-|image438|
-
- **Note**
-
- Superlibrarians will see modifications for any branch, other staff
- will only see modifications for patrons who belong to their logged
- in branch.
-
-When you click the 'Patrons requesting modifications' link you will be
-brought to a list of patrons with requested changes.
-
-Manage patron updates
-|image439|
-
-From here you can 'Approve' and apply the changes to the patron record,
-'Delete' and remove the changes or 'Ignore' and keep the changes pending
-to review later.
-
-If you would like to see the entire patron record you can click the
-'Patron details' links to the right of the buttons. This will open in a
-new tab.
-
-`Patron Permissions <#patronpermissions>`__
--------------------------------------------
-
-Patron Permissions are used to allow staff members access to the staff
-client.
-
- **Important**
-
- In order for a staff member to log into the staff interface they
- must have (at the very least) 'catalogue' permissions which allow
- them to view the staff interface.
-
-`Setting Patron Permissions <#setpatronperms>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-To set patron permissions, you must first `have a patron of the 'Staff'
-type <#addstaffpatron>`__ open
-
-- On the patron record click More and choose Set Permissions to alter
- patron permissions
-
- Set Patron Permissions
- |image440|
-
-- You will be presented with a list of preferences, some of which can
- be expanded by clicking the plus sign to the left of the section
- title.
-
- Patron Permissions
- |image441|
-
-`Patron Permissions Defined <#patronpermsdefined>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- superlibrarian
-
- - Access to all librarian functions
-
- - **Note**
-
- With this selected there is no need to choose any other
- permissions
-
-- circulate
-
- - Check out and check in items
-
- - This section can be expanded (`Learn more <#circpermissions>`__)
-
-- catalogue
-
- - **Required for staff login.** Staff access, allows viewing the
- catalogue in staff client
-
- - **Important**
-
- Must be given to all staff members to allow them to login
- to the staff client
-
-- parameters
-
- - Manage Koha system systems (Administration panel)
-
- - This section can be expanded (`Learn
- more <#parameterpermissions>`__)
-
-- borrowers
-
- - Add or modify patrons
-
-- permissions
-
- - Set user permissions
-
-- reserveforothers
-
- - Place and modify holds for patrons
-
- - This section can be expanded (`Learn
- more <#reservepermissions>`__)
-
-- editcatalogue
-
- - Edit Catalog (Modify bibliographic/holdings data)
-
- - This section can be expanded (`Learn more <#catpermissions>`__)
-
-- updatecharges
-
- - Manage patrons fines and fees
-
- - This section can be expanded (`Learn
- more <#updatechargespermissions>`__)
-
-- acquisition
-
- - Acquisition and/or suggestion management
-
- - This section can be expanded (`Learn more <#acqpermissions>`__)
-
-- management
-
- - Set library management params (deprecated)
-
- - **Important**
-
- This permission level no longer controls anything.
-
-- tools
-
- - Use all tools
-
- - This section can be expanded (`Learn more <#toolspermissions>`__)
-
-- editauthorities
-
- - Edit Authorities
-
-- serials
-
- - Manage serial subscriptions
-
- - This section can be expanded (`Learn more <#serpermissions>`__)
-
-- reports
-
- - Allow access to the reports module
-
- - Reports found on the Circulation page are not controlled by this
- permission
-
- - This section can be expanded (`Learn more <#reportpermissions>`__)
-
-- staffaccess
-
- - Allow staff members to modify permissions for other staff members
-
- - **Important**
-
- Requires the borrowers permission above
-
-- plugins
-
- - Koha plugins
-
- - This section can be expanded (`Learn more <#pluginpermissions>`__)
-
-- lists
-
- - Koha Lists
-
- - **Important**
-
- All staff have permission to create and modify their own
- lists, this permission is only necessary if you'd like to give
- a staff member permission to delete public lists that they
- have not created.
-
- - This section can be expanded (`Learn more <#listspermissions>`__)
-
-`Granular Circulate Permissions <#circpermissions>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-If the staff member has 'circulate' permissions they have the ability to
-perform all of these actions. If you would like to control circulation
-permissions on a more granular level choose from these options:
-
-- circulate\_remaining\_permissions
-
- - Remaining circulation permissions
-
- - All circulation rights except those covered by permissions listed
- below
-
-- force\_checkout
-
- - Force checkout if a limitation exists
-
- - With this permission a librarian will be allowed to override a
- check out restriction in the following cases:
-
- - age restriction
-
- - the item is issued to another patron
-
- - the item is not for loan
-
- - the patron has overdue items
-
- - the item is lost
-
- - the item is a high demand item
-
- - the item is on hold
-
-- manage\_restrictions
-
- - Manage restrictions for accounts
-
- - Grants permission to the staff member to lift a restriction that
- might be on the patron's record
-
-- overdues\_report
-
- - Execute overdue items report
-
- - The permission to run the overdues reports found under Circulation
-
-- override\_renewals
-
- - Override blocked renewals
-
- - Requires that the staff member also has
- circulate\_remaining\_permissions
-
-`Granular Parameters Permissions <#parameterpermissions>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-If the staff member has 'parameters' permissions they have the ability
-to perform all of these actions. If you would like to control parameter
-permissions on a more granular level choose from these options:
-
-- manage\_circ\_rules
-
- - Manage circulation rules
-
- - The ability to access the `Circulation and fines
- rules <#circfinerules>`__ in the administration area
-
-- parameters\_remaining\_permissions
-
- - Remaining system parameters permissions
-
- - The ability to access all areas in Administration (other than the
- Circulation and fine rules)
-
-`Granular Holds Permissions <#reservepermissions>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-If the staff member has 'reserveforothers' permissions they have the
-ability to perform all of these actions. If you would like to control
-holds permissions on a more granular level choose from these options:
-
-- modify\_holds\_priority
-
- - Modify holds priority
-
- - Allow staff members to alter the holds priority (moving patrons up
- and down the queue)
-
-- place\_holds
-
- - Place holds for patrons
-
-`Granular Cataloging Permissions <#catpermissions>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-If the staff member has 'editcatalogue' permissions they have the
-ability to perform all of these actions. If you would like to control
-cataloging permissions on a more granular level choose from these
-options:
-
-- delete\_all\_items
-
- - Delete all items at once
-
- - Ability to use the 'Delete all items' option found under the
- 'Edit' menu in cataloging
-
-- edit\_catalogue
-
- - Edit catalog (Modify bibliographic/holdings data)
-
- - Ability to access all cataloging functions via the
- `Cataloging <#cataloging>`__ page
-
-- edit\_items
-
- - Edit items
-
- - Ability to make `edits to item/holdings
- records <#editingitems>`__, but not bibliographic records
-
-- edit\_items\_restricted
-
- - Limit item modification to subfields defined in the
- `SubfieldsToAllowForRestrictedEditing <#SubfieldsToAllowForRestrictedEditing>`__
- preference
-
- - **Note**
-
- Please note that edit\_items permission is still required
-
-- fast\_cataloging
-
- - Fast cataloging
-
- - The ability to catalog using only the `Fast Add
- Framework <#fastaddcat>`__ found on the
- `Circulation <#circulation>`__ page
-
-`Granular Fines and Charges Permissions <#updatechargespermissions>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-If a staff member has 'updatecharges' permission they have the ability
-to perform all of these actions. If you would like to control fines and
-charges permissions on a more granular level choose from these options:
-
-- remaining\_permissions
-
- - Remaining permissions for managing fines and fees other than the
- ability to write off charges
-
-- writeoff
-
- - Write off fines and fees
-
-`Granular Acquisitions Permissions <#acqpermissions>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-If the staff member has 'acquisition' permissions they have the ability
-to perform all of these actions. If you would like to control
-acquisitions permissions on a more granular level choose from these
-options:
-
-- budget\_add\_del
-
- - Add and delete budgets (but can't modify budgets)
-
-- budget\_manage
-
- - Manage budgets
-
-- budget\_manage\_all
-
- - Manage all budgets
-
- budget\_modify
-
- - Modify budget (can't create lines, but can modify existing ones)
-
-- contracts\_manage
-
- - Manage contracts
-
-- group\_manage
-
- - Manage orders and basket groups
-
-- order\_manage
-
- - Manage orders and baskets
-
-- order\_manage\_all
-
- - Manage all orders and baskets, regardless of restrictions on them
-
-- order\_receive
-
- - Manage orders and baskets
-
-- period\_manage
-
- - Manage periods
-
-- planning\_manage
-
- - Manage budget planning
-
-- vendors\_manage
-
- - Manage vendors
-
-`Granular Serials Permissions <#serpermissions>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-If the staff member has 'serials' permissions they have the ability to
-perform all of these actions. If you would like to control serials
-permissions on a more granular level choose from these options:
-
-- check\_expiration
-
- - Check the `expiration of a serial <#serialexpiration>`__
-
-- claim\_serials
-
- - Claim missing serials via the `Claims section <#serialclaims>`__
-
-- create\_subscription
-
- - Create `a new subscription <#newsubscription>`__
-
-- delete\_subscription
-
- - Delete an existing subscription
-
-- edit\_subscription
-
- - Edit an existing subscription
-
- - This permission does not include the ability to delete or create a
- subscription
-
-- receive\_serials
-
- - Serials receiving
-
- - Receive serials on existing subscriptions
-
-- renew\_subscription
-
- - Renew a subscription
-
-- routing
-
- - Routing
-
- - Manage `routing lists <#routinglist>`__
-
-- superserials
-
- - Manage subscriptions from any branch (only applies when
- `IndependantBranches <#IndependentBranches>`__ is used)
-
-`Granular Tools Permissions <#toolspermissions>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-If the staff member has 'tools' permissions they have the ability to
-access and use all items under the Tools menu. If you would like to
-control which tools staff members have access to on a more granular
-level choose from these options:
-
-- batch\_upload\_patron\_images
-
- - Upload patron images in batch or one at a time
-
- - Access to the `Image Upload Tool <#uploadpatronimages>`__
-
-- delete\_anonymize\_patrons
-
- - Delete old borrowers and anonymize circulation/reading history
- (deletes borrower reading history)
-
- - Access to the `Anonymize Patron Tool <#anonpatrons>`__
-
-- edit\_calendar
-
- - Define days when the library is closed
-
- - Access to the `Calendar/Holidays Tool <#calholidays>`__
-
-- edit\_news
-
- - Write news for the OPAC and staff interfaces
-
- - Access to the `News Tool <#newstool>`__
-
-- edit\_notice\_status\_triggers
-
- - Set notice/status triggers for overdue items
-
- - Access to the `Overdue Notice Status/Triggers
- Tool <#noticetriggers>`__
-
-- edit\_notices
-
- - Define notices
-
- - Access to the `Notices Tool <#notices>`__
-
-- export\_catalog
-
- - Export bibliographic, authorities and holdings data
-
- - Access to the `Export Data Tool <#exportbibs>`__
-
-- import\_patrons
-
- - Import patron data
-
- - Access to the `Import Patrons Tool <#patronimport>`__
-
-- inventory
-
- - Perform inventory (stocktaking) of your catalog
-
- - Access to the `Inventory Tool <#inventory>`__
-
-- items\_batchdel
-
- - Perform batch deletion of items
-
- - Access to the `Batch Item Deletion Tool <#batchdeleteitems>`__
-
-- items\_batchmod
-
- - Perform batch modification of items
-
- - Access to the `Batch Item Modification Tool <#batchmodifyitems>`__
-
-- items\_batchmod\_restricted
-
- - Limit `batch item modification <#batchmodifyitems>`__ to subfields
- defined in the
- `SubfieldsToAllowForRestrictedBatchmod <#SubfieldsToAllowForRestrictedBatchmod>`__
- preference
-
- - **Note**
-
- Please note that items\_batchmod permission is still required
-
-- label\_creator
-
- - Create printable labels and barcodes from catalog and patron data
-
- - Access to the `Label Creator <#labelcreator>`__ and `Quick Label
- Creator <#quicklabelcreator>`__ Tools
-
-- manage\_csv\_profiles
-
- - Manage CSV export profiles
-
- - Access to the `CSV Profiles Tool <#csvprofiles>`__
-
-- manage\_staged\_marc
-
- - Manage staged MARC records, including completing and reversing
- imports
-
- - Access to the `Manage Staged MARC Records Tool <#managestaged>`__
-
-- moderate\_comments
-
- - Moderate patron comments
-
- - Access to the `Comments Tool <#comments>`__
-
-- moderate\_tags
-
- - Moderate patron tags
-
- - Access to the `Tags Tool <#tagsmoderation>`__
-
-- records\_batchdel
-
- - Perform batch deletion of records (bibliographic or authority)
-
- - Access to the `Batch Record Deletion Tool <#batchrecorddelete>`__
-
-- rotating\_collections
-
- - Manage rotating collections
-
- - Access to the `Rotating Collections Tool <#rotatingcollections>`__
-
-- schedule\_tasks
-
- - Schedule tasks to run
-
- - Access to the `Task Scheduler Tool <#taskscheduler>`__
-
-- stage\_marc\_import
-
- - Stage MARC records into the reservoir
-
- - Access to the `Stage MARC Records Tool <#stagemarc>`__
-
-- upload\_general\_files
-
- - Upload any file
-
- - Access to upload files via the `Upload Tool <#uploadtool>`__
-
-- upload\_local\_cover\_images
-
- - Upload local cover images
-
- - Access to the `Upload Local Cover Image
- Tool <#uploadlocalimages>`__ as well as permission to add and
- delete local cover images from the bib detail page
-
-- upload\_manage
-
- - Manage uploaded files
-
- - Access to uploaded files via the `Upload Tool <#uploadtool>`__
-
- **Note**
-
- upload\_general\_files permission is required for this
- permission
-
-- view\_system\_logs
-
- - Browse the system logs
-
- - Access to the `Log Viewer Tool <#logviewer>`__
-
-`Granular Reports Permissions <#reportpermissions>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-If the staff member has 'reports' permissions they have the ability to
-perform all of these actions. If you would like to control reports
-permissions on a more granular level choose from these options:
-
-- create\_reports
-
- - Create SQL Reports
-
- - The ability to create and edit but not run SQL reports
-
-- execute\_reports
-
- - Execute SQL Reports
-
- - The ability to run but not create or edit SQL reports
-
-`Granular Plugins Permissions <#pluginpermissions>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-If the staff member has 'plugins' permissions they have the ability to
-perform all of these actions. If you would like to control reports
-permissions on a more granular level choose from these options:
-
-- configure
-
- - Configure plugins
-
- - The ability to run the 'configure' section of a plugin if it has
- one
-
-- manage
-
- - Manage plugins
-
- - The ability to install or uninstall plugins
-
-- report
-
- - Use report plugins
-
- - The ability to use report plugins
-
-- tool
-
- - Use tool plugins
-
- - The ability to use tool plugins
-
-`Granular Lists Permissions <#listspermissions>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-All staff members have permission to access lists. This section only
-needs to be checked off if you want to give permission to a staff member
-to delete public lists that they have no created themselves.
-
-- delete\_public\_lists
-
- - Delete public lists
-
-`Patron Information <#patroninformation>`__
--------------------------------------------
-
-When viewing a patron record you have the option to view information
-from one of many tabs found on the left hand side of the record.
-
-- *Get there:* Patrons > Browse or search for patron > Click patron
- name
-
-`Check Out <#patcheckout>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-For instruction on checking items out, view the `Checking
-Out <#checkingout>`__ section of this manual.
-
-Staff members can access their own check out screen by clicking their
-username in the top right of the staff client and choosing 'My
-checkouts'My checkouts
-
-`Details <#patrondetails>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Staff members can access their own account details by clicking their
-username in the top right of the staff client and choosing 'My account'
-
-My account
-|image442|
-
-All patron information will appear on the Details tab. This includes all
-the contact information, notes, custom patron attributes, messaging
-preferences, etc entered when adding the patron.
-
-In the case of patrons who are marked as 'Child' or 'Professional' and
-their Guarantors additional information will appear on their record.
-
-- A child patron will list their Guarantor
-
- Guarantor listed and linked from the child record
- |image443|
-
-- On the Guarantor's record, all children and/or professionals will be
- listed
-
- Guarantees listed on the Guarantor's profile
- |image444|
-
-`Circulation Summary <#patcircsummary>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Below the patron's information on the details screen is a tabbed display
-of the items they have checked out, overdue, and on hold.
-
-Checkout summary
-|image445|
-
-If they have family at the library staff can see what the other family
-members have checked out.
-
-Relative checkouts
-|image446|
-
-The Restrictions tab will show for all patrons. If the patron has no
-restrictions you will see that on the tab.
-
-Patron restrictions
-|image447|
-
-If the patron has restrictions on their account the tab will show the
-number and the description.
-
-Patron restrictions
-|image448|
-
-Using the 'Add manual restriction' button you can add a restriction to
-the patron record from here.
-
-Add restriction
-|image449|
-
-`Fines <#patronfines>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-The patron's complete accounting history will appear on the Fines tab.
-Contrary to its name, the Fines tab does not just show fine data, it
-also shows membership fees, rental fees, reserve fees and any other
-charge you may have for patrons.
-
-Patron Accounting Summary
-|image450|
-
-The table will show you the following columns:
-
-- Date: the date the charge/payment was posted
-
- - In the case of fines this will be the last day that the fine was
- accrued
-
-- Description: a description of the charges including the due date for
- overdue items and a link to the item record where one is available
-
-- Note: any notes about this charge/payment
-
- - If you're allowing patrons to pay fines via the OPAC with PayPal
- (`EnablePayPalOpacPayments <#EnablePayPalOpacPayments>`__) you
- will see a Note that says 'PayPal' for items paid this wayPayPal
- Fines
-
-- Amount: the total amount of the payment or charge
-
-- Outstanding: the amount still due on charge
-
-- The ability to reverse a payment
-
-- A link to print a receipt for that line item
-
-At the top of the table you can click the 'Filter paid transaction' to
-hide all completed transaction and above that you can use the search box
-to find a specific charge or payment.
-
-`Charging Fines/Fees <#chargefines>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Most fees and fines will be charged automatically if the `fines cron
-job <#finescronjob>`__ is running:
-
-- Fines will be charged based on your `Circulation & Fines
- Rules <#circfinerules>`__
-
-- Hold fees will be charged based on the rules you set in the `Patron
- Types & Categories <#patcats>`__ administration area
-
-- Rental fees will be charged based on the settings in your `Item
- Types <#itemtypeadmin>`__ administration area
-
-- Marking an item 'Lost' via the cataloging module will automatically
- charge the patron the replacement cost for that item
-
-`Pay/Reverse Fines <#payfines>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Each line item can be paid in full (or written off) using the 'Pay
-Fines' tab.
-
-Paying Fines
-|image451|
-
-- Each line item can be paid in full, partially paid, or written off.
-
-- Pay a fine in full
-
- - If you have a note about the payment please type that first then
- move on
-
- - Click "Pay" next to the fine you want to pay in full
-
- - The full amount of the fine will be populated for you in the
- "Collect From Patron" box
-
- Pay fine
- |image452|
-
- - Click "Confirm"
-
- - The fine will be removed from outstanding fines, and displayed as
- fully paid.
-
-- Pay a partial fine
-
- - Click "Pay" next to the fine you want to partially pay
-
- - Enter the amount you are collecting from the patron in the
- "Collect From Patron" box
-
- Pay partial fine
- |image453|
-
- - Click "Confirm"
-
- - The fine will be updated to show the original Amount, and the
- current Amount Outstanding
-
-- Pay an amount towards all fines
-
- - Click the "Pay Amount" button
-
- - Enter the amount you are collecting from the patron in "Collect
- from Patron." The sum of all fines is shown in "Total Amount
- Outstanding"
-
- Pay Amount
- |image454|
-
- - Click "Confirm"
-
- - The fine totals will be updated with the payment applied to oldest
- fines first.
-
-- Pay Selected fines
-
- - Check the selection boxes next to the fines you wish to pay, click
- "Pay Selected"
-
- Select lines to pay
- |image455|
-
- - Enter an amount to pay towards the fines.
-
- Pay Selected
- |image456|
-
- - Click "Confirm"
-
- - The fine totals will be updated with the payment applied to the
- oldest selected fines first.
-
-- Writeoff a single fine
-
- - Click "Writeoff" next to the fine you wish to writeoff.
-
- - The fine will be removed from outstanding fines, and displayed as
- written off.
-
-- Writeoff All fines
-
- - Click the "Writeoff All" button
-
- - All fines will be removed from outstanding fines, and displayed as
- written off.
-
-- If you accidentally mark and item as paid, you can reverse that line
- item by clicking 'Reverse' to the right of the line
-
- Reverse Link
- |image457|
-
- - Once clicked a new line item will be added to the account, showing
- the payment as reversed
-
- Reversed Payment
- |image458|
-
-`Creating Manual Invoices <#manualinvoice>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-For fees that are not automatically charged, librarians can create a
-manual invoice
-
-Create Manual Invoice
-|image459|
-
-- First choose the type of invoice you would like to create
-
- - To add additional values to the manual invoice type pull down
- menu, add them to the `MANUAL\_INV <#manualinvvals>`__ Authorized
- Value
-
- - **Important**
-
- The value set as the Authorized Value for the MANUAL\_INV
- authorized value category will appear as the Description and
- the Authorized Value Description will be used as the amount.
-
-- If the fee is associated with an item you can enter its barcode so
- that the line item shows a link to that item
-
-- The description field is where you will enter the description of the
- charge
-
-- In the amount field, do not enter currency symbols, only numbers and
- decimals
-
-`Creating Manual Credits <#manualcredit>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Manual credits can be used to pay off parts of fines, or to forgive a
-fine amount.
-
-Create Manual Credit
-|image460|
-
-- First choose the type of credit you'd like to apply
-
-- If this credit is associated with an item you can enter that item's
- barcode so that the line item links to the right item
-
-- The description field is where you will enter the description of the
- credit
-
-- In the amount field, do not enter currency symbols, only numbers and
- decimals
-
-`Printing Invoices <#printinglineitems>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-To the right of each account line there is a print link. Clicking that
-link will print an invoice for the line item that includes the date and
-description of the line item along with the total outstanding on the
-account.
-
-Sample Invoice
-|image461|
-
-`Routing Lists <#patronroutingtab>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-A list of all of the serial routing lists the patron belongs to will be
-accessible via the 'Routing Lists' tab on the patron record.
-
-Routing Lists
-|image462|
-
-On this tab you will be able to see and edit all of the routing lists
-that this patron is on.
-
-Patron's routing lists
-|image463|
-
-`Circulation History <#circhistory>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-The circulation history tab will appear if you have set the
-`intranetreadinghistory <#intranetreadinghistory>`__ preference to allow
-it to appear. If you have the `OPACPrivacy <#OPACPrivacy>`__ system
-preference set to 'Allow' and the patron has decided that the library
-cannot keep this information this tab will only show currently checked
-out items.
-
-Patron Circulation History
-|image464|
-
-If you would like to export a list of barcodes for the items checked in
-today you can find that option under the More menu on the top right of
-the page.
-
-Export today's checkins
-|image465|
-
-This will generate a text file with one barcode per line.
-
-`Modification Log <#patmodlog>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-If you have set your `BorrowersLog <#BorrowersLog>`__ to track changes
-to patron records, then this tab will appear. The Modification Log will
-show when changes were made to the patron record. If you also have
-turned on the `IssueLog <#IssueLog>`__ and `ReturnLog <#ReturnLog>`__
-you will see checkins and outs on this screen as well.
-
-Changes to Patron
-|image466|
-
-- The Librarian field shows the patron number for the librarian who
- made the changes
-
-- The module lists 'MEMBERS' for the patron module
-
-- The action will tell you what action was being logged
-
-- The Object field lists the borrowernumber that is being modified (in
- the example above, it was my changing my own record)
-
-`Notices <#patnotices>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-The `patron's messaging preferences <#setpatronmessaging>`__ are set
-when `adding <#addnewpatron>`__ or `editing <#editpatrons>`__ the
-patron. This tab will show the messages that have been sent and those
-that are queued to be sent:
-
-Patron Notices Tab
-|image467|
-
-Clicking on the message title will expand the view to show you the full
-text of the message that was sent.
-
-Full message text
-|image468|
-
-If the message has a status of sent or failed you will have the option
-to 'resend' the message to the patron by clicking the 'resentd button
-found under the status.
-
-Resend notice
-|image469|
-
-`Statistics <#patronstatstab>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Depending on what you set for the values of your
-`StatisticsFields <#StatisticsFields>`__ system preference, you can see
-statistics for one patron's circulation actions.
-
-Patron's Statistics
-|image470|
-
-`Files <#patronfiles>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-If you set the `EnableBorrowerFiles <#EnableBorrowerFiles>`__ preference
-to 'Do' the Files tab will be visible on the patron information page.
-
-Patron Files Tab
-|image471|
-
-From here you can upload files to attach to the patron record.
-
-Upload patron files
-|image472|
-
-All files that are uploaded will appear above a form where additional
-files can be uploaded from.
-
-List of files on the patron record
-|image473|
-
-`Purchase Suggestions <#patronsuggestions>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-If the patron has made any purchase suggestions you will see a purchase
-suggestions tab on the patron record.Patron purchase suggestions
-
-From here you can see all suggestions made by the patron and their
-status, you can also create a purchase suggestion on the patron's behalf
-by clicking the 'New purchase suggestion' button at the top.
-
-Learn more about `Purchase suggestions <#purchasesuggest>`__ in the
-`Acquisitions <#acqmodule>`__ chapter of this manual.
-
-`Patron discharges <#patrondischarge>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-A discharge is a certificate that says the patron has no current
-checkouts, no holds and owe no money. To enable this option on the
-patron record you need to set the `useDischarge <#useDischarge>`__
-system preference to 'Allow'.
-
- **Note**
-
- In France a "quitus" ("discharge") is needed if you want to register
- for an account in a library or a university).
-
- **Note**
-
- Academic libraries often require that you have a clear record at the
- library before you can graduate.
-
-Patrons can `request discharges via the OPAC <#opacdischarge>`__. Any
-pending discharges will be listed below the menu buttons on the main
-staff client pagePending discharges
-
-Clicking the pending requests will open a screen where you can allow
-those dischargesPending discharges
-
-To generate a discharge for a specific patron click the 'Discharge' tab
-on the left of the patron recordDischarge
-
-If the patron can have a discharge generated then it will have a button
-that says 'Generate discharge'
-
-Generate discharge
-|image474|
-
-If not then you'll see an error explaining why you can't discharge the
-patron.
-
-Cannot discharge
-|image475|
-
-Once the letter is generated you will have a PDF to download
-
-Discharge letter
-|image476|
-
- **Note**
-
- You can style the PDF using the `NoticeCSS <#NoticeCSS>`__
- preference.
-
-The patron will have a restriction added to their accountDischarge
-restriction
-
-And a history of discharges will be added to the 'Discharge'
-tabDischarge history
-
-`Patron Search <#patronsearch>`__
----------------------------------
-
-Clicking on the link to the Patron module will bring you to a
-search/browse screen for patrons. From here you can search for a patron
-by any part of their name or their card number.
-
-Patron Search
-|image477|
-
-Clicking the small plus sign [+] to the right of the search box will
-open up an advanced patron search with more filters including the
-ability to limit to a specific category and/or library.
-
-Expanded patron search
-|image478|
-
-You can also filter your patron results using the search options on the
-left hand side of the page.Patron search filters
-
-Depending on what you have chosen for the 'Search fields' you can search
-for patrons in various different ways.
-
-Patron Search Fields
-|image479|
-
-- Standard:
-
- - Enter any part of their name, username, email address or barcode
-
-- Email:
-
- - Enter any part of their email address and choose 'Contains'
- instead of 'Starts with'
-
-- Borrower number:
-
- - Enter the Koha borrower number
-
-- Phone number:
-
- - Enter the phone number exactly as it is in the system or by using
- spaces between each batch of numbers.
-
- - Example: To find (212) 555-1212 you can search for it exactly as
- it was entered or by searching for 212 555 1212
-
-- Street address:
-
- - Enter any part of the patron's address (includes all address
- fields) and choose 'Contains' instead of 'Starts with' to find the
- string anywhere in the address
-
-- Date of birth
-
- - Birth dates should be entered using the format set forth in the
- `dateformat <#dateformat>`__ preference.
-
-- Sort field 1
-
- - This is a custom field that libraries can use for any type of data
- about the patron.
-
-- Sort field 2
-
- - This is a custom field that libraries can use for any type of data
- about the patron.
-
-You can also choose to either search for fields that start with the
-string you entered or contain the string. Choosing 'Contains' will work
-like a wildcard search.
-
-Contains or Starts with Search
-|image480|
-
-You can also browse through the patron records by clicking on the linked
-letters across the top.
-
-Patron Browse
-|image481|
-
-Circulation
-===========
-
-Circulation functions can be accessed in several different ways. On the
-main page of the staff client there are some quick links in the center
-of the page to check items out, in or transfer them. For a complete
-listing of Circulation functions you can visit the Circulation page
-which is linked from the top left of every page or from the center of
-the main page.
-
-Before circulating your collection you will want to set your `Global
-System Preferences <#globalsysprefs>`__, `Basic
-Parameters <#basicparams>`__ and `Patrons & Circulation
-Rules <#patscirc>`__.
-
-While in Circulation you can jump between the tabs on the quick search
-box at the top of the screen by using the following hot keys:
-
-- jump to the catalog search with Alt+Q
-
-- jump to the checkout with Alt+U
-
- - this will not work for Mac users
-
-- jump to the checkin with Alt+R
-
- **Note**
-
- Mac users use the OPTION button in place of ALT
-
-`Check Out (Issuing) <#checkingout>`__
---------------------------------------
-
-To begin the checkout process you must enter the patron barcode or part
-of their name. The checkout option appears in three main places:
-
-- Check out option on the top of the main staff client
-
- Check out box on main Koha Staff Client page
- |image482|
-
-- Check out option on the patron record
-
- Check out tab on a patron record
- |image483|
-
-- If you have enabled `batch checkouts <#batchcheckoutprefs>`__ then
- click the batch check out option on the patron recordBatch checkout
-
-- Check out option on the quick search bar on the circulation page
-
- Check out tab on quick search bar
- |image484|
-
-`Checking Items Out <#checkitemout>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-To check an item out to a patron, first search for that patron using one
-of the many options listed above. You will then be presented with the
-checkout screen.
-
-Check Out Screen
-|image485|
-
-If you have chosen to 'Always show checkouts immediately' then you will
-see the list of checkouts below the check out box.
-
-Check Out Screen
-|image486|
-
-At the top of the Check Out screen is a box for you to type or scan the
-item's barcode into.
-
-- **Important**
-
- Many modern barcode scanners will send a 'return' to the browser,
- making it so that the 'Check Out' button is automatically clicked
-
-- If the barcode is not found you will be prompted to use fast
- cataloging to add the item. Learn more about `fast
- cataloging <#fastaddcat>`__ later in this manual.
-
-- If you have
- `itemBarcodeFallbackSearch <#itemBarcodeFallbackSearch>`__ set to
- 'Enable' then you can enter a keyword search in this box instead of
- just a barcode (this will make it possible to check out using title
- and/or call number).
-
-To see more checkout options click the 'Checkout settings' link to
-expand the checkout area.Checkout settings
-
-Below the box for the barcode there may be options for you to override
-the default due date for the item.
-
-- This option will only appear if you have set the
- `SpecifyDueDate <#SpecifyDueDate>`__ system preference to allow staff
- to override the due date
-
-Below the box for the barcode you will see a checkbox for 'Automatic
-renewal'. This will allow this item to automatically renew if the
-`appropriate cron job <#autorenewcron>`__ is running and there are no
-holds on the item.
-
-Next is an option to no decrease the loan length based on holds. This
-overrides the `decreaseLoanHighHolds <#decreaseLoanHighHolds>`__
-preference.
-
-If you're allowing the `checkout of items on site <#OnSiteCheckouts>`__
-to patrons (these are usually items that are not for loan that you would
-like to check for in library use) then you will see the 'On-site
-checkout' checkbox after clicking the 'Checkout settings' link to expand
-your circulation options.On-site checkout
-
-At the bottom of the page there is a summary of the patron's current
-checked out items along with the due date (and time if the item is an
-hourly loan), items checked out today will appear at the top.
-
- **Note**
-
- Items that are hourly loan items will include the time with the due
- date.
-
-Patron's checkout summary
-|image487|
-
-If you checked out an item for on site use you will see that highlighted
-in red in the checkout summary.
-
-Patron's on-site checkout
-|image488|
-
-If you have set your `ExportWithCsvProfile <#ExportWithCsvProfile>`__
-preference, you will also see the option to export the patron's current
-checkout information using a CSV Profile or ISO2709 (MARC21) format.
-
-Export patron's checkout information
-|image489|
-
-Also at the bottom of the page is the list of items the patron has on
-hold
-
-Holds summary on check out screen
-|image490|
-
-From the holds list you can suspend or resume patrons holds using the
-options at the bottom of the list if you have the
-`SuspendHoldsIntranet <#SuspendHoldsIntranet>`__ preference set to
-'allow.'
-
- **Note**
-
- If you have your
- `AutoResumeSuspendedHolds <#AutoResumeSuspendedHolds>`__ preference
- set to "Don't allow" then you will not have the option to put an end
- date on the hold suspension
-
-If there are notes on the patron record these will appear to the right
-of the checkout box
-
-Patron notes on check out screen
-|image491|
-
-If the patron has a hold waiting at the library that too will appear to
-the right of the check out box making it easy for the circulation
-librarian to see that there is another item to give the patron
-
-Hold waiting message on check out screen
-|image492|
-
-The details of the checkouts will appear on the bib detail page in the
-staff client as well.
-
-Circulation information on holdings tab
-|image493|
-
-`Printing Receipts <#printcircreceipt>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-Once you have checked out all of the items for the patron you can print
-them a receipt by choosing one of two methods.
-
-If you have the `CircAutoPrintQuickSlip <#CircAutoPrintQuickSlip>`__
-preference set to 'open a print quick slip window' you can simply hit
-enter on your keyboard or scan a blank piece of paper with your barcode
-scanner. The idea being that you're "checking out" a blank barcode which
-triggers Koha to print the 'Quick slip.'
-
-You can also click the Print button at the top of the screen and choose
-'Print slip' or 'Print quick slip'.
-
-Print receipt to slip printer
-|image494|
-
-If you choose 'Print slip' it will print all of the items the patron has
-checked out, including those they checked out at an earlier date.
-Choosing 'Print quick slip' will print only the items that were checked
-out today.
-
-'Print summary' will generate a full page summary for the patron's
-circulation information and 'Print overdues' will print out a slip that
-lists all items that are overdue.
-
-What prints on the slips can be customized by altering the slip
-templates under the `Notices & Slips <#notices>`__ tool.
-
-`Clear Patron Information <#clearpatroninfo>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-When you're done checking an item out if you have the
-`DisplayClearScreenButton <#DisplayClearScreenButton>`__ preference set
-to 'Show' you can clear the current patron by clicking the X in the top
-right of the patron's info to remove the current patron from the screen
-and start over.
-
-Clear Screen Button
-|image495|
-
-If you have the `CircAutoPrintQuickSlip <#CircAutoPrintQuickSlip>`__
-preference set to 'clear the screen' then you simply need to hit enter
-or scan a blank barcode and the screen will be cleared of the current
-patron.
-
-`Batch Checkouts <#batchcheckout>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-If you would like to perform a batch check out you can do so by turning
-on the `BatchCheckouts <#BatchCheckouts>`__ system preference and
-assigning the proper patron categories via the
-`BatchCheckoutsValidCategories <#BatchCheckoutsValidCategories>`__
-preference. This will allow you to use an RFID pad that reads multiple
-barcodes or perform a batch check out for training internal use.Batch
-checkouts
-
-From this screen you can scan several barcodes or load a file of
-barcodes. If those items cannot be checked out they will provide a
-warning on the following screen
-
-Batch checkout warnings
-|image496|
-
-If you are using a statistical patron type then you'll see that local
-use was recorded for each item you scanned.
-
-Batch local use
-|image497|
-
-`Check Out Messages <#checkoutmsg>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-If you check out an item that has multiple pieces and you have cataloged
-that information in subfield 3 of the item record (in MARC21) a message
-will pop up when you check out that item telling you how many pieces
-should be there.
-
-Materials in the checked out item
-|image498|
-
-There are times when Koha will prevent the librarian from being able to
-check out items to a patron. When this happens a warning will appear
-notifying the librarian of why the patron cannot check items out.
-
-- Patron owes too much in fines
-
- Patron owes too much in fines
- |image499|
-
- - You can set the amount at which patron checkouts are blocked with
- the `noissuescharge <#noissuescharge>`__ system preference
-
-- Patron has a restriction on their account
-
- Patron account restricted
- |image500|
-
- - This can be set by the librarian editing a patron record and
- adding a `restriction <#patronflags>`__ or by the `Overdue/Notice
- Status Triggers <#noticetriggers>`__
-
- - If the staff member has the right permission they can override the
- restriction temporarily
-
- Patron account restricted
- |image501|
-
-- Patron needs to confirm their address
-
- Patron's address warning
- |image502|
-
- - This can be set by the librarian editing a patron record and
- adding a `flag <#patronflags>`__
-
-- Patrons has lost their library card
-
- Lost patron card warning
- |image503|
-
- - This can be set by the librarian editing a patron record and
- adding a `flag <#patronflags>`__
-
-`Check Out Warnings <#checkoutwarn>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Sometimes checkouts will trigger warning messages that will appear in a
-yellow box above the check out field. These warnings need to be
-acknowledged before you will be able to continue checking items out.
-
-- Patron has outstanding fines
-
- Patron has a debt
- |image504|
-
-- Item on hold for someone else
-
- Item is on hold for someone else
- |image505|
-
-- Item should be on the hold shelf waiting for someone else
-
- Item is on hold shelf waiting for someone else
- |image506|
-
-- Item already checked out to this patron
-
- Item is currently checked out to this patron
- |image507|
-
-- Item checked out to another patron
-
- Item checked out to another patron
- |image508|
-
- - This warning will allow you to place a hold on the item for the
- patron you're trying to check it out to.
-
-- Item not for loan
-
- Item is not normally for loan
- |image509|
-
-- Patron has too many things checked out and
- `AllowTooManyOverride <#AllowTooManyOverride>`__ is set to 'Allow'
-
- Too many checkouts
- |image510|
-
-- Patron has too many things checked out and
- `AllowTooManyOverride <#AllowTooManyOverride>`__ is set to "Don't
- allow"
-
- Too many checkouts
- |image511|
-
-- Item cannot be renewed
-
- No more renewals
- |image512|
-
- - This can be overridden with the
- `AllowRenewalLimitOverride <#AllowRenewalLimitOverride>`__ system
- preference
-
-- Barcode not found
-
- Barcode not found
- |image513|
-
- - Learn more about `fast cataloging <#fastaddcat>`__ later in this
- manual.
-
-- Item being checked out is marked as 'lost'
-
- - Depending on the value in your `IssueLostItem <#IssueLostItem>`__
- preference, you may just see a warning
-
- Warning that item is lost
- |image514|
-
- or a confirmation box
-
- Confirm checkout of lost item
- |image515|
-
-- Item being checked out is not recommended for a patron of this age
-
- Age warning
- |image516|
-
-- Item being checked out meets the
- `decreaseLoanHighHolds <#decreaseLoanHighHolds>`__ system preference
- criteria
-
- Too many holds
- |image517|
-
-`Renewing <#circrenew>`__
--------------------------
-
-Checked out items can be renewed (checked out for another period of
-time) based on your `circulation rules <#circfinerules>`__ and `renewal
-preferences <#RenewalPeriodBase>`__.
-
-If `you allow it <#OpacRenewalAllowed>`__, patrons can renew their own
-items via the OPAC, but sometimes you'll need to help them by renewing
-their items via the staff client.
-
-To renew items checked out to a patron, you can do one of two things.
-
-The first is to visit their details page or checkout page and review
-their checkout summary at the bottom.
-
-Circulation Summary
-|image518|
-
-In the Renew column you will see how many times each item has been
-renewed and a checkbox to renew the item for the patron. Check the boxed
-of the items you would like to renew and click the 'Renew or Return
-checked items' button, or to renew all items checked out to the patron
-simply click the 'Renew all' button.
-
-Renew buttons
-|image519|
-
-Sometimes renewals will be blocked based on your circulation rules, to
-override this block you must have your
-`AllowRenewalLimitOverride <#AllowRenewalLimitOverride>`__ preference
-set to 'Allow'. If you allow renewal limit overrides, you will see a
-checkbox at the bottom left of the circulation summary. Check that box
-and then choose the items you would like to renew.
-
-Override renewal limit
-|image520|
-
-Checking that box will add checkboxes in the renew column above where
-before the item was not renewable.
-
-The second option is to visit the 'Renew' page found under the
-Circulation menu.
-
-Renew
-|image521|
-
-And scan the barcodes of the items you would like to renew.
-
-Barcode to renew
-|image522|
-
-If the item is renewed you will receive a confirmation message.
-
-Item renewed
-|image523|
-
-If the barcode is not found you will be presented with an error.
-
-No barcode found
-|image524|
-
-If the item is not actually checked out you will also receive an error.
-
-Item not checked out
-|image525|
-
-`Check In (Returning) <#checkingin>`__
---------------------------------------
-
-Checking in items can be performed from various different locations
-
-- The check in box on the top of the main staff client
-
- Check out box on main Koha Staff Client page
- |image526|
-
-- The check in option on the quick search bar on the Circulation page
-
- Check in tab on quick search bar
- |image527|
-
-- The check in link on the patron's checkout summary (and on the
- checkout summary page)
-
- Patron checkout summary includes 'Check In' link
- |image528|
-
-- The Check in page under the Circulation menu
-
- Check in link on Circulation Module
- |image529|
-
-`Checking Items In <#checkitemin>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-To check an item in scan the barcode for the item into the box provided.
-A summary of all items checked in will appear below the checkin box
-
-Check In Summary
-|image530|
-
-If you are checking items in that were put in the book drop while the
-library was closed you can check the 'Book drop mode' box before
-scanning items. This will effectively roll back the returned date to the
-last date the library was open.
-
-- This requires that you have your closings added to the `Holidays &
- Calendar Tool <#calholidays>`__
-
-You can also choose to forgive all overdue charges for items you are
-checking in by checking the 'Forgive overdue charges' box before
-scanning items.
-
-If you have the `SpecifyReturnDate <#SpecifyReturnDate>`__ preference
-set to 'Allow' you will be able to arbitrarily set the return date from
-below the check in box.Specify check in date
-
-`Check In Messages <#checkinmsg>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-There are several messages that can appear when checking items in:
-
-- If you are checking an item in at a library other than the home
- branch, a message will appear asking you to transfer the book to the
- home library
-
- Check in Transfer Message
- |image531|
-
- - After this item is checked in the status of the item will be
- changed in the catalog to 'in transit'
-
- In Transit Status
- |image532|
-
- - To mark an item as back at the home branch, check the item in at
- the home branch
-
- Check In Transferred Item
- |image533|
-
- - A message will appear tell you that the item is not checked
- out, but the status will now say available in the catalog. This
- step is necessary to mark items as received by the home branch.
-
-- If you are checking in an item that should have multiple parts or
- pieces a message will appear warning you about the number of pieces
- you should have in your hand
-
- Materials Specified
- |image534|
-
-- If you're checking an item in that has a hold on it, you will be
- prompted to confirm the hold
-
- Hold Found Check In Message
- |image535|
-
- - Clicking the Confirm hold button will mark the item as waiting for
- pickup from the library
-
- Hold waiting at the library
- |image536|
-
- - Clicking the Print Slip and Confirm button will mark the item as
- waiting for pickup at the library and present the library with a
- receipt to print and place on the book with the patron's
- information
-
- - Ignoring the hold will leave the item on hold, but leave its
- status as Available (it will not cancel the hold)
-
-- If you're checking in an item that has a hold on it at another branch
- you will be prompted to confirm and transfer the item
-
- Hold found for another branch
- |image537|
-
- - Clicking the Confirm hold and Transfer button will mark the item
- as in transit to the library where the hold was placed
-
- In transit hold status
- |image538|
-
- - Clicking the Print Slip, Transfer and Confirm button will mark the
- item as in transit to the library where the hold was placed and
- present the library with a receipt to print and place on the book
- with the patron's information
-
- - Ignoring the hold will leave the item on hold, but leave its
- status as Available (it will not cancel the hold)
-
-- If you have the system showing you fines at the time of checkin
- (`FineNotifyAtCheckin <#FineNotifyAtCheckin>`__) you will see a
- message telling you about the fine and providing you a link to the
- payment page for that patron
-
- FineNotifyAtCheckin
- |image539|
-
-`Circulation Messages <#circmessages>`__
-----------------------------------------
-
-Circulation messages are short messages that librarians can leave for
-their patrons or their colleagues that will appear at the time of
-circulation.
-
-`Setting up Messages <#setcircmsg>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Circulation messages are set up as `Authorized
-Values <#authorizedvalues>`__. To add or edit Circulation Messages you
-want to work with the `BOR\_NOTES <#bornotes>`__ value.
-
-BOR\_NOTES Authorized Values
-|image540|
-
-The 'Description' field can hold a canned message that you would like to
-appear on the patron's record.
-
- **Important**
-
- The 'Description' field is limited to 80 characters, but the patron
- message field can hold more than that. Enter 80 characters in the
- 'Description' field and then type the rest on the patron record.
-
-`Adding a Message <#addcircmsg>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-When on the patron's check out tab you will see a link to 'Add a new
-message' to the right of the check out box and a button at the top to
-'Add message'.
-
-Circulation Message in Staff Client
-|image541|
-
-When you click either of these options you will be asked to choose if
-the message is for the librarians or the patron and the message you
-would like to leave.
-
-Leave a Circulation Message
-|image542|
-
- **Note**
-
- A message for the patron will also show to the library staff.
-
-`Viewing Messages <#viewcircmsg>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Circulation messages meant for the staff and/or the patron will appear
-on the patron's checkout screen to the right of the checkout box.
-Messages in bold and red are meant for the library staff only, whereas
-messages in regular italics font are meant for the patron and the
-librarian.
-
-Circulation Message in Staff Client
-|image543|
-
-Circulation messages meant for the patron will also appear when they log
-into the OPAC.
-
-Circulation Message in OPAC
-|image544|
-
-`Holds <#holds>`__
-------------------
-
-Koha allows patrons to put things on hold. A 'Hold' is a way to reserve
-an item. Depending on your `circulation and fine
-rules <#circfinerules>`__ and `hold preference <#circholdspolicy>`__
-settings patrons will be able to place items on hold for pickup at the
-library at a later date/time.
-
-`Placing Holds in Staff Client <#holdsinstaff>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-There are several ways to place holds from the staff client. The most
-obvious is using the 'Place Hold' button at the top of any bibliographic
-record.
-
-Place Hold Button on Bib Record
-|image545|
-
-You can also click the smaller 'Place Hold' link found at the top of
-your catalog search results, or the 'Holds' link found below each
-result.
-
-Hold options on search results
-|image546|
-
-You will be asked to search for a patron by barcode or any part of their
-name to start the hold process.
-
-Find Patron For Hold
-|image547|
-
-If you'd like to search for the patron first and then the bib record for
-the hold, you can open the patron record and click on the 'Search to
-Hold' button at the top of the patron record.
-
-Search to Hold on Patron Record
-|image548|
-
-After clicking the button you will be brought to the catalog search page
-where you can find the book(s) you want to place a hold on. Under each
-title on the results you'll see an option to 'Hold for Patron Name.'
-
-Hold for Patron links on Search Results
-|image549|
-
-If you want to place a hold on multiple items, simply check the boxes to
-the left of them and click the arrow to the right of the 'Place Hold'
-button.
-
-Hold Multiple Items for Patron
-|image550|
-
-Depending on how many items you choose to place a hold on at once you
-will see a different place hold form. If you are placing a hold on one
-bibliographic record you will see a list of all of the items you can
-place a hold on.
-
-Place Hold Form
-|image551|
-
-- Enter any notes that might apply to this hold
-
-- Choose the library where the patron will pick up the item
-
-- If you have the
- `AllowHoldItemTypeSelection <#AllowHoldItemTypeSelection>`__
- preference set to 'Allow' and the record had more than one item type
- attached you will see an option to choose to limit the hold to a
- specific item typeAllowHoldItemTypeSelection
-
-- If the patron wants the hold to start on a date other than today,
- enter that in the 'Hold starts on date' field
-
- - This option will only appear if the
- `AllowHoldDateInFuture <#AllowHoldDateInFuture>`__ system
- preference is set to 'Allow'
-
-- If the patron has specified that they don't want the item after a
- certain date, or if you have limits on hold lengths, you can enter an
- expiration date for the hold in the 'Hold expires on date'
-
- - To have expired holds canceled automatically you will need to have
- the `Expired Holds <#expiredholdscron>`__ cron job set to run on a
- regular basis.
-
-- Next choose if you want to place a hold on the next available item or
- a specific item by clicking the radio button next to an individual
- item.
-
-If you're placing a hold on multiple items you will be presented with
-the next available option for all titles. If no items are available for
-hold it will say so on the confirmation screen.
-
-Place multiple items on hold
-|image552|
-
-Once your hold is placed, if you'd like to have Koha forget that you
-used the 'Search to Hold' function, you can choose to have Koha 'forget'
-the patron's name by clicking the arrow to the right of the 'Place Hold'
-button on the search results and choosing the 'Forget' option.
-
-Forget Search to Hold Option
-|image553|
-
-`Managing Holds <#manageholds>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Holds can be altered and canceled from the Holds tab found on the left
-of the bibliographic record.
-
-Bibliographic Record Tabs
-|image554|
-
-From the list of holds you can change the order of the holds, the pickup
-location, suspend and/or cancel the hold.
-
-Lists of Holds
-|image555|
-
- **Note**
-
- If you have your
- `AutoResumeSuspendedHolds <#AutoResumeSuspendedHolds>`__ preference
- set to "Don't allow" then you will not have the option to put an end
- date on the hold suspension
-
- **Note**
-
- Depending on how you have your `HidePatronName <#HidePatronName>`__
- system preference set the list may show card numbers instead of
- names in the Patron column like in the image above.
-
-To rearrange or delete holds, simply make a selection from the
-'Priority' pull down or click the arrows to the right of the priority
-pull down.
-
-Hold Priority Menu
-|image556|
-
-If you use the priority pull down to rearrange or delete holds you will
-need to click the 'Update hold(s)' button to save your changes.
-
-Clicking the down arrow to the right of the hold will stick the hold at
-the bottom of the list even if more requests are made.
-
-For example, your library has home-bound patrons that are allowed to
-keep books out for months at a time. It would not be fair to other
-patrons if a home-bound patron were able to check out a brand new book
-and keep it for months. For this reason, the home-bound patron's hold
-request would stay at the bottom of the queue until everyone else who
-wanted to read that book has already done so.
-
-Lowest Priority & Delete Options for Holds
-|image557|
-
-If a patron asks to have their hold suspended and you have the
-`SuspendHoldsIntranet <#SuspendHoldsIntranet>`__ system preference set
-to 'allow' you can do so by clicking the Suspend button to far right. If
-the patron gives you a date for the items to become unsuspended you can
-enter that in the date box and click the 'Update hold(s)' button to save
-your changes.
-
-Hold suspension column
-|image558|
-
-To delete or cancel a hold click the red 'X' to the right of the hold
-line. To delete/cancel a bunch of holds you can choose 'del' from pull
-down to the left of each line and then click 'Update hold(s)' at the
-bottom of the list.
-
-Cancel Holds
-|image559|
-
-`Receiving Holds <#receiveholds>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-When items that are on hold are `checked in <#checkingin>`__ or
-`out <#checkingout>`__ the system will remind the circulation librarian
-that the item is on hold and offer them options for managing the hold.
-
-When you check in an item that has a hold on it the system will ask you
-to either confirm and transfer the item
-
-Confirm Hold & Transfer
-|image560|
-
-or just confirm the hold
-
-Confirm Hold
-|image561|
-
-Clicking the Confirm button will mark the item as on hold for the
-patron. If the item needs to be transferred the item will also be marked
-as in transit to the proper branch. Clicking 'Ignore' will retain the
-hold, but allow you to check the item out to another patron. Choosing to
-confirm and print will present you with a printable page that you can
-slip inside the book with the necessary hold and/or transfer
-information.
-
-Once confirmed the hold will show on the patron record and on the
-checkout screen under the 'Hold' tab.
-
-Hold on Patron Record
-|image562|
-
-From here if the patron would like you suspend their holds you can do so
-one by one or in bulk.
-
-The item record will also show that the item is on hold.
-
-Hold on Item Record
-|image563|
-
-In some cases a patron may come in to pick up a hold for their partner
-(or someone else in their household). In this case you want to make sure
-that the hold is cancelled when you check the item out to someone else.
-When trying to check out an item that is already waiting for someone
-else you will be presented with a warning message.
-
-Hold waiting for someone else
-|image564|
-
-From here you can check the item out to the patron at the desk and
-cancel the hold for the patron.
-
-`Transfers <#transfers>`__
---------------------------
-
-If you work in a multi-branch system you can transfer items from one
-library to another by using the Transfer tool.
-
-- *Get there*: Circulation > Transfer
-
-To transfer an item
-
-- Click 'Transfer' on the Circulation page
-
- Transfer Tool
- |image565|
-
- - Enter the library you would like to transfer the item to
-
- - Scan or type the barcode on the item you would like to transfer
-
-- Click 'Submit'
-
- Transfer Summary
- |image566|
-
-- The item will now say that it is in transit
-
- Item in Transit
- |image567|
-
-- When the item arrives at the other branch the librarian must check
- the item in to acknowledge that it is no longer in transit
-
-- The item will not be permanently moved to the new library
-
- Item record
- |image568|
-
- - The item shows the same 'Home Library' but has updated the
- 'Current Location' to note where it resides at this time
-
-`Set Library <#setlibrary>`__
------------------------------
-
-By default you will enter the staff client as if you are at your home
-library. This library will appear in the top right of the Staff Client.
-
-My Library
-|image569|
-
-This is the library that all circulation transactions will take place
-at. If you are at another library (or on a bookmobile) you will want to
-set your library before you start circulating items. To do this you can
-click 'Set' at the top right or on the Circulation page.
-
-Set Library Form
-|image570|
-
-Once you have saved your changes you new library will appear in the top
-right.
-
-`Fast Add Cataloging <#fastaddcat>`__
--------------------------------------
-
-Sometimes circulation librarians need to quickly add a record to the
-system for an item they are about to check out. This is called 'Fast
-Add.' To allow circulation librarians access to the Fast Add Cataloging
-tool, simply make sure they have the
-`fast\_cataloging <#fastaddpermissions>`__ permissions. There are two
-ways to add titles via fast add. If you know that you're about to check
-out an item that isn't in you catalog you can go to the Circulation
-module and click 'Fast cataloging.'
-
-Circulation Menu
-|image571|
-
-The cataloging interface will open up with the short cataloging record:
-
-Fast Add Framework
-|image572|
-
-After adding your cataloging data you will be asked to enter item data.
-Enter the items barcode, collection code, etc and save the item before
-checking it out.
-
-The other way to fast catalog is from the checkout screen. When you
-enter a barcode at checkout that Koha can't find, it will prompt you to
-use fast cataloging to add the item to Koha and check it out.
-
-Barcode not found
-|image573|
-
-Clicking 'Fast cataloging' will bring you to the fast cataloging form
-where you can enter the title information
-
-Fast cataloging
-|image574|
-
-After clicking 'Save' you will be brought to the item record where the
-barcode will already be filled in with the barcode you're trying to
-check out.
-
-Fast cataloging item record
-|image575|
-
-After clicking the 'Add item' button the item will automatically be
-checked out the patron you were trying to check the book out to
-originally.
-
-Checked out item
-|image576|
-
-`Circulation Reports <#circreports>`__
---------------------------------------
-
-Most reports can be found via the Reports module, but some of the more
-common circulation reports are available right from the Circulation
-module.
-
-- *Get there*: Circulation > Circulation reports
-
-`Holds Queue <#holdsqueue>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-This report will show you all of the holds at your library.
-
-Sample Holds Queue
-|image577|
-
-To generate this report, you must have the `Build Holds Queue cron
-job <#buildholdscron>`__ running. This cron job is a script that should
-be run periodically if your library system allows borrowers to place
-on-shelf holds. This script decides which library should be responsible
-for fulfilling a given hold request.
-
-It's behavior is controlled by the system preferences
-`StaticHoldsQueueWeight <#holdqueueweight>`__ and
-`RandomizeHoldsQueueWeight <#holdqueueweight>`__.
-
-If you do not want all of your libraries to participate in the on-shelf
-holds fulfillment process, you should list the libraries that \*do\*
-participate in the process here by inputting all the participating
-library's branchcodes, separated by commas ( e.g. "MPL,CPL,SPL,BML" etc.
-).
-
-By default, the holds queue will be generated such that the system will
-first attempt to hold fulfillment using items already at the pickup
-library if possible. If there are no items available at the pickup
-library to fill a hold, build\_holds\_queue.pl will then use the list of
-libraries defined in StaticHoldsQueueWeight. If
-RandomizeHoldsQueueWeight is disabled ( which it is by default ), the
-script will assign fulfillment requests in the order the branches are
-placed in the StaticHoldsQueueWeight system preference.
-
-For example, if your system has three libraries, of varying sizes (
-small, medium and large ) and you want the burden of holds fulfillment
-to be on larger libraries before smaller libraries, you would want
-StaticHoldsQueueWeight to look something like "LRG,MED,SML".
-
-If you want the burden of holds fulfillment to be spread out equally
-throughout your library system, simply enable RandomizeHoldsQueueWeight.
-When this system preference is enabled, the order in which libraries
-will be requested to fulfill an on-shelf hold will be randomized each
-time the list is regenerated.
-
-Leaving StaticHoldsQueueWeight empty is contraindicated at this time.
-Doing so will cause the build\_holds\_queue script to ignore
-RandomizeHoldsQueueWeight, causing the script to request hold
-fulfillment not randomly, but by alphabetical order.
-
-`Holds to pull <#holdspull>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-This report will show you all of the items that have holds on them that
-are available at the library for pulling. If the items are available at
-multiple branches then all branches with that item available will see
-the hold to pull until one library triggers the hold.
-
-Holds to Pull
-|image578|
-
-You can limit the results you see by using the Refine box on the left
-side of the page:
-
-Refine Holds to Pull Report
-|image579|
-
-`Holds awaiting pickup <#holdspickup>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-This report will show all of the holds that are waiting for patrons to
-pick them up.
-
-Holds Awaiting Pickup
-|image580|
-
-Items that have been on the hold shelf longer than you normally allow
-(based on the `ReservesMaxPickUpDelay <#ReservesMaxPickUpDelay>`__
-preference value) will appear on the 'Holds Over' tab, they will not
-automatically be cancelled unless you have set the `cron
-job <#expiredholdscron>`__ to do that for you, but you can cancel all
-holds using the button at the top of the list.
-
-Items waiting on the hold shelf too long
-|image581|
-
-`Hold ratios <#holdratios>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Hold ratios help with collection development. Using this report you will
-be able to see how many of your patrons have holds on items and whether
-you should buy more. By default it will be set to the library needing 3
-items per hold that has been placed. The report will tell you how many
-additional items need to be purchased to meet this quota.
-
-Hold Ratios
-|image582|
-
-`Transfers to receive <#transferstoreceive>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-This report will list all of the items that Koha thinks are in transit
-to your library.
-
-Transfers to Receive
-|image583|
-
-If your transfers are late in arriving at your library you will see a
-message stating how late your items are.
-
-Late transfers include warning messages
-|image584|
-
- **Important**
-
- An item is considered late based on the number of days you have
- entered in the
- `TransfersMaxDaysWarning <#TransfersMaxDaysWarning>`__ system
- preference.
-
-`Overdues <#overduesreport>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
- **Important**
-
- For libraries with a large patron base, this report may take a
- significant amount of time to run.
-
- **Note**
-
- Large libraries can choose to filter the report before it runs by
- setting the
- `FilterBeforeOverdueReport <#FilterBeforeOverdueReport>`__ system
- preference to 'Require'.
-
-This report will list all items that are overdue at your library.
-
-Overdues List
-|image585|
-
-The report can be filtered using the menu options found on the left of
-the report.
-
- **Note**
-
- The 'Show any items currently checked out' checkbox basically
- switches this from a report of overdues to a report of checkouts. It
- will show all titles checked out regardless of due date.
-
-`Overdues with fines <#overduesfines>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-This report will show you any overdues at your library that have accrued
-fines on them.
-
-Overdues with fines
-|image586|
-
-If you would like to limit the report you can use the pull down menu at
-the top to limit to a specific shelving location at your branch. To see
-overdues with fines at other branches you will have to `change your
-branch <#setlibrary>`__ or log in at that branch.
-
- **Important**
-
- If you do not charge fines and/or don't have the `fines cron
- job <#finescronjob>`__ running you will see no data on this report.
-
-`Pending on-site checkouts <#pendingonsite>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-If you are using the on site checkouts functionality
-(`OnSiteCheckouts <#OnSiteCheckouts>`__) then you'll have a report to
-view all items that are currently checked out on site.Pending onsite
-checkouts
-
-This will list the due date (overdues in red), who has the item, item
-information and what library the item is at.
-
-`Tracking In house Use <#trackinhouse>`__
------------------------------------------
-
-Many libraries track the use of items within the library.
-
- **Note**
-
- This is different from tracking on site usage. In house use is the
- use of items in the library by patrons without them having to check
- them out. On site use is the use of items on site that must first be
- checked out. To learn more about on site usage please review the
- `OnSiteCheckouts <#OnSiteCheckouts>`__ preference.
-
-Tracking the use of items in the library without checking them out can
-be done in Koha one of two ways. The first is to create one or more
-`Statistical Patrons <#addstatspatron>`__. When collecting items that
-have been used within the library, you will want to check them out to
-your statistical patron:
-
-Check Out Items to Stats Patron
-|image587|
-
-Instead of marking the item as 'checked out' the system will record that
-the item was used in house:
-
-Local Use Recorded
-|image588|
-
-Repeat these steps for all items that have been used within the library
-to keep accurate statistics for item use.
-
-The other way to record local use of items is to set your
-`RecordLocalUseOnReturn <#RecordLocalUseOnReturn>`__ preference to
-'Record.' Then whenever you check an item in that is not checked out and
-not on hold a local use will be recorded.
-
-Local Use Recorded
-|image589|
-
- **Note**
-
- If you have `RecordLocalUseOnReturn <#RecordLocalUseOnReturn>`__ set
- to 'Record' you can still use your statistical patrons to record
- local use as well.
-
-`In Processing / Book Cart Locations <#processinglocations>`__
---------------------------------------------------------------
-
-Koha allows for handling temporary locations like the processing center
-and/or book carts throughout the library. For this feature to work you
-must first make sure you have `authorized values <#authorizedvalues>`__
-set in the `LOC <#shelvelocvals>`__ category for PROC (Processing
-Center) and CART (Book Cart).
-
-CART & PROC values in LOC
-|image590|
-
-Next you need to set the
-`NewItemsDefaultLocation <#NewItemsDefaultLocation>`__ system preference
-to PROC. This will set the new items to the Processing Center as their
-default location.
-
-When creating items you enter in their desired final shelving location
-and Koha will temporarily change that to PROC. If
-`InProcessingToShelvingCart <#InProcessingToShelvingCart>`__ is set to
-"Don't move" then when an item with a location of PROC is checked in it
-will either automatically update the item to use the permanent location.
-If `InProcessingToShelvingCart <#InProcessingToShelvingCart>`__ is set
-to "Move" then when an item is checked in the location is changed from
-PROC to CART.
-
-A `cron job <#proccartcron>`__ is then set to run at specified intervals
-to age items from CART to the permanent shelving location. (For example,
-an hourly cron entry of cart\_to\_shelf.pl --hours 3 where --hours is
-the amount of time an item should spend on the cart before aging to its
-permanent location.)
-
-- **Note**
-
- If the `ReturnToShelvingCart <#ReturnToShelvingCart>`__ system
- preference is set to "Move", any newly checked-in item is also
- automatically put into the shelving cart, to be covered by the
- same script run.
-
-- **Important**
-
- Checkins with confirmed holds will not go into the shelving cart.
- If items on the shelving cart are checked out, the cart location
- will be cleared.
-
-`Self Checkout <#selfcheckout>`__
----------------------------------
-
-Koha comes with a very basic self checkout module. To enable this module
-you need to set the `WebBasedSelfCheck <#WebBasedSelfCheck>`__
-preference to 'Enable.' To use this module you have to log in as a
-`staff member <#addstaffpatron>`__ with `circulation
-permissions <#patronpermissions>`__.
-
- **Note**
-
- Create a `staff patron <#addstaffpatron>`__ specifically for this
- action so that you don't leave a real staff client logged into a
- computer all day
-
-There is no link to the Self Checkout module, but a simple addition to
-the `IntranetUserJS <#intranetuserjs>`__ system preference can add one.
-
-::
-
- $(document).ready(function(){ $("#login
- #submit").parent().after("
\|{ 088a }\|
-
-Configuring Receipt Printers
-============================
-
-The following instructions are for specific receipt printers, but can
-probably be used to help with setup of other brands as well.
-
-`For Epson TM-T88III (3) & TM-T88IV (4) Printers <#epsonprinters>`__
---------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-`In the Print Driver <#epsonprintdriver>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-For these instructions, we are using version 5,0,3,0 of the Epson
-TM-T88III print driver; the EPSON TM-T88IV version is ReceiptE4.
-Register at the `EpsonExpert Technical Resource Center
-website `__ to gain access to the
-drivers; go to Technical Resources, then choose the printer model from
-the Printers drop-down list.
-
-Click Start > Printers and Faxes > Right click the receipt printer >
-Properties:
-
-- Advanced Tab, click Printing Defaults button
-
-- Layout Tab: Paper size: Roll Paper 80 x 297mm
-
-- TM-T88III: Layout Tab: Check Reduce Printing and Fit to Printable
- Width
-
-- TM-T88IV: Check Reduced Size Print; Click OK on the popup window that
- appears. Fit to Printable Width should be automatically selected.
-
-- OK your way out of there.
-
-`In Firefox <#epsonfirefox>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Under File > Page Setup:
-
-- Shrink to fit page on Format & Options tab
-
-- 0,0,0,0 for Margins on Margins & Header/Footer Tab. This makes the
- receipts use all available space on the paper roll.
-
-- Set all Headers/Footers to -blank-. This removes all of the gunk you
- might normally find on a print from Firefox, such as the URL, number
- of pages, etc.
-
-- Click OK
-
-Set the default printer settings in Firefox so you don't see a "Print"
-dialog:
-
-- Go to File > Print
-
-- Set the Printer to the receipt printer.
-
-- Click the Advanced (or Properties) button
-
-- Layout Tab: Paper size: Roll Paper 80 x 297mm
-
-- TM-T88III: Layout Tab: Check Reduce Printing and Fit to Printable
- Width
-
-- TM-T88IV: Check Reduced Size Print; click OK on the popup window that
- appears. Fit to Printable Width should be automatically selected.
-
-- OK your way out, go ahead and print whatever page you are on.
-
-- Type about:config, in the address bar. Click "I'll be careful, I
- promise!" on the warning message.
-
-- Type, print.always in Filter.
-
-- Look for print.always\_print\_silent.
-
- - If the preference is there then set the value to true.
-
-- If the preference is not there (and it shouldn't be in most browsers)
- you have to add the preference.
-
- - Right click the preference area and select New > Boolean
-
- - Type print.always\_print\_silent in the dialog box and set the
- value to True. This sets the print settings in Firefox to always
- use the same settings and print without showing a dialog box.
-
- **Warning**
-
- Setting the print.always\_print\_silent setting in about:config
- DISABLES the ability to choose a printer in Firefox.
-
-`For Epson TM-T88II (2) Printers <#epson2>`__
----------------------------------------------
-
-Register at the `EpsonExpert Technical Resource Center
-website `__ to gain access to the
-drivers; go to Technical Resources, then choose the printer model from
-the Printers drop-down list.
-
-`In Firefox <#epson2firefox>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Under File > Page Setup:
-
-- Shrink to fit page on Format & Options tab
-
-- 0,0,0,0 for Margins on Margins & Header/Footer Tab. This makes the
- receipts use all available space on the paper roll.
-
-- Set all Headers/Footers to -blank-. This removes all of the gunk you
- might normally find on a print from Firefox, such as the URL, number
- of pages, etc.
-
-- Click OK
-
-Set the default printer settings in Firefox so you don't see a "Print"
-dialog:
-
-- Go to File > Print
-
-- Set the Printer to the receipt printer.
-
-- Print whatever page you are on.
-
-- Type about:config, in the address bar. Click "I'll be careful, I
- promise!" on the warning message.
-
-- Type, print.always in Filter.
-
-- Look for, print.always\_print\_silent.
-
- - If the preference is there then set the value to true.
-
-- If the preference is not there (and it shouldn't be in most browsers)
- you have to add the preference.
-
- - Right click the preference area and select New > Boolean
-
- - Type, print.always\_print\_silent in the dialog box and set the
- value to True. This sets the print settings in Firefox to always
- use the same settings and print without showing a dialog box.
-
- **Warning**
-
- Setting the print.always\_print\_silent setting in about:config
- DISABLES the ability to choose a printer in Firefox.
-
-`For Star SP542 Printers <#starprinter>`__
-------------------------------------------
-
-`Installing the Printer <#installstarprinter>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-While the following comments are based on the Star SP542 receipt
-printer, they probably apply to all printers in the SP5xx series.
-
-The Star SP542 receipt printer works well with Koha and **Firefox on
-Windows XP SP3**. This printer, with either the parallel or USB
-interface, is fairly easy to install and configure. You will need the
-following executable file which is available from numerous places on the
-Internet:
-
-linemode\_2k-xp\_20030205.exe
-
-This executable actually does all of the installation; you will not need
-to use the Microsoft Windows "Add Printer" program. We recommend that
-when installing, the option for the software monitor not be selected; we
-have experienced significant pauses and delays in printing with it.
-Instead, simply choose to install the receipt printer without the
-monitor.
-
-Additionally, the install program may not put the printer on the correct
-port, especially if using the USB interface. This is easily corrected by
-going to "Start -> Printers and Faxes -> Properties for the SP542
-printer -> Ports", then check the appropriate port.
-
-A reboot may be required, even if not indicated by the installation
-software or the operating system.
-
-**Windows 7** users should refer to this page:
-http://www.starmicronics.com/supports/win7.aspx.
-
-`Configuring Firefox to Print to Receipt Printer <#firefoxreceipt>`__
----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-- Open File > Page Setup
-
-- Make all the headers and footers blank
-
-- Set the margins to 0 (zero)
-
-- In the address bar of Firefox, type about:config
-
-- Search for print.always\_print\_silent and double click it
-
-- Change it from false to true
-
- - This lets you skip the Print pop up box that comes up, as well as
- skipping the step where you have to click OK, automatically
- printing the right sized slip.
-
-- If print.always\_print\_silent does not come up
-
- - Right click on a blank area of the preference window
-
- - Select new > Boolean
-
- - Enter "print.always\_print\_silent" as the name (without quotes)
-
- - Click OK
-
- - Select true for the value
-
-- You may also want to check what is listed for print.print\_printer
-
- - You may have to choose Generic/Text Only (or whatever your receipt
- printer might be named)
-
-Notice & Slips Guides
-=====================
-
-`Field Guide for Notices & Slips <#noticesfieldguide>`__
---------------------------------------------------------
-
-This guide will break down the notices and slips information in 3 ways.
-First it will tell you what file generates the notice, then how you will
-present the item info in that notice and finally if the notice can be
-branch specific or not.
-
-+---------------------+----------------------------+---------------------------------------+--------------------------+
-| Letter Code | Used In | Detail tag | Can be branch specific |
-+=====================+============================+=======================================+==========================+
-| DUE | advance\_notices.pl | <> | No |
-+---------------------+----------------------------+---------------------------------------+--------------------------+
-| DUEDGST | advance\_notices.pl | <> | No |
-+---------------------+----------------------------+---------------------------------------+--------------------------+
-| PREDUE | advance\_notices.pl | <> | No |
-+---------------------+----------------------------+---------------------------------------+--------------------------+
-| PREDUEDGST | advance\_notices.pl | <> | No |
-+---------------------+----------------------------+---------------------------------------+--------------------------+
-| ODUE\* | overdue\_notices.pl | <> or | Yes |
-+---------------------+----------------------------+---------------------------------------+--------------------------+
-| CHECKOUT | C4/Circulation.pm | N/A | Yes |
-+---------------------+----------------------------+---------------------------------------+--------------------------+
-| RENEWAL | C4/Circulation.pm | N/A | Yes |
-+---------------------+----------------------------+---------------------------------------+--------------------------+
-| TRANSFERSLIP | C4/Circulation.pm | N/A | Yes |
-+---------------------+----------------------------+---------------------------------------+--------------------------+
-| ISSUESLIP | C4/Members.pm | | Yes |
-| | | | |
-| | | | |
-| | | | |
-| | | | |
-+---------------------+----------------------------+---------------------------------------+--------------------------+
-| ISSUEQSLIP | C4/Members.pm | | Yes |
-+---------------------+----------------------------+---------------------------------------+--------------------------+
-| HOLDPLACED | C4/Reserves.pm | N/A | Yes |
-+---------------------+----------------------------+---------------------------------------+--------------------------+
-| RESERVESLIP | C4/Reserves.pm | N/A | Yes |
-+---------------------+----------------------------+---------------------------------------+--------------------------+
-| ASKED | C4/Suggestions.pm | N/A | Yes |
-+---------------------+----------------------------+---------------------------------------+--------------------------+
-| CHECKED | C4/Suggestions.pm | N/A | Yes |
-+---------------------+----------------------------+---------------------------------------+--------------------------+
-| ACCEPTED | C4/Suggestions.pm | N/A | Yes |
-+---------------------+----------------------------+---------------------------------------+--------------------------+
-| REJECTED | C4/Suggestions.pm | N/A | Yes |
-+---------------------+----------------------------+---------------------------------------+--------------------------+
-| OPAC\_REG\_VERIFY | opac/opac-memberentry.pl | N/A | No |
-+---------------------+----------------------------+---------------------------------------+--------------------------+
-
-Example Notice
-==============
-
-Nicole Engard
-
-410 Library Rd.
-
-Philadelphia, PA 19107
-
-Dear Nicole Engard (23529000035726),
-
-According to our records, at the time of this notice, you have items
-that are overdue. Please return or renew them as soon as possible to
-avoid increasing late fines.
-
-If you have registered a password with the library, you may use it with
-your library card number to renew online.
-
-If you believe you have returned the items below please call at and
-library staff will be happy to help resolve the issue.
-
-The following item(s) are currently overdue:
-
-07/08/2008 Creating drug-free schools and communities : 502326000054
-Fox, C. Lynn.
-
-06/27/2008 Eating fractions / 502326000022 McMillan, Bruce.
-
-Sincerely, Library Staff
-
-Sample Serials
-==============
-
-`Reader's Digest (0034-0375) <#readersdigestsample>`__
-------------------------------------------------------
-
-- Published 12 times a year (monthly)
-
-- The Volume number changes every 6 months and the numbers continues on
- (requires an advanced pattern).
-
- Sample Reader's Digest Subscription
- |image1069|
-
-`People Weekly (1076-0091) <#peoplesample>`__
----------------------------------------------
-
-- Published weekly
-
- - The website says "on Saturday except the first week of August,
- Thanksgiving week, the first and last weeks of the year" but this
- does not match the pattern for 2007 or 2008
-
-- In the Jul-Dec there are 26 issues
-
-- In the Jan-Jun there are 25 issues (no issue for the first week of
- January)
-
-Since the irregularity on the first # 26 does not skip a week, this
-would be set up as to roll over on issue 25. The 26th issue in the
-second half of the year would have to be received as a supplemental.
-
-The irregularity check will complain that 52 issues were expected, but
-25 entered. The current irregularity check can only check that the first
-position of the numbering pattern matches the expected issue count of
-the periodicity. But we do need to trigger the rollover on the volume,
-so we need to define the last two weeks of the year as irregularities.
-So we receive 50 issues the first 50 weeks, then one supplemental issue
-in week 51, which we have to define the enumeration for, then the next
-predicted issue will be the following year's first week.
-
-`Et-Mol <#hebrewserialsample>`__
---------------------------------
-
-This journal is published with the following rules:
-
-- 6 issues a year (every 2 months)
-
-- year changes every 6 issues
-
-- we start in 2011
-
-- the issue number goes up indefinitely
-
-- starting from issue 215
-
-The planning would look like this:
-
-Sample for this Hebrew Journal
-|image1070|
-
-`Backpacker (0277-867X) <#backpackerserial>`__
-----------------------------------------------
-
-Published 9 times a year irregularly. The issues continues while the
-volume and number rolls over every 9 issues. If you're holding Volume
-41, Number 3, Issue 302 in your hand the prediction would look like
-this:
-
-Backpacker numbering pattern
-|image1071|
-
-And the received issues would number like this:
-
-v. 41, no. 3, iss. 302 Â
-
-v. 41, no. 4, iss. 303
-
-v. 41, no. 5, iss. 304
-
-v. 41, no. 6, iss. 305
-
-v. 41, no. 7, iss. 306
-
-v. 41, no. 8, iss. 307
-
-v. 41, no. 9, iss. 308
-
-v. 42, no. 1, iss. 309
-
-v. 42, no. 2, iss. 310
-
-v. 42, no. 3, iss. 311
-
-v. 42, no. 4, iss. 312
-
-`Keats-Shelley Journal (0453-4387) <#keatsserial>`__
-----------------------------------------------------
-
-This journal is published once per year in July. The numbering follows
-this pattern: Â
-
-- Vol. 61 2013
-
-- Vol. 62 2014
-
-- Vol. 63 2015
-
-Setup should look like this (if you're starting in July 2014):
-
-Serial planning
-|image1072|
-
-`Computers in Libraries (1041-7915) <#cilserial>`__
----------------------------------------------------
-
-Computers in Libraries is published ten times per year (monthly with
-January/February and July/August combined issues).
-
-Subscription details
-|image1073|
-
-Serial Planning
-|image1074|
-
-Received details
-|image1075|
-
-Sample List & Cart Emails
-=========================
-
-`Example Email from List <#examplelistemail>`__
------------------------------------------------
-
-Below is an example of an email from a list in Koha.
-
-::
-
- Hi,
-
- Here is your list called If You Like Jodi Picoult, sent from our online catalog.
-
- Please note that the attached file is a MARC bibliographic records file
- which can be imported into a Personal Bibliographic Software like EndNote,
- Reference Manager or ProCite.
- ---------------------------------------------
-
- Home safe : a novel /
-
- by Berg, Elizabeth.
-
- Published by: Random House,, 260 p. ;, 25 cm.
- Copyright year: 2009
- LCCN: 2008049247
- In the online catalog:
- http://MYCATALOG/cgi-bin/koha/opac-detail.pl?biblionumber=12113
- Items :
- North Branch FIC (FIC Ber) TVSN500088894O
- Main Library FIC (FIC Boh) TVSN5000921548
- South Branch FIC (FIC Boh) TVSN500092156A
- West Branch FIC (FIC Boh) TVSN5000921559
-
- ---------------------------------------------
-
- Half a heart /
-
- by Brown, Rosellen.
-
- Published by: Farrar, Straus, and Giroux,, 402 p. ;, 24 cm.
- Copyright year: 2000
- LCCN: 00022926
- In the online catalog:
- http://MYCATALOG/cgi-bin/koha/opac-detail.pl?biblionumber=12501
- Items :
- East Branch (813/.54)
- South Branch FIC (FIC Bro) TVSN5000451333
-
-`Example Email from Cart <#examplecartemail>`__
------------------------------------------------
-
-Below is a sample of what an email from the Cart in Koha will look like:
-
-::
-
- Hi,
-
- Joaquin D'Planque sent you a cart from our online catalog.
-
- Please note that the attached file is a MARC bibliographic records
- file which can be imported into personal bibliographic software like
- EndNote, Reference Manager or ProCite.
-
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
- 1. Book /
- Author(s): Brookfield, Karen. ;
- Published by: Knopf : | Distributed by Random House, , 63 p. : ,
- 29 cm.
- Copyright year: 1993
- Notes : Includes index.
- LCCN: 93018833 /AC
-
- In online catalog:
- http://MYCATALOG/cgi-bin/koha/opac-detail.pl?biblionumber=31644
-
- Items:
-
- * East Branch (JNF 002 Bro) TVSN500017618A
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
- 2. The 1965 World book year book :
-
- Published by: Field Enterprises Educational Corp., , 628 p. : , 26
- cm.
- Copyright year: 1965
- Notes : Includes index. | Spine title: Year book, 1965. | Cover
- title: The World book year book, 1965.
- URL:
- http://www.archive.org/details/1965worldbookyea00chic%20%7C%20http://www.openlibrary.org/books/OL24199089M
-
- In online catalog:
- http://MYCATALOG/cgi-bin/koha/opac-detail.pl?biblionumber=88666
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
-Using Koha as a Content Management System (CMS)
-===============================================
-
-`Setup <#kohacmssetup>`__
--------------------------
-
-These are instructions for taking a default install of Koha and allowing
-it to function as a little content management system. This will allow a
-library to publish an arbitrary number of pages based on a template.
-This example uses the template for the main opac page, but you could
-just as well use any template you wish with a bit more editing. This may
-be appropriate if you have a small library, want to allow librarians to
-easily add pages, and do not want to support a complete CMS.
-
-- Copy /usr/share/koha/opac/cgi-bin/opac/opac-main.pl to
- /usr/share/koha/opac/cgi-bin/opac/pages.pl (in the same directory)
-
-- Edit pages.pl in an editor
-
-- At approximately line 33 change this code:
-
- ::
-
- template_name => "opac-main.tmpl",
-
-- To this code:
-
- ::
-
- template_name => "pages.tmpl",
-
-- At approximately line 62 after this code:
-
- ::
-
- $template->param(
- koha_news => $all_koha_news,
- koha_news_count => $koha_news_count,
- display_daily_quote => C4::Context->preference('QuoteOfTheDay'),
- daily_quote => $quote,
- );
-
-- Add these lines:
-
- ::
-
- my $page = "page_" . $input->param('p'); # go for "p" value in URL and do the concatenation
- my $preference = C4::Context->preference($page); # Go for preference
- $template->{VARS}->{'page_test'} = $preference; # pass variable to template pages.tt
-
-- Note pages.pl file must have Webserver user execution permissions,
- you can use `chmod `__ command if
- you are actually logged in as such user:
-
- ::
-
- $chmod 755 pages.pl
-
-- In the browser go to Home > Administration > System Preferences >
- Local Use and add a New Preference called "page\_test"
-
-- Fill it out as so
-
- - Explanation: test page for pages tiny cms
-
- - Variable: page\_test
-
- - Value: Lorem ipsum
-
- - Click the TextArea link (or enter "TextArea" into the input field
- below it)
-
- - variable options (last field): 80\|50
-
-- In a browser go to http://youraddress/cgi-bin/koha/pages.pl?p=test
- The page should come up with the words "Lorem ipsum" in the main
- content area of the page. (replace "youraddress" with localhost,
- 127.0.0.1, or your domain name depending on how you have Apache set
- up.)
-
-- To add more pages simply create a system preference where the title
- begins with "page\_" followed by any arbitrary letters. You can add
- any markup you want as the value of the field. Reference the new page
- by changing the value of the "p" parameter in the URL.
-
-To learn more visit the Koha wiki page on this topic:
-http://wiki.koha-community.org/wiki/Koha_as_a_CMS
-
-`Editing the pages template <#kohacmstmpl>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-The file to create / edit for the pages template will depend on your
-`opacthemes <#opacthemes>`__ system preference setting
-
-`Editing 'bootstrap' theme template (current) <#kohacmstmplboot>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-- Copy
- /usr/share/koha/opac/htdocs/opac-tmpl/bootstrap/en/modules/opac-main.tt
- to
- /usr/share/koha/opac/htdocs/opac-tmpl/bootstrap/en/modules/pages.tt
-
-- Edit
- /usr/share/koha/opac/htdocs/opac-tmpl/bootstrap/en/modules/pages.tt
-
-- At approximately line 61, change this:
-
- ::
-
- [% IF ( OpacMainUserBlock ) %]
[% OpacMainUserBlock %]
[% END %]
-
-- To this:
-
- ::
-
- [% IF ( page_test ) %]
[% page_test %]
[% END %]
-
-Remark: You may wish to disable your News block of these CMS style pages
-e.g. when you do not want it displayed on the CMS style pages or where
-the News block is long enough that it actually makes the 'page\_test'
-include scroll outside the default viewport dimensions. In that case,
-remove the following code from your pages.tt template.
-
-::
-
- [% IF ( koha_news_count ) %]
-
-
- [% FOREACH koha_new IN koha_news %]
-
[% koha_new.title %]
-
[% koha_new.new %]
-
(published on [% koha_new.newdate %])
- [% END %]
-
-
- [% END %]
-
-
-`Troubleshooting <#kohacmstrouble>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-If you have problems check file permissions on pages.pl and pages.tmpl.
-They should have the same user and group as other Koha files like
-opac-main.pl.
-
-`Bonus Points <#kohacmsbonus>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Instead of using the address
-http://youraddress/cgi-bin/koha/pages.pl?p=test you can shorten it to
-http://youraddress/pages.pl?p=test Just open up
-/etc/koha/koha-httpd.conf and add the follow at about line 13:
-
-::
-
- ScriptAlias /pages.pl "/usr/share/koha/opac/cgi-bin/opac/pages.pl"
-
-Then restart Apache.
-
-`Usage <#kohacmsusage>`__
--------------------------
-
-After setting up Koha as a CMS you can create new pages following these
-instructions:
-
-`Adding Pages <#kohacmspages>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-To add a new page you need to add a system preference under Local Use.
-
-- Get there: More > Administration > Global System Preferences > Local
- Use
-
-- Click 'New Preference'
-
-- Enter in a description in the Explanation field
-
-- Enter a value that starts with 'page\_' in the Variable field
-
-- Enter starting HTML in the Value field
-
- Add a new preference
- |image1076|
-
-- Set the Variable Type to Textarea
-
-- Set the Variable options to something like 20\|20 for 20 rows and 20
- columns
-
- Settings for the new preference
- |image1077|
-
-`Viewing your page <#kohacmsview>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-You can view your new page at
-http://YOUR-OPAC/cgi-bin/koha/pages.pl?p=PAGENAME where PAGENAME is the
-part you entered after 'page\_' in the Variable field.
-
-`Example <#kohacmsexpage>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-This process can be used to create recommended reading lists within
-Koha. So once the code changes have been made per the instructions on
-'Koha as a CMS' you go through the 'Adding a New Page' instructions
-above to great a page for 'Recommended Reading Lists'
-
-Create page by modifying a system preference
-|image1078|
-
-Next we need to create pages for our various classes (or categories). To
-do this, return to the 'Adding a New Page' section and create a
-preference for the first class.
-
-Add a new sys pref for another page
-|image1079|
-
-Next you'll want to link your first page to your new second page, go to
-the page\_recommend preference and click 'Edit.' Now you want to edit
-the HTML to include a link to your newest page:
-
-Edit original preference to add new page
-|image1080|
-
-`Live Examples <#examplecms>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-- The Crawford Library at Dallas Christian College is using this method
- for their recommended reading lists: http://opac.dallas.edu/
-
-Resetting the Koha Database
-===========================
-
-These notes on how to reset the database for Koha were derived from the
-following email thread:
-http://lists.koha-community.org/pipermail/koha-devel/2009-January/008939.html
-and http://lists.katipo.co.nz/public/koha/2014-June/039701.html
-
-Resetting the database may be useful if you install Koha with the sample
-data, and then wish to use real data without reinstalling the software.
-
-`Delete sample data from Tables <#deletetables>`__
---------------------------------------------------
-
-Use your preferred MySQL client to
-`delete `__ the
-following tables:
-
-- bibio
-
-- biblioitems
-
-- items
-
-- auth\_header
-
-- sessions
-
-- zebraqueue
-
-You may need to disable foreign key checks to delete data from same
-tables. For instructions follow this thread:
-https://lists.katipo.co.nz/pipermail/koha/2013-July/036853.html.
-
-`Reset the Zebra Index <#resetzebra>`__
----------------------------------------
-
-Run the following commands to reset the authorities and biblios Zebra
-indices.
-
-::
-
- $ zebraidx -c /etc/koha/zebradb/zebra-authorities-dom.cfg -g iso2709 -d authorities init
- $ zebraidx -c /etc/koha/zebradb/zebra-biblios.cfg -g iso2709 -d biblios init
-
-If you are running a package install then you'll want to run the
-following commands to reset the authorities and biblios Zebra indices
-instead:
-
-::
-
- $ sudo zebraidx -c /etc/koha/sites/YOURLIBRARY/zebra-authorities-dom.cfg  -g iso2709 -d authorities init
- $ sudo zebraidx -c /etc/koha/sites/YOURLIBRARY/zebra-biblios.cfg  -g iso2709 -d biblios init
-
-Replacing YOURLIBRARY with your Koha installation name.
-
-Important Links
-===============
-
-`Koha Related <#koharelatedlinks>`__
-------------------------------------
-
-- Report Koha Bugs - http://bugs.koha-community.org
-
-- Koha Versioning Control - http://git.koha-community.org/
-
-- Database Structure - http://schema.koha-community.org
-
-- Koha Community Statistics - http://hea.koha-community.org
-
-- Koha as a CMS - http://wiki.koha-community.org/wiki/Koha_as_a_CMS
-
-- Kyles's Koha Tools - http://kylehall.info/index.php/projects/koha/
-
-- Koha Bibliography - http://www.zotero.org/groups/koha
-
-- Koha Shared Links - http://groups.diigo.com/group/everything-koha
-
-`Circulation Related <#circrelatedlinks>`__
--------------------------------------------
-
-- Koha Desktop Offline Circulation:
- https://github.com/bywatersolutions/koha-offline-circulation/releases
-
-- Koha Firefox Offline Circulation:
- https://addons.mozilla.org/en-US/firefox/addon/koct/
-
-`Cataloging Related <#catalogrelatedlinks>`__
----------------------------------------------
-
-- Koha MARC Tutorials - http://www.pakban.net/brooke/
-
-- IRSpy Open Z39.50 Server Search - http://irspy.indexdata.com/
-
-- Z39.50 Server List -
- http://staff.library.mun.ca/staff/toolbox/z3950hosts.htm
-
-- Open Koha Z39.50 Targets -
- http://wiki.koha-community.org/wiki/Koha_Open_Z39.50_Sources
-
-- Library of Congress Authorities - http://authorities.loc.gov/
-
-- MARC Country Codes - http://www.loc.gov/marc/countries/
-
-- Search the MARC Code List for Organizations -
- http://www.loc.gov/marc/organizations/org-search.php
-
-- Search for Canadian MARC Codes -
- http://www.collectionscanada.gc.ca/illcandir-bin/illsear/l=0/c=1
-
-- Z39.50 Bib-1 Attribute -
- http://www.loc.gov/z3950/agency/defns/bib1.html
-
-`Enhanced Content Related <#enhancedcontentlinks>`__
-----------------------------------------------------
-
-- Amazon Associates -
- `https://affiliate-program.amazon.com `__
-
-- Amazon Web Services - http://aws.amazon.com
-
-- WorldCat Affiliate Tools -
- http://www.worldcat.org/wcpa/do/AffiliateUserServices?method=initSelfRegister
-
-- XISBN - http://www.worldcat.org/affiliate/webservices/xisbn/app.jsp
-
-- LibraryThing for Libraries - http://www.librarything.com/forlibraries
-
-`Design Related <#opaclinks>`__
--------------------------------
-
-- JQuery Library - http://wiki.koha-community.org/wiki/JQuery_Library
-
-- HTML & CSS Library -
- http://wiki.koha-community.org/wiki/HTML_%26_CSS_Library
-
-- Owen Leonard's Koha Blog - http://www.myacpl.org/koha
-
-`Reports Related <#reportlinks>`__
-----------------------------------
-
-- SQL Reports Library -
- http://wiki.koha-community.org/wiki/SQL_Reports_Library
-
-- Database Schema - http://schema.koha-community.org
-
-- Sample reports from NEKLS -
- http://www.nexpresslibrary.org/training/reports-training/
-
-`Installation Guides <#installlinks>`__
----------------------------------------
-
-- Installing Koha 3 on Ubuntu -
- http://www.blazingmoon.org/guides/k3-on-u810-1.html
-
-- Koha on Debian installation documentation -
- http://openlib.org/home/krichel/courses/lis508/doc/koha_installation_overview.html
-
-- Koha 3.2 on Debian Squeeze -
- http://wiki.koha-community.org/wiki/Koha_3.2_on_Debian_Squeeze
-
-`Misc <#misclinks>`__
----------------------
-
-- Zotero - http://zotero.org
-
-- SOPAC - `http://thesocialopac.net `__
-
-Koha XSLT Item Types
-====================
-
-When you have any of the XSLT system preferences
-(`OPACXSLTDetailsDisplay <#OPACXSLTDetailsDisplay>`__,
-`OPACXSLTResultsDisplay <#OPACXSLTResultsDisplay>`__,
-`XSLTDetailsDisplay <#XSLTDetailsDisplay>`__, and/or
-`XSLTResultsDisplay <#XSLTResultsDisplay>`__) along with the
-`DisplayOPACiconsXSLT <#DisplayOPACiconsXSLT>`__ and
-`DisplayIconsXSLT <#DisplayIconsXSLT>`__ preferences turned on you will
-see item type icons on the related screen.
-
- **Important**
-
- These images are coming from values found in your leader, if your
- leader is not cataloged properly it might be best to turn off the
- `DisplayOPACiconsXSLT <#DisplayOPACiconsXSLT>`__ preference (which
- can be done while leaving the other XSLT preferences turned on).
-
-Book image
-|image1081|
-
-- Book [BK]
-
- - leader6 = a (and one of the leader7 values below)
-
- - leader7 = a
-
- - leader7 = c
-
- - leader7 = d
-
- - leader7 = m
-
- - leader6 = t
-
-Computer Image
-|image1082|
-
-- Computer File [CF]
-
- - leader6 = m
-
-Continuing Resource Image
-|image1083|
-
-- Continuing Resource [CR]
-
- - leader7 = b
-
- - leader7 = i
-
- - leader7 = s
-
-Map Image
-|image1084|
-
-- Map [MP]
-
- - leader6 = e
-
- - leader6 = f
-
-Mixed Materials Image
-|image1085|
-
-- Mixed [MX]
-
- - leader6 = p
-
-Sound Image
-|image1086|
-
-- Sound [MU]
-
- - leader6 = c
-
- - leader6 = d
-
- - leader6 = i
-
- - leader6 = j
-
-Visual Material Image
-|image1087|
-
-- Visual Material [VM]
-
- - leader6 = g
-
- - leader6 = k
-
- - leader6 = r
-
-Kit Image
-|image1088|
-
-- Kit
-
- - leader6 = o
-
-MarcEdit
-========
-
-Many libraries like to use MarcEdit for modifications or data cleanup.
-If you'd like to do this you will need to download it at:
-http://marcedit.reeset.net/
-
- **Important**
-
- Many of the actions described in this chapter can be done in Koha
- using `Marc Modification Templates <#marcmodtemplates>`__, but this
- section is here for those who are used to MarcEdit.
-
-`Adding a prefix to call numbers <#marceditprefix>`__
------------------------------------------------------
-
-When bringing data into Koha, you may want to first clean it up. One
-common action among Koha users is to add a prefix to the call number.
-
-- Open MarcEdit
-
- MarcEdit
- |image1089|
-
-- Click 'MarcEditor'
-
-- Go to Tools > Edit Subfield Data
-
- Edit subfield data
- |image1090|
-
-- To prepend data the special character is: ^b To simply prepend data
- to the beginning of a subfield, add ^b to the Field Data: textbox and
- the data to be appended in the Replace
-
- Prepend data to a field
- |image1091|
-
- - To prepend data to the beginning of the subfield while replacing a
- text string, add ^b[string to replace] to the Field Data textbox
- and the data to be appended in the Replace With textbox.
-
-`Importing Excel data into Koha <#marceditexcel>`__
----------------------------------------------------
-
-Suppose you have records of your library in excel data sheet format and
-want them to import into Koha. But how will you do this? Koha will not
-let you import excel records directly. Well here is a very simple
-solution for you which will let you import your excel records in Koha
-easily. First, we will convert excel file into Marc file and then will
-import it into Koha.
-
-Follow the given steps to import your excel records into Koha
-
-`Converting from Excel format into .mrk format <#convertexcel>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-First, we will convert excel format into .mrk format. For this we will
-use MarcEdit. You can download it from http://marcedit.reeset.net/
-
-Now open it and select Add-ins-->Delimited Text Translator.
-
-Delimited Text Translator
-|image1092|
-
-Click Next when the following window appears.
-
-Delimited Text Translator
-|image1093|
-
-Browse for your excel file.
-
-Delimited Text Translator
-|image1094|
-
-Locate your excel file by choosing the format Excel File(\*.xls).
-
-Delimited Text Translator
-|image1095|
-
-Similarly, fill all the other entries such as Output File, Excel Sheet
-Name and check UTF-8 Encoded (if required) and Click Next.
-
-Delimited Text Translator
-|image1096|
-
-Now you will be prompted for mapping the fields to recognise the fields
-by standard marc format.
-
-Suppose for Field 0 that is first column I entered Map to: 022$a( Valid
-ISSN for the continuing resource) and then click on Apply.
-
-Delimited Text Translator
-|image1097|
-
- **Note**
-
- You can customize Indicators and all other things, for more
- information on marc21 format visit the `official library of congress
- site `__.
-
-Similarly map all other fields and then Click on Finish.
-
-Delimited Text Translator
-|image1098|
-
-And then a window will appear indicating that your Marc Text
-File(\*.mrk) has been created.
-
-Delimited Text Translator
-|image1099|
-
-Click Close and we have created a .mrk file from .xls file in this step.
-You can view the file by double clicking on it.
-
-`Convert .mrk file to .mrc <#convertmrk>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-We will convert .mrk file that we have created in the above step into
-raw Marc format that can be directly imported into Koha.
-
-For this again open MarcEdit and Select MARC Tools.
-
-MARC Tools
-|image1100|
-
-Next Select MarcMaker to convert .mrk file into .mrc format.
-
-MarcMaker
-|image1101|
-
-Locate your input file and name your output file. Then Click Execute.
-
-MarcMaker
-|image1102|
-
-And it will show you the Result.
-
-MarcMaker
-|image1103|
-
-Click Close and now we have raw Marc records with us (.mrc file).
-
-`Import .mrc into Koha <#importmrc>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-More information on importing records into Koha can be found in the
-'`Stage MARC Records for Import <#stagemarc>`__' section of this manual.
-
-Finally we will import above created .mrc file into Koha.
-
-Click on Tools in your Koha staff client.
-
-Koha Staff Client
-|image1104|
-
-Next Click on Stage MARC Records for Import.
-
-Stage MARC Records for Import
-|image1105|
-
-After this, choose your previously created .mrc file and click on
-Upload.
-
-Stage File
-|image1106|
-
-You can also add comment about file and finally click on Stage For
-Import.
-
-Stage for Import
-|image1107|
-
-When the import is done, you will get a result something like this
-
-Staged Records Summary
-|image1108|
-
-Next, click on Manage staged records.
-
-Here you can even change matching rules.
-
-Manage Staged Records
-|image1109|
-
-Click on Import this batch into catalog when you are done.
-
-Thats it. After all the records get imported, check Status and it should
-read "imported"
-
-Finalize Import
-|image1110|
-
-You can even undo the Import operation.
-
-And within few minutes, we have imported around 10,000 records in Koha
-
-Talking Tech
-============
-
-Talking Tech I-tiva is a third party, proprietary, product that
-libraries can subscribe to. Learn more here:
-http://www.talkingtech.com/solutions/library.
-
-`Installation and Setup Instructions <#talkingtechinstall>`__
--------------------------------------------------------------
-
-Be sure you've run
-installer/data/mysql/atomicupdate/Bug-4246-Talking-Tech-itiva-phone-notifications.pl
-to install the required data pack (new syspref, notice placeholders and
-messaging transport preferences)
-
-To use,
-`TalkingTechItivaPhoneNotification <#TalkingTechItivaPhoneNotification>`__
-syspref must be turned on.
-
-If you wish to process PREOVERDUE or RESERVES messages, you'll need the
-`EnhancedMessagingPreferences <#EnhancedMessagingPreferences>`__ system
-preference turned on, and patrons to have filled in a preference for
-receiving these notices by phone.
-
-For OVERDUE messages, overdue notice triggers must be configured under
-Koha -> Tools -> `Overdue Notice Triggers <#noticetriggers>`__. Either
-branch-specific triggers or the default level triggers may be used
-(script will select whichever is appropriate).
-
-`Sending Notices File <#talkingtechsend>`__
--------------------------------------------
-
-1. Add the `TalkingTech\_itiva\_outbound.pl <#talkingtechsendcron>`__
- script to your crontab
-
-2. Add an FTP/SFTP or other transport method to send the output file to
- the I-tiva server
-
-3. If you wish, archive the sent notices file in another directory after
- sending
-
-Run TalkingTech\_itiva\_outbound.pl --help for more information
-
-`Receiving Results File <#talkingtechreceive>`__
-------------------------------------------------
-
-1. Add an FTP/SFTP or other transport method to send the Results file to
- a known directory on your Koha server
-
-2. Add the `TalkingTech\_itiva\_inbound.pl <#talkingtechreceivecron>`__
- script to your crontab, aimed at that directory
-
-3. If you wish, archive the results file in another directory after
- processing
-
-Run TalkingTech\_itiva\_inbound.pl --help for more information
-
-OCLC Connexion Gateway
-======================
-
-Koha can be set to work with the OCLC Connextion Gateway. This allows
-libraries to use OCLC Connexion as their cataloging tool and simply send
-those records to Koha with a single click. The following instructions
-will help you set up the OCLC Connexion Gateway, if you have a system
-administrator you will want to consult with them on this process.
-
-`Setting up OCLC service on Koha <#oclckohasetup>`__
-----------------------------------------------------
-
-First, you'll need to create a file somewhere on your system with
-configuration information. Â You could put this anywhere that is visible
-to the account that will be running the service.
-
-The file contains 11 lines. The first 6 will be about your Koha system:
-
-::
-
- host: The IP address of your Koha server
- port: The port you want to use for the Connexion service. This port must be different from your SIP port, or any other service
- koha: The full URL of your staff client
- log: The location (full file specification) of your log for the service
- user: The default Koha username to use for importing
- password: The password that goes with that username
-
-The remaining lines describe how to do the staging:
-
-::
-
- match: The name of the matching rule from your system to use
- overlay_action: "replace", "create_new", or "ignore"-- what to do if there is a match
- nomatch_action: "create_new" or "ignore"-- what to do if there is no match
- item_action: "always_add","add_only_for_matches","add_only_for_new", or "ignore" -- what to do with embedded 952 item data
- import_mode: "direct" or "stage"
-
-A sample file would look like this:
-
-::
-
- host: 1.2.3.4
- port: 8000
- log: /home/koha/koha-dev/var/log/connexion.log
- koha: http://kohastaff.myuniversity.edu
- user: koha_generic_staff
- password: password
- match: 001
- overlay_action: replace
- nomatch_action: create_new
- item_action: ignore
- import_mode: direct
-
-When choosing an 'import\_mode' if you use "direct" then the staged
-record will be immediately imported into Koha, and should be searchable
-after your indexes catch up. Â If you choose "stage", then the record
-will be placed in a staged batch for you to later go the `Manage Staged
-MARC Records <#managestaged>`__ tool to finish the import.
-
-If you import multiple records, they'll be in the same batch, until that
-batch is imported, then a new batch will be created.
-
-In "direct" mode, each record will be in its' own batch.
-
-To start the service, run the script:
-
-::
-
- /location/of/connexion/import/daemon/connexion_import_daemon.pl -d -c /location/of/config/file.cnf
-
-`Setting up your OCLC desktop client <#oclcdesktopsetup>`__
------------------------------------------------------------
-
- **Note**
-
- Screenshots are OCLC Connexion Client v.2.50, Koha v.3.12
-
-To set up the OCLC Connexion desktop client to connect to Koha, go to
-Tools > Options, then choose the Export tab. Connexion Export Tab
-
-- Click the "Create..." button to set up a new destination, then choose
- "OCLC Gateway Export" and click OK.
-
- - Enter the following information:
-
- - "Host Name:" Your catalogâs appropriate IP address (from your
- `config file above <#oclckohasetup>`__)
-
- - "Port:" Your catalog's appropriate port number (from your
- `config file above <#oclckohasetup>`__)
-
- - "Login ID:" The cataloger's Koha login
-
- - "Password:" The cataloger's Koha password
-
- - "Notify Host Before Disconnect" = checked,
-
- - "Timeout" = 100, "Retries" = 3, "Delay" = 0 (zero),
-
- - "Send Local System Logon ID Password" = checked.
-
- OCLC Gateway Export Settings
- |image1111|
-
-- Select "OK" when finished, and you should see your new "Gateway
- Export" option listed (The catalog's IP address and port are blacked
- out in the following screenshot)
-
- Gateway Export Added
-
-- Click on "Record Characteristics" and make sure that the
- bibliographic records are using MARC21, UTF-8 Unicode, and click OK
- to save.
-
- Record Characteristics
-
-You should be ready to go! Â To export a record from OCLC Connexion
-Client to Koha, just press F5 while the record is on-screen. Â The export
-dialog will pop up, and you'll see Connexion attempting to talk to Koha.
-Â You should get a message that the record was added or overlaid,
-including its biblio number, and a URL that you can copy into your web
-browser to jump straight to the record.
-
-`Using the OCLC Connexion Gateway <#oclcgateway>`__
----------------------------------------------------
-
-Records can be exported from Connexion either in a batch or one by one.
-
-`Exporting records one by one <#oclconeexport>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-To export bibliographic records one by one, be sure your "Batch" options
-are correct: from the "Tools" menu, select "Options", and select the
-"Batch" tab. In the "Perform local actions in batch" area,
-"Bibliographic Record Export" should be uncheckedConnexion batch options
-
-When ready to export, from the "Action" menu, select "Export" or use the
-F5 key. You will see a screen similar to the following if the import is
-successful and if the record is new to the Catalog; you may copy & paste
-the resulting URL into your Koha catalog to see the new record.Connexion
-Export
-
-If the record was overlaid, you will see a message to that effect in the
-"OCLC Gateway Export Status" windowOverlay confirmation
-
-`Exporting records in a batch <#oclcbatchexport>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-To export bibliographic records in a batch, be sure your "Batch" options
-are correct: from the "Tools" menu, select "Options", and select the
-"Batch" tab. In the "Perform local actions in batch" area,
-"Bibliographic Record Export" should be checkedOCLC Batch Export Options
-
-When a record is ready to export, from the "Action" menu, select
-"Export" or use the F5 key, and itâs export status will be "ready."
-
-When ready to export the batch, from the "Batch" menu, select "Process
-batch" and check the appropriate "Path" and "Export" boxesBatch import
-process
-
-The export will begin, and the bib records will be exported & imported
-into Koha one by one; you will see "OCLC Gateway Export Status" windows,
-as above, showing you the results of each export. That window will stay
-there until you select "Close," and then the next recordâs export/import
-will begin. The process will continue until all records in the batch are
-completed. Then you may or may not see the Connexion Client export
-report (depending on your Client options for that).
-
-`Items in OCLC <#oclcitems>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-If you'd like to create your item records in OCLC you can do so by
-addding a 952 for each item to the bib record you're cataloging. The
-`Item/Holdings Cataloging Guide <#itemcatguide>`__ will break down what
-subfields you can use in the 952, but at the minimum you want to have
-subfield 2, a, b, and y on your items.
-
-952
-\\\\$2CLASSIFICATION$aHOMEBRANCHCODE$bHOLDINGBRANCHCODE$yITEMTYPECODE
-
-- The subfield 2 holds the classification code. This can be ddc for
- Dewey or lcc for Library of Congress or z for Custom. Other
- classification sources can be found in the `Classification
- Sources <#classificationsources>`__ area in administration
-
-- Subfield a is your home library and needs to be the code for your
- home library, not the library name. You can find these codes in the
- `Libraries & Groups <#libsgroups>`__ administration area.
-
-- Subfield b is your holding library and needs to be the code for your
- holding library, not the library name. You can find these codes in
- the `Libraries & Groups <#libsgroups>`__ administration area.
-
-- Subfield y is your item type code. It needs to be the code, not the
- item type name. You can find these codes in the `Item
- Types <#itemtypeadmin>`__ administration area.
-
-952 \\\\$2ddc$aMAIN$bMAIN$yBOOK
-
-In addition to these required fields you can enter any other subfield
-you'd like. Most libraries will enter a call number in subfield o and a
-barcode in subfield p as well. Review the `Item/Holdings Cataloging
-Guide <#itemcatguide>`__ for a full list of subfields and values.
-
-FAQs
-====
-
-`Display <#displayfaq>`__
--------------------------
-
-`Custom Item Type/Authorized Value Icons <#customicons>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question:** Can I have my own set of item type images (or authorized
-value icons)?
-
-**Answer:**\ Absolutely. To add additional icons to your system you
-simply add a new directory to
-koha-tmpl/intranet-tmpl/prog/img/itemtypeimg/ and to
-koha-tmpl/opac-tmpl/prog/itemtypeimg and put your icons in the new
-directory. Your icons will show up in a new tab as soon as they are in
-the folders.
-
-- **Note**
-
- Remember to put the icons in both places (on the OPAC and the
- intranet).
-
-`Customizing Koha Images <#customkohaimages>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**: Can I customize the images in the OPAC?
-
-**Answer**: Absolutely. Koha comes with a series of original images that
-you can alter to meet your needs. The originals can be found in the
-misc/interface\_customization/ directory.
-
-`OPAC Display Fields <#opacdisplayfaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**: What MARC fields print to the different OPAC screens in
-Koha?
-
-**Answer**: The XSLT preference must be set as follows for the following
-fields to show
-
-- `OPACXSLTResultsDisplay <#OPACXSLTResultsDisplay>`__ = using XSLT
- stylesheets
-
-- `OPACXSLTDetailsDisplay <#OPACXSLTDetailsDisplay>`__ = using XSLT
- stylesheets
-
-- `DisplayOPACiconsXSLT <#DisplayOPACiconsXSLT>`__ = show
-
-The OPAC Results page shows:
-
-- 245
-
-- 100, 110, 111
-
-- 700, 710, 711
-
-- 250
-
-- 260
-
-- 246
-
-- 856
-
-The OPAC Details page shows:
-
-- 245
-
-- 100, 110, 111
-
-- 700, 710, 711
-
-- 440, 490
-
-- 260
-
-- 250
-
-- 300
-
-- 020
-
-- 022
-
-- 246
-
-- 130, 240
-
-- 6xx
-
-- 856
-
-- 505
-
-- 773
-
-- 520
-
-- 866
-
-- 775
-
-- 780
-
-- 785
-
-- plus all of the 5xx fields in the Notes tab at the bottom
-
-`Subtitle Display on Bib Records <#displaysubtitle>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**: How do I get the subtitle to display on the detail pages
-for my bib records?
-
-**Answer**: Subtitle display now depends on there being a `keyword
-mapping <#keywordmapping>`__ for the MARC field in question. Adding a
-mapping for "subtitle" -> "245b" for an item's framework results in
-display of the subtitle in OPAC and staff client search and detail pages
-(although not in all instances where subtitles might be displayed, e.g.
-the Cart).
-
-`Show patrons the barcodes of items they have checked out <#opacbarcodesfaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**: Can patrons see the barcodes for the items they have
-checked out.
-
-**Answer**: Not by default, but with a few edits to the patron record
-you can make a barcode column appear on the patron's check out summary
-in the OPAC. You can set up a `patron
-attribute <#patronattributetypes>`__ with the value of SHOW\_BCODE and
-`authorized value <#authorizedvalues>`__ of YES\_NO to make this happen.
-
-Add SHOW\_BCODE patron attribute
-|image1112|
-
-Then on the `patron's record set the value <#editpatrons>`__ for
-SHOW\_BCODE to yes.
-
-Setting value for SHOW\_BCODE on patron record
-|image1113|
-
-This will add a column to the check out summary in the OPAC that shows
-the patrons the barcodes of the items they have checked out.
-
-Barcode number on checkout list in OPAC
-|image1114|
-
-Clicking on the 'Overdue' tab will show only the items that are overdue.
-
-`Circulation/Notices <#circfaq>`__
-----------------------------------
-
-`Book drop Date <#dropboxfaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**: How is the book drop date is determined? Is it the last
-open date for the checkout branch? Is it today's date minus one? Can the
-book drop checkin date be set?
-
-**Answer**: If the library is closed for four days for renovations, for
-example, there would be more than one day needed for the book drop date.
-You will only have one book drop date and that will be the last day that
-the library open (determined by the holiday calendar) because there is
-no real way to know what day the books were dropped into the box during
-the 4 closed days. The only way to change the effective checkin date in
-book drop mode is to modify the calendar.
-
-`Holds to Pull and Holds Queue <#holdsreportsfaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**: What is the difference between the `Holds
-Queue <#holdsqueue>`__ and `Holds to Pull <#holdspull>`__?
-
-**Answer**: The holds to pull report gives a simple list of what holds
-need to be filled with available items. It should only be used in Koha
-installations where there is only one library.
-
-The holds queue tries to do the same thing, but in a 'smarter' way. This
-allows it to split up the list by library, consult the `transport cost
-matrix <#transportcostmatrix>`__ and refresh regularly to provide
-different pull lists to each library.
-
-`Duplicate Overdue Notices <#dupoverduefaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**: Why are patrons getting two overdue notices?
-
-**Answer**: This tool takes all branches in the overdue rules and sent
-notifications to them. So, if you have a default rule & a branch rule,
-the notification will be generated twice. A quick fix is to discard
-"default rule" for instance.
-
-`Printing Overdue Notices <#printoverduefaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**: Can I print overdue notices for patrons without email
-addresses on file?
-
-**Answer**: Yes. The `overdue notice cron job <#overduenoticecron>`__
-has a setting to generate the overdue notices as HTML for printing. An
-example of this usage would be:
-
-::
-
- overdue_notices.pl -t -html /tmp/noticedir -itemscontent issuedate,date_due,title,barcode,author
-
-In this example, we wanted to use only certain item fields in our
-notices, so we specified itemscontent fields in the cron entry; that's
-not a requirement for the feature.
-
-The command line needs to specify a web-accessible directory where the
-print notices will go -- they get a filename like
-notices-2009-11-24.html (or holdnotices-2009-11-24.html). The overdue
-notice itself can be formatted to fit a Z-mailer. Within the notice
-file, the text is spaced down or over to where it will print properly on
-the form. The script has code that wraps around the notice file to tell
-the HTML to obey the formatting, and to do a page break between notices.
-That's so that when staff print it out, they get one per page. We had to
-add an extra syspref (`PrintNoticesMaxLines <#PrintNoticesMaxLines>`__)
-to specify page length because our client allows a \_lot\_ of checkouts
-which meant some notices were running onto multiple pages. That syspref
-says to truncate the print notice at that page length and put in a
-message about go check your OPAC account for the full list.
-
-The print and email overdues use the same notice file. The print notices
-for holds are different -- there's a separate HOLD\_PRINT notice file
-and the system uses it if there's no email address. Then a nightly cron
-job runs to gather those up from the message queue and put them in an
-HTML file in the notice directory, as above.
-
-The cron entry is gather\_print\_notices.pl /tmp/noticedir
-
-`Unable to Renew Items <#renewfaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**: We're trying to renew some items for our patron. One of
-the items is on hold and ineligible for renewal, but the other two items
-refuse to renew even though they should be eligible. When I try to use
-the override renewal limit, it just returns a little message that says
-"renewal failed". Any idea what's going on here?
-
-**Answer**: At the very least you will need to set an absolute `default
-circulation rule <#circfinerules>`__. This rule should be set for the
-default itemtype, default branchcode and default patron category. That
-will catch anyone who doesn't match a specific rule. Patrons who do not
-match a specific rule will get blocked from placing holds or renewing
-items, since there was no baseline number of holds or renewals to
-utilize.
-
-`Unable to Place Holds <#holdsfaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**: Why can't I place holds when I have all of the preferences
-turned on.
-
-**Answer**: You probably need to set a default circulation rule. At the
-very least you will need to set an default circulation rule. This rule
-should be set for all item types, all branches and all patron
-categories. That will catch all instances that do not match a specific
-rule. When checking out if you do not have a rule for the default
-branch, default item and default patron category then you may see
-patrons getting blocked from placing holds.
-
-`Keyboard Shortcuts <#keyboardshort>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**: Do I have to use my mouse to access the checkout, checkin
-and cataloging tabs at the top of the circulation pages?
-
-**Answer**: You can jump between the tabs on the quick search box at the
-top of the screen by using the following hot keys (if the tab is
-available):
-
-- jump to the catalog search with Alt+Q
-
-- jump to the checkout with Alt+U
-
- - this will not work for Mac user
-
-- jump to the checkin with Alt+R
-
- **Note**
-
- Mac users use the OPTION button in place of ALT
-
-`SMS Notices/Messages <#smsnoticefaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**: I want Koha to send notices via SMS, what do I need to do?
-
-**Answer**: First you need to choose a SMS service to use with Koha.
-There is a list available here:
-http://search.cpan.org/search?query=sms%3A%3Asend&mode=all Not all SMS
-services available to libraries have Perl drivers, so be sure to check
-this list to see if the provider you're considering is listed. If not
-you want to ask your provider if they have a Perl module, if not you
-should consider another service. Some common options in the US (that
-have Perl drivers) are:
-
-- AQL (`www.aql.com `__)
-
-- Wadja (`wadja.com `__)
-
-- Ipipi (`ipipi.com `__)
-
-- T-mobile
-
-- SMSDiscount (`smsdiscount.com `__)
-
-- Clickatell
-
-**Question**: What about in India?
-
-**Answer**: India does not yet have too many options here. This is
-partly due to the Telecom regulatory authority's (TRAI) stipulations
-about transactional SMSes and limits on the number of SMSes that may be
-sent / received per users per day. India specific drivers include:
-
-- Unicel Technologies Pvt Ltd (`unicel.in `__)
-
-`Cataloging <#catfaq>`__
-------------------------
-
-`Authority Fields <#authorityfaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question:**\ Why can't I edit 1xx, 6xx, or 7xx fields in my catalog
-record?
-
-**Answer:** These fields are authority controlled and you probably have
-the `BiblioAddsAuthorities <#BiblioAddsAuthorities>`__ set to "Don't
-allow". When it is set to "Don't allow" these fields will be locked and
-require you to search for an existing authority record to populate the
-field with. To allow typing in these authority fields set
-`BiblioAddsAuthorities <#BiblioAddsAuthorities>`__ to 'Allow'.
-
- **Note**
-
- Fields affected by this preference will show a lock symbol in them
-
-Fields affected by this preference show a lock in the field
-|image1115|
-
-`Koha to MARC Mapping <#kohamarcfaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**: What's the relationship between 'Koha to MARC Mapping' and
-'MARC Bibliographic Frameworks'?
-
-**Answer**: Mapping can be defined through 'MARC Bibliographic
-Frameworks' OR 'Koha to MARC Mapping'. 'Koha to MARC Mapping' is just a
-shortcut to speed up linkage. If you change a mapping in one of these
-modules, the mapping will change in the other as well. (In other words,
-the two modules 'overwrite' each other in order to prevent conflicts
-from existing in Koha).
-
-`Number of Items Per Bib Record <#itemsperbibfaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**: Is there a limit on the number of items I can attach to a
-bib record?
-
-**Answer**: There is no explicit limit to the number of items you can
-attach to a bibliographic record, but if you attach enough of them, your
-MARC record will exceed the maximum file size limit for the ISO 2709
-standard, which breaks indexing for that record. I've found this occurs
-somewhere between 600 and 1000 items on a 'normal' bibliographic record.
-
-`Analytics <#analyticsfaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**: I am using the
-`EasyAnalyticalRecords <#EasyAnalyticalRecords>`__ feature, but my links
-in the OPAC and Staff Client to 'Show Analytics' are not working.
-
-**Answer**: If you plan on using
-`EasyAnalyticalRecords <#EasyAnalyticalRecords>`__ you will want to make
-sure to set your `UseControlNumber <#UseControlNumber>`__ preference to
-"Don't use," this will prevent broken links.
-
-`Acquisitions <#acqfaq>`__
---------------------------
-
-`Planning Categories <#planningcatfaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**: What is a planning category?
-
-**Answer**: When you plan in advance for the way your budget is going to
-be spent, you initially plan for how it's going to be spent over time,
-that's the most natural thing to do.
-
-So you plan for $1000 in Jan. $1000 in Feb., $3000 in March, etc. You
-can basically do the same thing with a list of values in lieu of the
-months.
-
-Say you have a list like this one:
-
-- < 1 month
-
-- < 6 months
-
-- < 1 year
-
-- < 3 years
-
-- < 10 years
-
-- > 10 years
-
-The list is meant to represent when the books acquired where published.
-Then you plan for it, saying: we went to spend at list 40% of our
-budgets on books published less than a year ago, 10% on books more than
-10 years old, etc.
-
-Upon acquiring new material, you'll be able to select, for a given item,
-a value from this list in a drop down. Then, after the material has been
-acquired, at the end of the year, you'll be able to compare the goals
-set, with what's been achieved.
-
-`Serials <#serialsfaq>`__
--------------------------
-
-`Advanced Patterns <#advancedpatternfaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**: What is the 'inner counter' on the advanced serials
-pattern interface?
-
-**Answer**: I think it is better to give an example to understand this :
-
-Example for a monthly subscription :
-
-- First issue publication date : April 2010
-
-- Numbering : No {X}, year {Y}
-
-- First issue : No 4, year 2010
-
-For the year Y : you will want the year change on January 2011
-
-So, the advanced pattern for Y will be :
-
-- Add : 1
-
-- once every : 12
-
-- When more than 9999999
-
-- inner counter : 3
-
-- Set back to 0
-
-- Begins with 2010
-
-Year is going to change after 12 received issues from April 2010, that
-is in April 2011 if you don't set inner counter. Set inner counter to 3
-will say to Koha : change year after 12-3 = 9 received issues.
-
-Inner counter says to Koha to take into account the first issues of the
-year, even if they are not received with Koha. If you begin with first
-issue of the year write nothing or 0.
-
-`Reports <#reportsfaq>`__
--------------------------
-
-`Define Codes Stored in DB <#accounttypefaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-`Fines Table <#finescodefaq>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-**Question:** What do the codes in the accounttype field in the
-accountlines table stand for?
-
-**Answer:**
-
-- A = Account management fee
-
-- C = Credit
-
-- F = Overdue fine
-
-- FOR = Forgiven
-
-- FU = Overdue, still acccruing
-
-- L = Lost item
-
-- LR = Lost item returned/refunded
-
-- M = Sundry
-
-- N = New card
-
-- PAY = Payment
-
-- W = Writeoff
-
-`Statistics Table <#statscodefaq>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-**Question:**\ What are the possible codes for the type field in the
-statistics table?
-
-**Answer:**
-
-- localuse
-
- - Registers if an item that had been checked out to a statistics
- patron (category type = 'X') is returned
-
-- issue
-
-- return
-
-- renew
-
-- writeoff
-
-- payment
-
-- CreditXXX
-
- - The XXX stores different types of fee credits, so a query to catch
- them all would include a clause like "type LIKE 'Credit%'"
-
-`Reserves Table <#rescodefaq>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-**Question**: What are the possible codes for the found field in the
-reserves and old\_reserves tables?
-
-**Answer**:
-
-- NULL: means the patron requested the 1st available, and we haven't
- chosen the item
-
-- T = Transit: the reserve is linked to an item but is in transit to
- the pickup branch
-
-- W = Waiting: the reserve is linked to an item, is at the pickup
- branch, and is waiting on the hold shelf
-
-- F = Finished: the reserve has been completed, and is done
-
-`Reports Dictionary Table <#reportdicfaq>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-**Question**: What are the possible codes for the area field in the
-reports\_dictionary table?
-
-**Answer**:
-
-- 1 = Circulation
-
-- 2 = Catalog
-
-- 3 = Patrons
-
-- 4 = Acquisitions
-
-- 5 = Accounts
-
-`Messages Table <#msgtablefaq>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-**Question**: What are the possible codes for the message\_type field in
-the messages table?
-
-**Answer**:
-
-- L = For Librarians
-
-- B = For Patrons/Borrowers
-
-`Serial Table <#serialtablefaq>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-**Question**: What are the possible codes for the status field in the
-serial table?
-
-**Answer**:
-
-- 1 = Expected
-
-- 2 = Arrived
-
-- 3 = Late
-
-- 4 = Missing
-
-- 5 = Not available
-
-- 6 = Delete
-
-- 7 = Claimed
-
-- 8 = Stopped
-
-- 41 = Missing (not received)
-
-- 42 = Missing (sold out)
-
-- 43 = Missing (damaged)
-
-- 44 = Missing (lost)
-
-`Borrowers Table <#borrowerprivacyvalues>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-**Question**: What are the possible codes for the privacy field in the
-borrowers table?
-
-**Answer**:
-
-- 0 = Forever
-
-- 1 = Default
-
-- 2 = Never
-
-`Messaging Preferences <#messpreffaq>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-**Question**: What are the possible codes in the message\_attribute\_id
-field in the borrower\_message\_preferences table?
-
-**Answer**:
-
-- 2 = advanced notice
-
-- 6 = item checkout
-
-- 4 = hold filled
-
-- 1 = item due
-
-- 5 = item check in
-
-`Runtime Parameters <#runtimefaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**: Is there a way to filter my custom SQL reports before they
-run?
-
-**Answer**: If you feel that your report might be too resource intensive
-you might want to consider using runtime parameters to your query.
-Runtime parameters basically make a filter appear before the report is
-run to save your system resources.
-
-There is a specific syntax that Koha will understand as 'ask for values
-when running the report'. The syntax is <>.
-
-- The << and >> are just delimiters. You must put << at the beginning
- and >> at the end of your parameter
-
-- The 'Question to ask' will be displayed on the left of the string to
- enter.
-
-- The authorized\_value can be omitted if not applicable. If it
- contains an authorized value category, or branches or itemtype or
- categorycode or biblio\_framework, a list with the Koha authorized
- values will be displayed instead of a free field Note that you can
- have more than one parameter in a given SQL Note that entering
- nothing at run time won't probably work as you expect. It will be
- considered as "value empty" not as "ignore this parameter". For
- example entering nothing for : "title=<>" will display
- results with title='' (no title). If you want to have to have
- something not mandatory, use "title like <>" and enter a
- % at run time instead of nothing
-
-Examples:
-
-- SELECT surname,firstname FROM borrowers WHERE branchcode=<> AND surname like <>
-
-- SELECT \* FROM items WHERE homebranch = <> and barcode like <>
-
-- SELECT title , author FROM biblio WHERE frameworkcode=<>
-
- **Note**
-
- To generate a date picker calendar to the right of the field when
- running a report you can use the 'date' keyword like this: <>
-
- Date Picker
- |image1116|
-
- **Note**
-
- You have to put "%" in a text box to 'leave it blank'. Otherwise, it
- literally looks for "" (empty string) as the value for the field.
-
- **Important**
-
- In addition to using any authorized value code to generate a
- dropdown, you can use the following values as well: Framework codes
- (biblio\_framework), Branches (branches), Item Types (itemtypes) and
- Patron Categories (categorycode). For example a branch pull down
- would be generated like this <>
-
- Branch pull down
- |image1117|
-
-`Results Limited <#reportlimitfaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**: When I download my report it's limited to 10,000 results,
-how do I get all of the results to download?
-
-**Answer**: There is a limit of 10,000 records put on SQL statements
-entered in Koha. To get around this you want to add 'LIMIT 100000' to
-the end of your SQL statement (or any other number above 10,000.
-
-`Searching <#searchfaq>`__
---------------------------
-
-`Advanced Search <#advancedsearchfaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-`Scan Indexes <#scanindexfaq>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-**Question**: What does 'scan indexes' on the advanced search page mean?
-
-**Answer**: When you choose an index, enter a term, click 'scan indexes'
-and do the search, Koha displays the searched term and the following
-terms found in this index with the number of corresponding records That
-is search is not made directly in the catalog, but first in the indexes
-It works only for one index at once, and only with no limit in Location
-(All libraries needed)
-
-`Searching for Terms that Start With a Character <#searchstartswith>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-**Question**: How do I search for all titles that start with the letter
-'C'?
-
-**Answer**: You can choose to search for things that start with a
-character or series of characters by using the CCL 'first-in-subfield'
-
-- example: ti,first-in-subfield=C
-
-`Wildcard Searching <#wildcardsearchfaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**:What is the difference between a keyword search using the
-'\*' (asterisk) versus a keyword search using the '%' (percent)? Both
-work in the catalog, but return different sets. Why?
-
-**Answer**: A wildcard is a character (\*,?,%,.) that can be used to
-represent one or more characters in a word. Two of the wildcard
-characters that can be used in Koha searches are the asterisk ('\*') and
-the percent sign ('%'). However, these two characters act differently
-when used in searching.
-
-The '\*' is going to force a more exact search of the first few
-characters you enter prior to the '\*'. The asterisk will allow for an
-infinite number of characters in the search as long as the first few
-characters designated by your search remain the same. For example,
-searching for authors using the term, Smi\*, will return a list that may
-include Smith, Smithers, Smithfield, Smiley, etc depending on the
-authors in your database.
-
-The '%' will treat the words you enter in the terms of "is like". So a
-search of Smi% will search for words like Smi. This results in a much
-more varied results list. For example, a search on Smi% will return a
-list containing Smothers, Smith, Smelley, Smithfield and many others
-depending on what is your database.
-
-The bottom line in searching with wildcards: '\*' is more exact while
-'%' searches for like terms.
-
-`Title Searching <#titlesearchingfaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**: Why does my Zebra title search for 'Help' not turn up 'The
-help' in the first pages of results?
-
-**Answer**: When doing a title search, you actually want to search for
-the title (i.e., 'the help' rather than just 'help'), and it will bubble
-right up to the top. If you're just searching for 'help' then the
-relevance ranking is going to affect the results you see.
-
-When it comes to relevance in Zebra, here's what's happening. First, the
-search is done. If you search for the title "help", then any title that
-has "help" in it comes back. Then from those records, separately, it
-does relevance on the \*whole\* record. The more your word appears, the
-more relevant, and some MARC tags are worth more points than others. So
-a self-help book with 505 notes where "help" appears a \*lot\* will be
-at the top, regardless of keyword or title.
-
-But when you add a \*second word\*, that helps it figure things out, as
-it's weighing the relevance of both words and the phrase. Because of the
-way relevance works, if you search "the help", then "the help" or "the
-help I need" are more relevant than "the way to help", because they
-appear together in order. Likewise, "help the girl" would be lower
-relevance, because it's out of order, and "help for the homeless" would
-be lower still, as they're out of order, and apart.
-
-The moral of the story is that single word searches, particularly on
-common words, will always struggle a bit; it can't evaluate relevance
-well, because you've not given it enough input.
-
-`Enhanced Content <#enhancedcontentfaq>`__
-------------------------------------------
-
-`FRBRizing Content <#frbrfaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question:**\ At our public library we are running a Koha installation
-and we've tried to turn on all the nice functionalities in Koha such as
-the frbrising tool, but do not get the same result as Nelsonville public
-library.
-
-**Answer:**\ In fact, this feature is quite tricky to make that right.
-First it looks at XISBN service. And then search in your database for
-that ISBN. So both XISBN and your internal ISBN (in biblio table) have
-to be normalized. You could therefore use the script
-misc/batchupdateISBNs.pl (it removes all the - in your local ISBNs)
-
-`Amazon <#amzfaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-`All Amazon Content <#amazonfaq>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-**Question**: I have all of the Amazon preferences turned on and have
-entered both of my keys, but none of the content appears in my system,
-why is that?
-
-**Answer**: Amazon's API checks your server time on all requests and if
-your server time is not set properly requests will be denied. To resolve
-this issue be sure to set your system time appropriately. Once that
-change in made Amazon content should appear immediately.
-
-On Debian the the command is *date -s "2010-06-30 17:21"* (with the
-proper date and time for your timezone).
-
-`System Administration <#systemfaq>`__
---------------------------------------
-
-`Errors in Zebra Cron <#zebracronfaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**: I am noticing some errors in the
-koha-zebradaemon-output.log file. When new records are added it takes a
-bit longer to index than we think they should. Running rebuild zebra is
-often faster. Zebra ends up indexing and search works, but I am
-concerned about the errors. Any ideas?
-
-**Answer**: Rebuild\_zebra.pl -r deletes all of the files in the Zebra
-db directories (such as reci-0.mf) and then recreates them. Thus,
-permissions will be lost, and the files will be owned by the user who
-ran rebuild\_zebra.pl. If one rebuilds the zebra indexes as root, the
-daemons, which typically run under the user Koha, will not be able to
-update the indexes. Thus, it's important then that the zebra rebuilds
-are put in the cronjob file of the user Koha, and not root. Also
-important is that other users, such as root, don't manually execute
-rebuilds.
-
-If one desires that another user be able to execute rebuild\_zebra.pl,
-he should be given the permission to execute 'sudo -u Koha
-.../rebuild\_zebra.pl,' (if you want to do this, you also have to edit
-the sudoers file to pass the PERL5LIB variable with the env\_keep option
-as by default sudo strips away almost all environment variables). Or, as
-root user, one can use a simple 'su koha' and then the rebuild\_zebra.pl
-command.
-
-I've also tried to set the sticky bit on rebuild\_zebra.pl, but for
-whatever reason it didn't seem to work due to some problem with the
-PERL5LIB variable that I wasn't able to figure. That seems to me the
-easiest thing to do, if anybody has any idea how to make it work. If it
-worked and were the default, I think it would help folks to avoid a
-great deal of the problems that come up with zebra.
-
-`Making Z39.50 Target Public <#publicztarget>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**: Could someone tell me the exact steps I need to take to
-configure Zebra to expose my Koha 3 db as a public Z39.50 service?
-
-**Answer**: Edit the KOHA\_CONF file that your Koha is using. Uncomment
-the publicserver line like:
-
-
-
-to be:
-
-tcp:@:9999
-
-Then restart zebasrv and connect on the port specified (9999).
-
-`Shelving Location Authorized Values <#authvalfaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**: When editing an item, the new shelving location I created
-is not showing up by default in the items where I assigned it to.
-
-**Answer**: This is because you created the new shelving location with a
-code value of 0 (zero) Just FYI the system interprets authorized values
-of 0 as equaling a null so when you edit a record in cataloging where
-the authorized value in a field was assigned where the code was 0, the
-value displays as null in the item editor (or MARC editor) instead of
-the value the library meant it to be.
-
-`Why do I need Authorized Values? <#whyauthvals>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**: Why would I want to define authorized values for MARC
-tags?
-
-**Answer**: Authorized Values create a 'controlled vocabulary' for your
-staff. As an example, let us assume that your Koha installation is used
-by several libraries, and you use MARC 21. You might want to restrict
-the 850a MARC subfield to the institution codes for just those
-libraries. In that case, you could define an authorized values category
-(perhaps called "INST") and enter the institution codes as the
-authorized values for that category.
-
- **Note**
-
- Koha automatically sets up authorized value categories for your item
- types and branch codes, and you can link these authorized values to
- MARC subfields when you set up your MARC tag structure.
-
-`How do I clean up the sessions table? <#sessionstblfaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**: Is there a periodic job that can be run to cull old
-sessions from the table? We don't want to backup all the useless session
-data every night.
-
-**Answer**: You can run `cleanup database cron job <#cleandbcron>`__.
-
-Or just before doing a backup command (mysqldump), you can truncate
-session table: Â
-
-::
-
- mysql -u`__
----------------------------
-
-`Barcode Scanners <#barcodefaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-**Question**: What barcode scanners have been known to work with Koha?
-
-**Answer**: The simple rule of thumb is, does it act like a keyboard
-device?, if so, it will work. (i.e. can you take the scanner, scan a
-barcode and have it show up in a text editor, if so, it will work.)
-
-The main points to check are that it connects to your PC conveniently
-(can be USB or "keyboard wedge" which means it connects in line with the
-keyboard, which is useful with older computers), and that it scans the
-barcode type that you are using.
-
-It is a good idea to test some 'used' barcodes if you have any, to see
-whether the scanner can read scuffed or slightly wrinkled ones
-successfully. Most scanners are capable of reading several barcode types
-- there are many, and the specification should list the ones it can
-read. You may need to adjust settings slightly, such as prefix and
-suffix characters, or whether you want to send an 'enter' character or
-not.
-
-One more tip - some can be set 'always on' and may come with a stand,
-some have triggers under the handle, some have buttons on top, some are
-held like a pen. Think about the staff working with the hardware before
-choosing, as a button in the wrong place can be very awkward to use.
-
-`Printers <#printersfaq>`__
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-`Printers used by Koha libraries <#kohaprinters>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-- POS-X receipt printer
-
-- Star Micronics printer (exact model unknown) with a generic/plain
- text driver.
-
-- Star SP2000 (Nelsonville)
-
-- Star TSP-100 futurePRINT (Geauga)
-
- - "I know there have been a lot of questions on receipt printers so
- I thought I'd pass on my findings. We have been testing the Star
- TSP-100 futurePRINT. I found this print to be VERY easy to
- configure for Koha. I was even able to customize the print job by
- adding our system logo (a .gif) to the top of every receipt. Also
- with a bitmap created in Paint was able to add a message at the
- bottom of each receipt with the contact information, hours and
- website for the library that the materials were checked out at."
-
-- Epson TM 88 IIIP thermal receipt printers
-
-- Epson TM-T88IV
-
-- 1x1 labels using a Dymolabelwriter printer
-
-`Braille Support <#braillefaq>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-**Question**: Are there any braille embosser or printer which has
-inbuilt braille converter and it is accessible with UNIX environment?
-
-**Answer**: You may want to look into BRLTTY
-(http://www.emptech.info/product_details.php?ID=1232).
-
-`Additional Support <#hardwaresupport>`__
-^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-
-- http://www.nexpresslibrary.org/go-live/configure-your-receipt-printers/
-
-Extending Koha
-==============
-
-`Amazon lookup script for Koha libraries <#amzlookup>`__
---------------------------------------------------------
-
-We order most of our materials from Amazon, so I've been looking for a
-convenient way to tell if a book under consideration is in our catalog
-already.
-
-Greasemonkey & a custom user script fit the bill nicely:
-
-- https://addons.mozilla.org/en-US/firefox/addon/748
-
-- http://userscripts.org/scripts/show/56847
-
-A few caveats:
-
-- Like most scripts, this one was designed to work with Firefox; I
- haven't explored getting it to work with other browsers.
-
-- I'm not a JavaScript programmer -- this was adapted from others'
- work. Just a few lines would have to be changed to get the script to
- work with your catalog.
-
-- It depends on the existence of ISBN for the item in question, so
- movies, older books, etc. would not work.
-
-Others have added all sorts of bells & whistles: XISBN lookups to search
-for related titles, custom messages based on the status of items (on
-order, on hold, etc.), ... just search the UserScripts site for Amazon +
-library. For a later date!
-
-`Keyword Clouds <#extendkeywordclouds>`__
------------------------------------------
-
-In addition to the traditional tag cloud available in Koha, there is a
-way to generate clouds for popular subjects within Koha.
-
-The `Author/Subject Cloud cron job <#keywordclouds>`__ is used to help
-with this process. This cron job sends its output to files.
-
-- /home/koha/mylibrary/koharoot/koha-tmpl/cloud-author.html
-
-- /home/koha/yourlibrary/koharoot/koha-tmpl/cloud-subject.html
-
-This means that you can produce clouds for authors, collective author,
-all kind of subjects, classifications, etc. And since it works on zebra
-indexes, it is quick, even on large DBs. Tags clouds are sent to files.
-It's up to library webmaster to deal with those files in order to
-include them in `OPACMainUserBlock <#OpacMainUserBlock>`__, or include
-them into their library CMS.
-
-Some libraries even send the file into a Samba shared folder where
-webmaster take them, eventually clean them a little bit before
-integrating them into navigation widgets or pages.
-
-`Newest Titles Pulldown <#newtitlesoption>`__
----------------------------------------------
-
-Often we want to add a way for our patrons to do searches for the newest
-items. In this example I'll show you how to create a pull down menu of
-the newest items by item type. These tips will work (with a couple
-changes) for collection codes or shelving locations as well.
-
-First, it's important to note that every link in Koha is a permanent
-link. This means if I do a search for everything of a specific item type
-sorted by the acquisitions date and bookmark that URL, whenever I click
-it I'll see the newest items of that type on the first few pages of the
-results.
-
-I took this knowledge and wrote a form takes this functionality in to
-consideration. It basically just does a search of your Koha catalog for
-a specific item type and sorts the results by acquisitions date.
-
-The first thing I did was write a MySQL statement to generate a list of
-item types for me - why copy and paste when you can use the power of
-MySQL?
-
-::
-
- select concat('') from itemtypes
-
-The above looks at the itemtypes table and slaps the necessary HTML
-around each item type for me. I then exported that to CSV and opened it
-in my text editor and added the other parts of the form.
-
-::
-
-
New Items
-
-
-
-Now, what does all of that mean? The important bits are these:
-
-First the starting of the form.
-
-::
-
-